Transaxle & Transmission: Section

TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE
TM
A
B
SECTION
TRANSAXLE & TRANSMISSION C
TM
E
CONTENTS
6MT: RS6F94R NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS F
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ........................... 21
PRECAUTION .............................................. 11 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ....................................21
G
PRECAUTIONS ..................................................11 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ........................ 22
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- GEAR OIL ......................................................... 22
SIONER" ................................................................. 11 Inspection ................................................................22 H
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover.... 11 Draining ...................................................................22
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ........... 11 Refilling ....................................................................22
Service Notice or Precautions for Manual Tran- I
saxle ........................................................................ 12 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 23
PREPARATION ........................................... 13 SIDE OIL SEAL ................................................. 23

Removal and Installation .........................................23 J
PREPARATION ..................................................13 Inspection ................................................................23
Special Service Tools .............................................. 13
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 15 POSITION SWITCH .......................................... 24 K
Removal and Installation .........................................24
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 17 Inspection ................................................................24
COMPONENT PARTS .......................................17 CONTROL LINKAGE ........................................ 25 L

Component Parts Location ...................................... 17 Exploded View .........................................................25
Removal and Installation .........................................25
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION .......................18 Inspection ................................................................28 M
Sectional View ......................................................... 18
System Description ................................................. 18 AIR BREATHER HOSE .................................... 29
Exploded View .........................................................29
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 20 Removal and Installation .........................................29 N
POSITION SWITCH ............................................20 UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...... 30

BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH ........................................ 20 O
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ................................ 30
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH : Component Inspec- Exploded View .........................................................30
tion .......................................................................... 20 Removal and Installation .........................................30
Inspection ................................................................31 P
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH ........... 20
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH : UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ... 32
Component Inspection ............................................ 20
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ................................ 32
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 21 Exploded View .........................................................32
Disassembly ............................................................37
Assembly .................................................................42
Revision: November 2015 TM-1 2016 JUKE

Inspection ............................................................... 48 BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH : Component Inspec-
tion .......................................................................... 78
INPUT SHAFT AND GEAR ............................... 49
Exploded View ........................................................ 49 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH ........... 78
Disassembly ........................................................... 49 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH :
Assembly ................................................................ 51 Component Inspection ............................................ 78
Inspection ............................................................... 53
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 79
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR .................................. 55
Exploded View ........................................................ 55 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
Disassembly ........................................................... 56 (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................ 79
Assembly ................................................................ 57 NVH Troubleshooting Chart .................................... 79
Inspection ............................................................... 59
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................... 80
REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEAR ............. 61
Exploded View ........................................................ 61 GEAR OIL .......................................................... 80
Disassembly ........................................................... 61 Inspection ................................................................ 80
Assembly ................................................................ 62 Draining ................................................................... 80
Inspection ............................................................... 62 Refilling ................................................................... 80
FINAL DRIVE ..................................................... 64 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 81

Exploded View ........................................................ 64
SIDE OIL SEAL ................................................. 81
Disassembly ........................................................... 64
Removal and Installation ......................................... 81
Assembly ................................................................ 65
Inspection ............................................................... 65 POSITION SWITCH ........................................... 82
Removal and Installation ......................................... 82
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Inspection ................................................................ 82
(SDS) ........................................................... 67
CONTROL LINKAGE ........................................ 83
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Exploded View ........................................................ 83
(SDS) .................................................................. 67 Removal and Installation ......................................... 83
General Specifications ............................................ 67
6MT: RS6F52H AIR BREATHER HOSE ..................................... 85
Exploded View ........................................................ 85
PRECAUTION ............................................. 68 Removal and Installation ......................................... 85
PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 68 UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .... 86

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ................................ 86
SIONER" ................................................................. 68 Exploded View ........................................................ 86
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover... 68 Removal and Installation ......................................... 86
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ........... 68
Precaution for Work ................................................ 69
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ... 88
Service Notice or Precaution .................................. 69 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ................................ 88
Exploded View ........................................................ 88
PREPARATION ........................................... 71
Disassembly ............................................................ 92
PREPARATION ................................................. 71 Assembly ................................................................ 99
Special Service Tool ............................................... 71 Adjustment ............................................................ 109
Commercial Service Tool ....................................... 74
INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS ............................ 117
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................ 76 Exploded View ...................................................... 117
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 118
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION ...................... 76
Sectional View ........................................................ 76 MAINSHAFT AND GEARS .............................. 125
System Description ................................................. 77 Exploded View ...................................................... 125
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 125
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 78
REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEARS .......... 134
POSITION SWITCH ........................................... 78 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 134
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH ........................................ 78 FINAL DRIVE .................................................... 136

Exploded View ...................................................... 136 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : CVT Fluid Tempera-
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 136 ture Sensor ............................................................ 159 A
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure
SHIFT CONTROL ............................................. 139 Sensor ................................................................... 159
Exploded View ...................................................... 139 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Sole-
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 139 B
noid Valve .............................................................. 160
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Solenoid Valve ....................................................... 160
(SDS) .......................................................... 143 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter C
Clutch Solenoid Valve ........................................... 160
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Lock-up Select Sole-
(SDS) ................................................................ 143 noid Valve .............................................................. 160 TM
General Specification ............................................ 143 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Step Motor ................ 161
Gear End Play ....................................................... 144 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch.. 161
Baulk Ring Clearance ........................................... 144 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : CVT Indicator ............ 161
Available Snap Rings ............................................ 144 E
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Shift Position Indica-
Available C-Rings .................................................. 145 tor .......................................................................... 161
Available Thrust Washer ....................................... 145
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Indica-
Available Adjusting Shims ..................................... 146 tor .......................................................................... 161 F
Available Shims ..................................................... 147
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Paddle Shifter ........... 162
CVT: RE0F10B
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ............................................ 162 G
PRECAUTION ............................................ 149 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca-
tion ......................................................................... 162
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 149 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Description.. 162
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System H
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- STRUCTURE AND OPERATION ................... 164
SIONER" ............................................................... 149
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover.. 149 TRANSAXLE ............................................................ 164
I
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ......... 149 TRANSAXLE : Cross-Sectional View .................... 164
Precaution for On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System TRANSAXLE : Main Component Elements ........... 165
of CVT and Engine ................................................ 150 TRANSAXLE : Belt & Pulley .................................. 166
J
Precaution for TCM and Transaxle Assembly Re-
FLUID COOLER & FLUID WARMER SYSTEM ...... 167
placement .............................................................. 150
FLUID COOLER & FLUID WARMER SYSTEM :
Removal and Installation Procedure for CVT Unit System Description ................................................ 167
Connector .............................................................. 150 K
General Precautions ............................................. 152 MECHANICAL SYSTEM .......................................... 168
Service Notice or Precaution ................................. 152 MECHANICAL SYSTEM : System Diagram .......... 169
MECHANICAL SYSTEM : System Description ..... 169 L
PREPARATION ......................................... 154 MECHANICAL SYSTEM : Component Descrip-
tion ......................................................................... 173
PREPARATION ................................................ 154
Special Service Tool ............................................. 154 SYSTEM .......................................................... 175 M
Commercial Service Tool ...................................... 154
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................ 175
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 156 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description .. 175 N
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : System Diagram ....... 176
COMPONENT PARTS ..................................... 156 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-Safe .................... 176
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ....................................... 156 OIL PRESSURE CONTROL SYSTEM .................... 178 O
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Lo- OIL PRESSURE CONTROL SYSTEM : System
cation ..................................................................... 156 Diagram ................................................................. 178
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Descrip- OIL PRESSURE CONTROL SYSTEM : System P
tion ........................................................................ 157 Description ............................................................. 178
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM .......................... 158
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range CONTROL SYSTEM ................................................ 179
Switch .................................................................... 158 CONTROL SYSTEM : System Diagram ................ 179
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Speed Sen- CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description ........... 180
sor ......................................................................... 158 CONTROL SYSTEM : CAN Communication ......... 180
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Speed CONTROL SYSTEM : Engine and CVT Integrated
Sensor ................................................................... 158 Control (CAN Communication Control) ................. 181
CONTROL SYSTEM : Control between CVT and ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
Combination Meter (CAN Communication Con- CONTROL VALVE OR TRANSAXLE ASSEM-
trol) ........................................................................181 BLY ................................................................... 221
CONTROL SYSTEM : Control between CVT and Description ............................................................ 221
BCM (CAN Communication Control) .....................181 Work Procedure .................................................... 221
LOCK-UP AND SELECT CONTROL SYSTEM .......181 CVT FLUID COOLER SYSTEM ....................... 223
LOCK-UP AND SELECT CONTROL SYSTEM : Cleaning ................................................................ 223
System Diagram ....................................................181
LOCK-UP AND SELECT CONTROL SYSTEM : STALL TEST .................................................... 226
System Description ................................................181 Inspection and Judgment ...................................... 226
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM .....................................182 LINE PRESSURE TEST ................................... 228
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM : System Diagram ....182 Inspection and Judgment ...................................... 228
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description..182
ROAD TEST ..................................................... 230
INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM ........................184 Description ............................................................ 230
INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM : System Di- Check before Engine Is Started ............................ 230
agram ....................................................................185 Check at Idle ......................................................... 230
INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM : System De- Cruise Test ............................................................ 231
scription .................................................................185
CVT POSITION ................................................. 233
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ............................................186 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 233
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : System Description ........186
CVT FLUID ....................................................... 234
KEY LOCK SYSTEM ...............................................187
Changing ............................................................... 234
KEY LOCK SYSTEM : System Description ...........187
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 235
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ... 188
Diagnosis Description ............................................188 U0100 LOST COMMUNICATION (ECM A) ...... 235
DTC Logic ............................................................. 235
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) .......................... 190
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 235
CONSULT Function ...............................................190
ATFTEMP COUNT Conversion Table ...................194 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 236
Diagnostic Tool Function .......................................194 Description ............................................................ 236
DTC Logic ............................................................. 236
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............. 195 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 236
TCM .................................................................. 195 U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ........................ 237
Reference Value ....................................................195
Description ............................................................ 237
Fail-Safe ................................................................200
DTC Logic ............................................................. 237
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................202
DTC Index .............................................................203
P0703 BRAKE SWITCH B ............................... 238
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 205 Description ............................................................ 238
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ................................ 205 DTC Logic ............................................................. 238
Wiring Diagram ......................................................205
Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) .......... 239
CVT SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ............................ 213
Wiring Diagram ......................................................213
P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A.. 241
DTC Logic ............................................................. 241
BASIC INSPECTION .................................. 216 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 241
Component Inspection (Transmission Range
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ....... 216 Switch) .................................................................. 243
Work Flow ..............................................................216
Diagnostic Work Sheet ..........................................217 P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERA-
TURE SENSOR A ............................................. 244
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING DTC Logic ............................................................. 244
TCM .................................................................. 219 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 245
Description .............................................................219
Work Procedure .....................................................219 P0715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A ................... 248
DTC Logic ............................................................. 248

Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 248 DTC Logic .............................................................. 281
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 281 A
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR .................. 251
DTC Logic ............................................................. 251 P1705 TP SENSOR ......................................... 284
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 251 Description ............................................................. 284
DTC Logic .............................................................. 284 B
P0725 ENGINE SPEED .................................... 254 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 284
Description ............................................................ 254
DTC Logic ............................................................. 254 P1709 INCOMPLETED DATA WRITING ........ 285 C
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 254 Description ............................................................. 285
DTC Logic .............................................................. 285
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER ........................ 255 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 285
DTC Logic ............................................................. 255 TM
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 255 P1722 VEHICLE SPEED ................................. 287
Description ............................................................. 287
P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER ........................ 258 DTC Logic .............................................................. 287 E
Description ............................................................ 258 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 287
DTC Logic ............................................................. 258
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 258 P1723 SPEED SENSOR ................................. 288
Description ............................................................. 288 F
P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A.. 260 DTC Logic .............................................................. 288
DTC Logic ............................................................. 260 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 288
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 260 G
P1726 THROTTLE CONTROL SIGNAL ......... 290
P0746 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A.. 262 Description ............................................................. 290
Description ............................................................ 262 DTC Logic .............................................................. 290
DTC Logic ............................................................. 262 H
P1740 SELECT SOLENOID ........................... 291
P0776 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B.. 264 DTC Logic .............................................................. 291 I
Description ............................................................ 264 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 291
DTC Logic ............................................................. 264
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 264 P1777 STEP MOTOR ...................................... 293
J
DTC Logic .............................................................. 293
P0778 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B.. 266 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 293
DTC Logic ............................................................. 266
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 266 P1778 STEP MOTOR ...................................... 296 K
Description ............................................................. 296
P0826 UP AND DOWN SHIFT SW .................. 268 DTC Logic .............................................................. 296
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 269 L
Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch) ..... 272 SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT ........ 298
Component Inspection (Paddle Shifter) ................ 273 Description ............................................................. 298
Component Function Check .................................. 298 M
P0840 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 298
SEN/SW A ........................................................ 274
DTC Logic ............................................................. 274 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ................................... 299
Component Function Check .................................. 299 N
P0841 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid) ........ 301
SEN/SW A ........................................................ 277 Component Inspection (Park Position Switch) ...... 301 O
Description ............................................................ 277 Component Inspection (CVT Shift Selector Har-
DTC Logic ............................................................. 277 ness) ...................................................................... 301
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 277 Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) .......... 302 P
P0868 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE .. 279 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 303
Description ............................................................ 279
DTC Logic ............................................................. 279 SYSTEM SYMPTOM ....................................... 303
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 279 Symptom Table ..................................................... 303
P1701 TCM ....................................................... 281 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ...................... 314

Description ............................................................ 281

CVT FLUID ....................................................... 314 Inspection .............................................................. 343
Inspection ..............................................................314
WATER HOSE .................................................. 344
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 316 Exploded View ...................................................... 344
Removal and Installation ....................................... 344
CVT SHIFT SELECTOR .................................. 316 Inspection .............................................................. 345
Exploded View .......................................................316
Removal and Installation .......................................316 UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ... 347
Disassembly and Assembly ...................................317
Inspection ..............................................................317 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ............................... 347
Exploded View ...................................................... 347
CONTROL CABLE .......................................... 319 Removal and Installation ....................................... 347
Exploded View .......................................................319 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 349
Removal and Installation .......................................319
Inspection ..............................................................321 UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY .. 351
PADDLE SHIFTER .......................................... 322 TORQUE CONVERTER AND CONVERTER

Exploded View .......................................................322 HOUSING OIL SEAL ........................................ 351
Removal and Installation .......................................322 Exploded View ...................................................... 351
Disassembly .......................................................... 351
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE ............................... 324 Assembly .............................................................. 351
Exploded View .......................................................324 Inspection .............................................................. 352
Inspection ..............................................................325 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ......................................................... 353
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH ................. 326
Exploded View .......................................................326 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Removal and Installation .......................................326 (SDS) ................................................................ 353
Inspection and Adjustment ....................................326 General Specification ............................................ 353
Shift Characteristics .............................................. 353
TCM .................................................................. 328 Stall Speed ............................................................ 353
Exploded View .......................................................328
Line Pressure ........................................................ 353
Torque Converter .................................................. 353
Adjustment .............................................................328
Heater Thermostat ................................................ 353
AIR BREATHER HOSE ................................... 329 CVT: RE0F10D
PRECAUTION ........................................... 355
CONTROL VALVE ........................................... 330
Exploded View .......................................................330 PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 355
Removal and Installation .......................................330 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
Inspection and Adjustment ....................................336 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ............................................................... 355
PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR ........................... 337 Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover. 355
Exploded View .......................................................337 Precaution for TCM and Transaxle Assembly Re-
Removal and Installation .......................................337 placement ............................................................. 355
Inspection ..............................................................337 Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ......... 355
General Precautions ............................................. 356
SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR ..................... 338 On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of CVT and
Exploded View .......................................................338 Engine ................................................................... 357
Removal and Installation .......................................338 Removal and Installation Procedure for CVT Unit
Inspection ..............................................................338 Connector ............................................................. 357
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE OIL SEAL .................... 340 PREPARATION ......................................... 359
Exploded View .......................................................340
Removal and Installation .......................................340 PREPARATION ................................................ 359
Inspection ..............................................................342 Special Service Tools ........................................... 359
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 359
OIL PUMP FITTING BOLT .............................. 343
Description .............................................................343 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................... 361
Exploded View .......................................................343
Removal and Installation .......................................343 COMPONENT PARTS ...................................... 361

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ....................................... 361 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe .................... 380
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Lo- CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Protection Control ..... 383 A
cation ..................................................................... 361
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Descrip- LINE PRESSURE CONTROL .................................. 384
tion ........................................................................ 362 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Descrip-
tion ......................................................................... 384 B
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM .......................... 363
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range SHIFT CONTROL .................................................... 385
Switch .................................................................... 363 SHIFT CONTROL : System Description ................ 386
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Speed Sen- C
sor ......................................................................... 363 SELECT CONTROL ................................................. 389
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor.. 364 SELECT CONTROL : System Description ............ 389
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor .. 365 TM
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : CVT Fluid Tempera- LOCK-UP CONTROL .............................................. 389
ture Sensor ............................................................ 365 LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Description .......... 390
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Pressure INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM ........................ 390 E
Sensor ................................................................... 366 INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM : System Di-
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure agram .................................................................... 391
Sensor ................................................................... 366 INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM : System De-
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Pressure So- F
scription ................................................................. 391
lenoid Valve ........................................................... 366
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .. 394
Solenoid Valve ...................................................... 367 Description ............................................................. 394 G
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Select Solenoid Valve GST (Generic Scan Tool) ...................................... 394
.. 367
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) .......................... 395 H
Clutch Solenoid Valve ........................................... 367
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION .................................... 395
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Sole-
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : 1 Trip Detection Di-
noid Valve ............................................................. 368
agnosis and 2 Trip Detection Diagnosis ................ 395 I
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch.. 368
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : DTC and DTC of
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : CVT Indicator lamp .. 368
1st Trip ................................................................... 395
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Shift Position Indica-
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Malfunction Indica- J
tor .......................................................................... 368
tor Lamp (MIL) ....................................................... 395
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Indica-
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Counter System .... 395
tor .......................................................................... 369
CONSULT Function ............................................... 397
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Paddle Shifter ........... 369 K
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ............................................ 369 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 402
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca- TCM ................................................................. 402
tion ........................................................................ 370 L
Reference Value .................................................... 402
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Description.. 370
Fail-safe ................................................................. 409
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION ..................... 371 Protection Control .................................................. 412
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................ 413 M
TRANSAXLE ........................................................... 371 DTC Index ............................................................. 414
TRANSAXLE : Cross-Sectional View .................... 371
TRANSAXLE : Operation Status ........................... 372 WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 416 N
TRANSAXLE : Transaxle Mechanism ................... 372
TRANSAXLE : Oil Pressure System ..................... 375
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ............................... 416
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 416
TRANSAXLE : Component Description ................ 376 O
FLUID COOLER & FLUID WARMER SYSTEM ...... 376 CVT SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ........................... 423
FLUID COOLER & FLUID WARMER SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 423
System Description ............................................... 377 P
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 426
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ............................................ 377
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : System Description ....... 377
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ..... 426
Work Flow .............................................................. 426
SYSTEM ........................................................... 379 Diagnostic Work Sheet .......................................... 427
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ....................................... 379 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description .. 379 TCM ................................................................. 429

Description .............................................................429 DTC Logic ............................................................. 451
Work Procedure .....................................................429 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 451
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 452
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY .............................. 431 Description ............................................................ 452
Description .............................................................431 DTC Logic ............................................................. 452
Work Procedure .....................................................431 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 452
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING U1117 LOST COMMUNICATION (ABS) .......... 453
TCM AND TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ............. 433 DTC Logic ............................................................. 453
Description .............................................................433 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 453
Work Procedure .....................................................433
P062F EEPROM ............................................... 454
CVT FLUID COOLER SYSTEM ...................... 435 Description ............................................................ 454
Cleaning ................................................................435 DTC Logic ............................................................. 454
STALL TEST .................................................... 438
Work Procedure .....................................................438 P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A.. 455
DTC Logic ............................................................. 455
CVT POSITION ................................................ 439 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 455
Inspection ..............................................................439 Component Inspection .......................................... 458
Adjustment .............................................................439
P0706 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A.. 460
CVT FLUID ....................................................... 440 DTC Logic ............................................................. 460
Replacement .........................................................440 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 460
Adjustment .............................................................441 Component Inspection .......................................... 462
HOW TO ERASE PERMANENT DTC ............. 443 P0711 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERA-
Description .............................................................443 TURE SENSOR A ............................................. 463
DTC Description .................................................... 463
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................ 444 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 466
U0073 COMMUNICATION BUS A OFF .......... 444 P0712 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERA-
DTC Logic ..............................................................444 TURE SENSOR A ............................................. 468
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................444 DTC Logic ............................................................. 468
U0100 LOST COMMUNICATION (ECM A) ..... 445 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 468
DTC Logic ..............................................................445 P0713 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERA-
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................445
TURE SENSOR A ............................................. 470
U0102 LOST COMMUNICATION (TRANS- DTC Logic ............................................................. 470
FER) ................................................................. 446 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 470
DTC Logic ..............................................................446 P0715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A ................... 472
DTC Logic ............................................................. 472
U0140 LOST COMMUNICATION (BCM) ........ 447 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 473
DTC Logic ..............................................................447 P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A ................... 475
DTC Logic ............................................................. 475
U0141 LOST COMMUNICATION (BCM A) ..... 448 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 476
DTC Logic ..............................................................448 P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER ........................ 478
DTC Logic ............................................................. 478
U0155 LOST COMMUNICATION (IPC) .......... 449 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 479
DTC Logic ............................................................. 480
U0164 LOST COMMUNICATION (HVAC) ...... 450 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 481
DTC Logic ............................................................. 482
U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA ........... 451 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 483

P0746 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A.. 484 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 511
DTC Logic ............................................................. 484 A
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 485 P0965 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B. 513
DTC Logic .............................................................. 513
P0776 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B.. 486 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 514
B
DTC Logic ............................................................. 486
DTC Logic .............................................................. 515
P0778 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B.. 488 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 515 C
DTC Logic ............................................................. 488
DTC Logic .............................................................. 517
P0779 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B.. 489 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 517 TM
DTC Logic ............................................................. 489
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 489 P17F0 CVT JUDDER (T/M INSPECTION) ...... 519
DTC Description .................................................... 519 E
P0826 UP AND DOWN SHIFT SW .................. 491 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 519
DTC Logic ............................................................. 491
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 492 P17F1 CVT JUDDER (C/V INSPECTION) ...... 520
DTC Description .................................................... 520 F
Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch) ..... 495
Component Inspection (Paddle Shifter) ................ 496 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 520
P0841 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE P17F2 CVT JUDDER (T/C INSPECTION) ...... 521
G
SEN/SW A ........................................................ 497 DTC Description .................................................... 521
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 497 P2765 INPUT SPEED SENSOR B .................. 522 H
P0847 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE DTC Logic .............................................................. 522
SEN/SW B ........................................................ 498
DTC Logic ............................................................. 498 P2813 SELECT SOLENOID ........................... 526 I
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 498 DTC Logic .............................................................. 526
P0848 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE J
SEN/SW B ........................................................ 500 P2814 SELECT SOLENOID ........................... 528
DTC Logic ............................................................. 500 DTC Logic .............................................................. 528
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 500 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 528 K
P084C TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE P2815 SELECT SOLENOID ........................... 530
SEN/SW H ........................................................ 502 DTC Logic .............................................................. 530
DTC Logic ............................................................. 502 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 530 L
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
P084D TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE CUIT ................................................................ 532 M
SEN/SW H ........................................................ 504 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 532
DTC Logic ............................................................. 504
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 504 SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT ........ 534
Component Parts Function Inspection .................. 534 N
P0863 TCM COMMUNICATION ...................... 506 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 534
DTC Logic ............................................................. 506
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 506 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ................................... 535
O
Component Function Check .................................. 535
P0890 TCM ....................................................... 507 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 535
DTC Logic ............................................................. 507 Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) .......... 536
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 507 Component Inspection (Park Position Switch) ...... 537 P
Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid) ........ 537
P0962 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A.. 509 Component Inspection (CVT Shift Selector Har-
DTC Logic ............................................................. 509 ness) ...................................................................... 537
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 539
P0963 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A.. 511
DTC Logic ............................................................. 511 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ............................... 539

Symptom Table .....................................................539 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE OIL SEAL ..................... 566
Exploded View ...................................................... 566
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................... 545 Removal and Installation ....................................... 566
Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 569
CVT FLUID ....................................................... 545
Inspection ..............................................................545 WATER HOSE .................................................. 570
Exploded View ...................................................... 570
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 546 Removal and Installation ....................................... 570
CVT SHIFT SELECTOR .................................. 546 Inspection .............................................................. 571
Exploded View .......................................................546 FLUID COOLER HOSE .................................... 572
Exploded View ...................................................... 572
Disassembly and Assembly ...................................547
Inspection ..............................................................548
Inspection .............................................................. 573
CONTROL CABLE .......................................... 549 CVT OIL WARMER .......................................... 574
Exploded View .......................................................549
Exploded View ...................................................... 574
Inspection and Adjustment ....................................551
Inspection .............................................................. 575
PADDLE SHIFTER .......................................... 552 PLUG ................................................................ 576
Exploded View .......................................................552
Description ............................................................ 576
Exploded View ...................................................... 576
TCM .................................................................. 554 Removal and Installation ....................................... 576
Exploded View .......................................................554 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 576
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ... 577
Adjustment .............................................................554
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ............................... 577
AIR BREATHER HOSE ................................... 555
Exploded View ...................................................... 577
Exploded View .......................................................555
Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 580
OIL PAN ........................................................... 557
Exploded View .......................................................557
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY .. 581
Removal and Installation .......................................557 TORQUE CONVERTER AND CONVERTER
Inspection ..............................................................559 HOUSING OIL SEAL ........................................ 581
INPUT SPEED SENSOR ................................. 560 Exploded View ...................................................... 581
Exploded View .......................................................560 Disassembly .......................................................... 581
Removal and Installation .......................................560 Assembly .............................................................. 581
Inspection and Adjustment ....................................561 Inspection .............................................................. 582
PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR ........................... 562 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS

Exploded View .......................................................562 (SDS) ......................................................... 584
Inspection and Adjustment ....................................563 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................ 584
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR ............................. 564 General Specification ............................................ 584
Exploded View .......................................................564 Shift Characteristics .............................................. 584
Removal and Installation .......................................564 Stall Speed ............................................................ 584
Inspection and Adjustment ....................................565 Torque Converter .................................................. 584

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [6MT: RS6F94R]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000012200748
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. TM
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING: E
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, it is recommended that all maintenance
F
and repair be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper repair, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module,
see “SRS AIR BAG”. G
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors. H
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. I
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing J
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery or batteries, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
K
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000012200749
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
L
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.
PIIB3706J
O
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal INFOID:0000000012971874
When disconnecting the battery terminal, pay attention to the following. P

• Always use a 12V battery as power source.
• Never disconnect battery terminal while engine is running.

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [6MT: RS6F94R]
• When removing the 12V battery terminal, turn OFF the ignition
switch and wait at least 30 seconds.
• For vehicles with the engine listed below, remove the battery termi-
nal after a lapse of the specified time:
D4D engine : 20 minutes YS23DDT : 4 minutes

HRA2DDT : 12 minutes YS23DDTT : 4 minutes
K9K engine : 4 minutes ZD30DDTi : 60 seconds
M9R engine : 4 minutes ZD30DDTT : 60 seconds
R9M engine : 4 minutes
SEF289H
V9X engine : 4 minutes
YD25DDTi : 2 minutes
NOTE:
ECU may be active for several tens of seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF. If the battery terminal
is removed before ECU stops, then a DTC detection error or ECU data corruption may occur.
• After high-load driving, if the vehicle is equipped with the V9X engine, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait
for at least 15 minutes to remove the battery terminal.
NOTE:
• Turbocharger cooling pump may operate in a few minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
• Example of high-load driving
- Driving for 30 minutes or more at 140 km/h (86 MPH) or more.
- Driving for 30 minutes or more on a steep slope.
• For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main battery and the sub battery before turning ON
the ignition switch.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is turned ON with any one of the terminals of main battery and sub battery discon-
nected, then DTC may be detected.
• After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result" of all ECUs and erase DTC.
NOTE:
The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error.
Service Notice or Precautions for Manual Transaxle INFOID:0000000012200751
CAUTION:
• Never reuse CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder). Because CSC slides back to the original position
every time when removing transaxle assembly. At this timing, dust on the sliding parts may damage
a seal of CSC and may cause clutch fluid leakage. Refer to CL-17, "Removal and Installation".
• Never reuse transaxle gear oil, once it has been drained.
• Check oil level or replace gear oil with vehicle on level surface.
• During removal or installation, keep inside of transaxle clear of dust or dirt.
• Check for the correct installation status prior to removal or disassembly. If matching marks are
required, be certain they never interfere with the function of the parts they are applied.
• In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally from inside to out-
side. If tightening sequence is specified, use it.
• Never damage sliding surfaces and mating surfaces.

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [6MT: RS6F94R]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000012200752
B
The actual shapes of TechMate tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(TechMate No.) Description C
Tool name
KV381054S0 Removing mainshaft front bearing outer race
(J-34286) TM
Puller
ZZA0601D
KV38100200 • Installing mainshaft front bearing outer race F

(-) • Installing mainshaft rear bearing outer race
Drift • Installing differential side bearing outer race
a: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia. (clutch housing side)
G
b: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia.
ZZA1143D
H
ST33220000 Installing input shaft oil seal

(-)
Drift I
a: 37 mm (1.46 in) dia.
b: 31 mm (1.22 in) dia.
c: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia.
J
ZZA1046D
ST33400001 Installing differential side bearing outer race

K
(J-26082) (transaxle case side)
Drift
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia. L
ZZA0814D
M
KV32500QAA Installing differential side oil seal
(-)
(Renault SST: B.vi 1666)
Drift set N
1. —
(-)
(Stamping number: B.vi 1666-A)
Drift
O
a: 54.3 mm (2.138 in) dia.
b: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia.
c: 26.6 mm (1.047 in) dia. P
2. —
(-) JPDIC0730ZZ
(Stamping number: B.vi 1666-B)
Drift
d: 54 mm (2.13 in) dia.
e: 48.6 mm (1.913 in) dia.
f: 26.6 mm (1.047 in) dia.

PREPARATION
Tool number
(TechMate No.) Description
Tool name
ST36720030 • Installing input shaft rear bearing
(-) • Installing mainshaft front bearing inner race
Drift
a: 70 mm (2.76 in) dia.
b: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia.
c: 29 mm (1.14 in) dia.
ZZA0978D
ST33052000 • Removing mainshaft rear bearing inner race

(-) • Removing 6th main gear
Drift • Removing 5th main gear
a: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia. • Removing 4th main gear
b: 28 mm (1.10 in) dia. • Removing 1st main gear
• Removing 1st-2nd synchronizer hub as-
sembly
• Removing 2nd main gear
• Removing bushing
ZZA0969D
• Removing 3rd main gear
• Removing mainshaft front bearing inner
race
KV32102700 • Installing bushing
(-) • Installing 2nd main gear
Drift • Installing 3rd main gear
a: 48.6 mm (1.913 in) dia. • Installing 4th main gear
b: 41.6 mm (1.638 in) dia. • Installing 5th main gear
• Installing 6th main gear
S-NT065
ST30901000 Installing mainshaft rear bearing inner race

(J-26010-01)
Drift
a: 79 mm (3.11 in) dia.
b: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia.
c: 35.2 mm (1.386 in) dia.
ZZA0978D
ST33061000 Removing differential side bearing inner race

(J-8107-2) (clutch housing side)
Drift
a: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
b: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
ZZA0969D
KV32300QAM Removing and installing input shaft rear bear-

(-) ing mounting bolt
(Renault SST: B.vi 1823)
Drift
PCIB2078J

PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000012200753
Tool name Description

Socket Removing and installing drain plug B
a: 8 mm (0.31 in)
b: 5 mm (0.20 in)
PCIB1776E TM
Spacer Removing mainshaft front bearing outer race
a: 25 mm (0.98 in) dia.
b: 25 mm (0.98 in) E
F
PCIB1780E
Drift Installing bushing

a: 17 mm (0.67 in) dia. G
S-NT063
I
Drift Removing input shaft rear bearing
a: 24 mm (0.94 in) dia.
K
PCIB1779E
Drift Installing input shaft front bearing

a: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia.
b: 25 mm (0.98 in) dia. L
S-NT065
Drift • Installing input shaft rear bearing N

a: 43 mm (1.69 in) dia. • Removing differential side bearing inner
race (transaxle case side)
NT109 P

PREPARATION
Drift Installing differential side bearing inner race
a: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia. (clutch housing side)
b: 39 mm (1.54 in) dia.
S-NT474
Drift Installing differential side bearing inner race

a: 52 mm (2.05 in) dia. (transaxle case side)
b: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia.
S-NT474
Puller • Removing differential side bearing inner

race (clutch housing side)
• Removing differential side bearing inner
NT077
Puller • Removing differential side bearing inner

race (clutch housing side)
• Removing differential side bearing inner
• Removing input shaft rear bearing
• Removing input shaft front bearing
• Removing mainshaft rear bearing inner race
• Removing 6th main gear
• Removing 1st main gear
• Removing 1st-2nd synchronizer hub as-
ZZB0823D
sembly
• Removing 2nd main gear
• Removing 3rd main gear
• Removing mainshaft front bearing inner
race
Remover • Removing bushing

• Removing mainshaft rear bearing outer
race
S-NT134

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [6MT: RS6F94R]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000012200754
B
POSITION SWITCH
C
1 : Position switch
TM
JPDIC0070ZZ
F

STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
Sectional View INFOID:0000000012200755
JPDIC0631ZZ
1. 3rd input gear 2. 3rd-4th synchronizer hub assembly 3. 4th input gear
4. 5th input gear 5. 5th-6th synchronizer hub assembly 6. 6th input gear
7. Transaxle case 8. 6th main gear 9. 5th main gear
10. 4th main gear 11. 3rd main gear 12. 2nd main gear
13. 1st-2nd synchronizer hub assembly 14. 1st main gear 15. Differential
16. Final gear 17. Mainshaft 18. Input shaft
19. Clutch housing 20. Reverse idler shaft 21. Reverse input gear
22. Reverse output gear
System Description INFOID:0000000012200756
TRIPLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER

Triple-cone synchronizers are adopted for the 1st and the 2nd gears
to reduce operating force of the shifter lever. A
1 : 1st main gear

2 : 1st-2nd coupling sleeve B
3 : Insert key
4 : Outer baulk ring
5 : 2nd main gear C
6 : Synchronizer cone
7 : Inner baulk ring
SCIA7636E
8 : 1st-2nd synchronizer hub TM
REVERSE GEAR NOISE PREVENTION FUNCTION (SYNCHRONIZING METHOD)

Reverse gear assembly consists of reverse input gear, return spring, E
reverse baulk ring, and reverse output gear. When the shifter lever is
shifted to the reverse position, the construction allows smooth shift
operation by stopping the reverse idler shaft rotation by frictional
force of synchronizer. F
1 : Reverse fork rod

2 : Reverse output gear G
3 : Return spring
4 : Reverse baulk ring
5 : Reverse input gear SCIA7621E H

POSITION SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [6MT: RS6F94R]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
POSITION SWITCH
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000012200757
1.CHECK BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH

1. Disconnect position switch connector. Refer to TM-24, "Removal and Installation".
2. Check continuity between position switch terminals.
Terminals Condition Continuity

Reverse gear position Existed
1 2
Except reverse gear position Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace position switch. Refer to TM-24, "Removal and
Installation".
PCIB1781E
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH

PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000012200758
1.CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH

Terminals Condition Continuity

Neutral gear position Existed
2 3
Except neutral gear position Not existed
NO >> Replace position switch. Refer to TM-24, "Removal and
Installation".
JPDIC0091ZZ

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [6MT: RS6F94R]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
NVH Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000012200759
B
Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspection. If nec-
essary, repair or replace these parts.
C
TM
SHIFT CONTROL LINKAGE (Worn)

F
BAULK RING (Worn or damaged)

SUSPECTED PARTS
(Possible cause)
BEARING (Worn or damaged)

OIL SEAL (Worn or damaged)
INSERT SPRING (Damaged)

O-RING (Worn or damaged)
GEAR (Worn or damaged)

G
GASKET (Damaged)
OIL (Oil level is high)
SHIFT FORK (Worn)

OIL (Oil level is low)
OIL (Wrong oil)
I
TM-22
TM-32
TM-28
TM-32
TM-32
Reference
J
Noise 1 2 3 3
Oil leakage 3 1 2 2 2
Symptoms
Hard to shift or will not shift 1 1 2 3 3 K
Jumps out of gear 1 2 2

GEAR OIL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [6MT: RS6F94R]
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
GEAR OIL
Inspection INFOID:0000000012200760
OIL LEAKAGE
Make sure that gear oil is not leaking from transaxle or around it.
OIL LEVEL
1. Remove filler plug (1) and gasket from transaxle case.
2. Check the oil level from filler plug mounting hole as shown in the
figure.
CAUTION:
Never start engine while checking oil level.
3. Set a gasket on filler plug and then install it to transaxle case.
CAUTION:
Never reuse gasket.
4. Tighten filler plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-32,
"Exploded View".
SCIA7623E
Draining INFOID:0000000012200761
1. Start engine and let it run to warm up transaxle.

2. Stop engine. Remove drain plug (1) and gasket, using a socket
[Commercial service tool] and then drain gear oil.
3. Set a gasket on drain plug and install it to clutch housing, using
a socket [Commercial service tool].
CAUTION:
Never reuse gasket.
4. Tighten drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-32,
"Exploded View".
SCIA7622E
Refilling INFOID:0000000012200762

2. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit at
filler plug mounting hole as shown in the figure.
Oil grade and : Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".

viscosity
Oil capacity : Refer to TM-67, "General Specifica-
tions".
3. After refilling gear oil, check the oil level. Refer to TM-22,
"Inspection". SCIA7623E

CAUTION:
Never reuse gasket.
5. Tighten filler plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-32, "Exploded View".

SIDE OIL SEAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: RS6F94R]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

SIDE OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012200763
B
REMOVAL
1. Remove front drive shafts. Refer to FAX-83, "2WD : Removal and Installation". C
2. Remove differential side oil seals (1) from clutch housing and
transaxle case, using an oil seal remover.
CAUTION: TM
Never damage transaxle case and clutch housing.
F
SCIA7625E
INSTALLATION
G
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Install differential side oil seals (1) to clutch housing and transaxle
case, using the drift [Stamping number: B.vi 1666-B] of the drift set
[SST: KV32500QAA ( - )]. H
A : Transaxle case side

B : Clutch housing side I
Dimension “L1” : 1.2 – 1.8 mm (0.047 – 0.071 in)

Dimension “L2” : 2.7 – 3.3 mm (0.106 – 0.130 in) J
CAUTION: JPDIC0454ZZ
• Never incline differential side oil seal.

• Never damage clutch housing and transaxle case. K
L
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check the oil level and oil leakage. Refer to TM-22, "Inspection".
M

POSITION SWITCH
POSITION SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove battery. Refer to PG-105, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect position switch connector.
3. Remove position switch from transaxle case.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply recommended sealant to threads of position switch.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV or an equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products
and Sealants".
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant and oil adhering to threads.
2. Install position switch to transaxle case.
3. Tighten position switch to the specified torque. Refer to TM-32, "Exploded View".
4. For the next step and after, install in the reverse order of removal.

• Check continuity between position switch terminals. Refer to TM-20, "BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH : Compo-
nent Inspection" (Back-up lamp switch) and TM-20, "PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH : Compo-
nent Inspection" (PNP switch).
• Check the oil leakage. Refer to TM-22, "Inspection".

CONTROL LINKAGE
CONTROL LINKAGE
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000012200767
TM
L
JPDIC0830GB
1. Bracket 2. Shifter cable 3. Selector lever M

4. Shifter lever A 5. Tapping bolt 6. Cable mounting bracket
7. Selector cable 8. Grommet 9. M/T shift selector assembly
10. Shifter lever 11. Shifter lever knob N
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

O
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

P
REMOVAL
1. Shift the shifter lever to the neutral position.
2. Remove air cleaner case. Refer to EM-192, "Removal and Installation".

CONTROL LINKAGE
3. Remove bracket (1), as per the following procedure.
: Vehicle front
a. Disconnect clips (A) from bracket.

b. Remove bolts (B) from bracket.
c. Remove bracket.
4. Pull out and disconnect the each cable from the shifter lever A
and the selector lever, using a suitable remover.
JPDIC0845ZZ
5. While pressing the lock of the selector cable in the direction of

the arrow shown in the figure, remove the selector cable from
the cable mounting bracket.
6. While pressing the lock of the shifter cable in the direction of the
arrow shown in the figure, remove the shifter cable from the
cable mounting bracket.
7. Remove cable mounting bracket from transaxle case.
8. Pull the shifter lever knob upward to remove.
9. Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-24, "Removal and
Installation". JPDIC0793ZZ
10. Pull out and disconnect the shifter cable from the pin of the M/T
shift selector assembly, using a suitable remover.
11. Pull up the stopper (A) of the selector cable in the direction of
the arrow as shown in the figure.
12. Pull out and disconnect the selector cable from the pin of the M/
T shift selector assembly, using a suitable remover.
JPDIC0833ZZ
13. While pressing the lock of the selector cable in the direction of
the arrow shown in the figure, remove the selector cable from
the M/T shift selector assembly.
14. While pressing the lock of the shifter cable in the direction of the
arrow shown in the figure, remove the shifter cable from the M/T
shift selector assembly.
15. Remove the M/T shift selector assembly.
16. Remove three way catalyst and heat plate. Refer to EX-10,
"Removal and Installation".
17. Remove the bracket from the vehicle. JPDIC0793ZZ

CONTROL LINKAGE
18. Disengage the pawls (A) of the grommet (1), and pull down-
wards to remove. A
19. Remove the shifter cable and selector cable from the vehicle.
JPDIC0844ZZ
TM
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Install each cable without causing interference with other parts, a 120 mm (4.72 in)-or-less bend, and E
a 180-degrees-or-more twist.
• Install boot of each cable without causing interference with other parts and a 90-degrees-or-more
twist. F
• Fit boot of to center console assembly the groove on shifter lever knob.
• To install the shifter lever knob, press it into the shifter lever.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse shifter lever knob. G
• Be careful with orientation of shifter lever knob.
• Tapping work for tapping bolts is not applied to new transaxle case. Do not perform tapping by other than
screwing tapping bolts because tapping is formed by screwing tapping bolts into transaxle case. H
CAUTION:
Never reuse tapping bolt.
• Insert the each cable until it reaches the cable mounting bracket and M/T shift selector assembly.
• Insert the each cable until it reaches the shifter lever A and the selector lever. I
• Shift the shifter lever to the neutral position.
• Install the shifter cable (1) and the selector cable (2) to the bracket
(3) as shown in the figure. J
JPDIC0836ZZ
M
Install the selector cable (the M/T shift selector assembly side), as per the following procedure.
When M/T shift selector assembly is replaced:

1. Install the selector cable to the M/T shift selector assembly. N
3. Install the lever stopper (A) to the M/T shift selector assembly as
shown in the figure.
CAUTION: O
Selector cable cannot be adjusted accurately without using
the lever stopper.
4. Check that the shifter lever does not move in the direction of the P
select. If it moves, repeat step 3.
JPDIC0831ZZ

CONTROL LINKAGE
5. Insert the stopper (A) until it reaches the selector cable.
6. Remove the lever stopper from the M/T shift selector assembly.
7. Shift the shifter lever to each gear position to check that there
are no bindings. If any, repeat step 3.
JPDIC0832ZZ
When M/T shift selector assembly is not replaced:

1. Install the selector cable to the M/T shift selector assembly.
2. Shift the shifter lever to the 4th gear position.
3. Adjust the length “L” between the stopper (A) and the lever to
the standard value.
Length “L” : 3.51 – 4.11 mm (0.1382 – 0.1618 in)
JPDIC0834ZZ
4. Insert the stopper (A) until it reaches the selector cable.

5. Shift the shifter lever to each gear position to check that there
are no bindings. If any, repeat step 3.
JPDIC0832ZZ

Shifter Lever Knob
Check that the shifter lever knob is installed in the right position.
Shifter Cable and Selector Cable
• Pull each cable in the removal direction to check that it dose not disconnect from the cable mounting
bracket.
• Pull each cable in the removal direction to check that it dose not disconnect from the M/T shift selector
assembly.
• Pull grommet in the removal direction to check that it dose not disconnect from the vehicle.
M/T Shift Selector Assembly and Shifter Lever
• Check that there is no tangle, hook, abnormal sound, looseness, and interference when the shifter lever is
moved to each position. If there is a malfunction, then repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
• Check that the shifter lever smoothly returns to the neutral position after moving the lever from 1st to 2nd
gear and moving hands off the lever. If there is a malfunction, then repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
• Check that the shifter lever smoothly returns to the neutral position after moving the lever from 5th to 6th
gear and moving hands off the lever. If there is a malfunction, then repair or replace the malfunctioning part.

AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
A
TM
G
JSDIA7172ZZ
1. Harness bracket 2. Transaxle assembly 3. Air breather hose

4. Clip
H
: Vehicle front
: Always replace after every disassembly. I
J
REMOVAL
2. Remove clip (1) from harness bracket (2). K
: Vehicle front
3. Remove air breather hose from the 2 way connector of transaxle L

assembly.
CAUTION:
When removing air breather hose, be sure to hold 2 way M
connector securely.
JSDIA7173ZZ N
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: O
• Install air breather hose, preventing crush and clogging caused by bending.
• Insert the allowance of air breather hose to the spool of the 2 way connector.
• Install air breather hose to the 2 way connector with the paint mark faced forward of the vehicle.
P
• Securely engage the clip in the mounting hole of harness bracket.
• Never reuse clip.

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: RS6F94R]
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
JPDIC0632ZZ
1. Transaxle assembly
: Refer to "INSTALLATION" in TM-30, "Removal and Installation" for the locations and tightening torque.
CAUTION:
Never reuse CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder). Because CSC slides back to the original position every
time when removing transaxle assembly. At this timing, dust on the sliding parts may damage a seal of
CSC and may cause clutch fluid leakage. Refer to CL-17, "Removal and Installation".
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery cable from negative terminal. Refer to PG-105, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove air breather hose. Refer to TM-29, "Removal and Installation".
7. Remove harness clip from transaxle assembly.
8. Disconnect selector cable and shifter cable from transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-25, "Removal and
Installation".
9. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-28, "MR16DDT : Removal and Installation".
10. Remove clutch tube from CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder). Refer to CL-15, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
• Keep painted surface on the body or other parts free of clutch fluid. If it spills, wipe up immedi-
ately and wash the affected area with water.
• Never depress clutch pedal during removal procedure.
11. Remove engine under cover.
12. Remove fender protector LH. Refer to EXT-31, "Removal and Installation".
13. Disconnect ground cable.
14. Remove front suspension member. Refer to FSU-15, "Removal and Installation".
15. Remove front drive shafts. Refer to FAX-83, "2WD : Removal and Installation".

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: RS6F94R]
NOTE:
Insert a suitable plug into differential side oil seal after removing front drive shaft. A
16. Set a suitable jack to transaxle assembly and then set a suitable jack to engine assembly.
CAUTION:
When setting a suitable jack, be careful so that it does not contact with the switch. B
17. Remove engine mounting bracket (LH) mounting bolts from transaxle assembly. Refer to EM-217, "2WD :
Removal and Installation".
18. Remove rear torque rod bracket and rear torque rod. Refer to EM-217, "2WD : Removal and Installation". C
19. Remove transaxle assembly mounting bolts.
20. Remove transaxle assembly from the engine.
CAUTION: TM
• Fix transaxle assembly to a suitable jack.
• The transaxle assembly must not interfere with the wire harnesses and clutch tube.
21. Remove CSC. Refer to CL-17, "Removal and Installation". E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: F
• Fix transaxle assembly to a suitable jack.
• The transaxle assembly must not interfere with the wire harnesses and clutch tube.
• When installing transaxle assembly, never bring input shaft into contact with clutch cover.
• Tapping work for tapping bolts is not applied to new transaxle case. Do not perform tapping by other G
than screwing tapping bolts because tapping is formed by screwing tapping bolts into transaxle
case.
• Tighten transaxle assembly mounting bolts to the specified torque. H
The figure is the view from the engine.
Bolt symbol A B I
Insertion direction Transaxle to engine Engine to transaxle
Quantity 3 6
J
Bolt length
60 (2.36) 50 (1.97)
“ ” mm (in)
Tightening torque
62.0 (6.3, 46) K
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) JPDIC0837ZZ
L
• Check the operation of the control linkage. Refer to TM-28, "Inspection".
• Check the oil leakage and the oil level. Refer to TM-22, "Inspection". M

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: RS6F94R]
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
CASE AND HOUSING
JPDIC0437GB
1. Filler plug 2. Gasket 3. Transaxle case

4. Bushing 5. Snap ring 6. Oil channel
7. Oil gutter 8. Position switch 9. Bracket
10. Differential side oil seal 11. Magnet 12. Drain plug
13. Input shaft oil seal 14. Clutch housing 15. 2 way connector
16. Plug 17. Pinion shaft 18. Pinion gear
: Apply Genuine Silicone RTV or an equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
: Select with proper thickness.

A

B
SHAFT AND GEAR
TM
JPDIC0407GB M
1. Input shaft front bearing 2. Input shaft 3. 3rd input gear

4. Spacer 5. Snap ring 6. 3rd baulk ring N
7. 3rd-4th coupling sleeve 8. 3rd-4th synchronizer hub 9. Insert key
10. 4th baulk ring 11. 4th input gear 12. 5th input gear
13. 5th baulk ring 14. 5th-6th coupling sleeve 15. 5th-6th synchronizer hub O
16. 6th baulk ring 17. Needle bearing 18. 6th input gear
19. Input shaft rear bearing
A. First step B. Final step P
: Apply gear oil.
: Replace the parts as a set.

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
SFIA3293E
1. Mainshaft front bearing outer 2. Mainshaft front bearing inner race 3. Mainshaft
race
4. 1st main gear 5. 1st inner baulk ring 6. 1st synchronizer cone
7. 1st outer baulk ring 8. 1st-2nd coupling sleeve 9. Insert key
10. 1st-2nd synchronizer hub 11. 2nd outer baulk ring 12. 2nd synchronizer cone
13. 2nd inner baulk ring 14. 2nd main gear 15. Bushing
16. 3rd main gear 17. Mainshaft adjusting shim 18. 4th main gear
19. 5th main gear 20. 6th main gear 21. Mainshaft rear bearing inner race
22. Mainshaft rear bearing outer race 23. Snap ring 24. Mainshaft rear bearing adjusting
shim
: Apply gear oil.


TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
TM
I
JPDIC0425GB
1. Reverse output gear 2. Snap ring 3. Reverse baulk ring

J
4. Return spring 5. Needle bearing 6. Seal washer
7. Reverse idler shaft 8. Spacer 9. Reverse input gear
10. Lock washer 11. Spring washer
K
L
SHIFT FORK AND FORK ROD

M

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
JPDIC0603ZZ
1. Shifter lever A 2. Shifter lever B 3. Retaining pin

4. Selector 5. Selector lever 6. Reverse fork rod
7. 1st-2nd fork rod 8. Fork rod
FINAL DRIVE

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
TM
H
JPDIC0424GB
1. Shim 2. Differential side bearing outer race 3. Differential side bearing inner race
(transaxle case side) (transaxle case side) I
4. Final gear 5. Differential case 6. Differential side bearing inner race
(clutch housing side)
7. Differential side bearing outer race J
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) K
Disassembly INFOID:0000000012200776
L
1. Remove drain plug and gasket from clutch housing, using a socket [Commercial service tool] and then
drain gear oil.
2. Remove filler plug and gasket from transaxle case. M
3. Remove selector lever (1) retaining pin with a pin punch to
remove selector lever.
4. Remove bracket (2) and position switch (3) from transaxle case. N
P
PCIB1693E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
5. Remove transaxle case mounting bolts ( ).
PCIB1694E
6. Remove reverse idler shaft mounting bolt ( ) and seal washer.
PCIB1695E
7. Remove transaxle case (2) while rotating shifter lever A (1) in

the direction as shown in the figure.
JPDIC0444ZZ
8. Remove selector spring (1) from return bushing (A).
JPDIC0445ZZ
9. Shift 1st-2nd fork rod (1), fork rod (2), and reverse fork rod (3) to
the neutral position.
10. Remove selector (4) from clutch housing.
PCIB1698E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
11. Remove reverse idler shaft assembly (1), as per the following
procedure. A
a. Pull up input shaft assembly (2), mainshaft assembly (3), fork
rod (4), and 1st-2nd fork rod (5).
NOTE: B
It is easier to pull up when shifting each fork rod to each shaft
side.
b. Remove reverse idler shaft assembly and reverse fork rod (6) C
from clutch housing.
12. Remove spring washer from clutch housing.
JPDIC0606ZZ
TM
13. Pull up and remove input shaft assembly (1), mainshaft assem-
bly (2), fork rod (3), and 1st-2nd fork rod (4) from clutch housing.
NOTE: E
side.
F
G
JPDIC0607ZZ
14. Remove final drive assembly (1) from clutch housing. H

15. Remove magnet from clutch housing.
PCIB1703E K
16. Remove differential side oil seals (1) from clutch housing and
transaxle case.
CAUTION: L
Never damage clutch housing and transaxle case.
PCIB1704E
17. Remove differential side bearing outer race (1) from clutch hous- O
ing, using a brass rod.
CAUTION:
Never damage clutch housing. P
PCIB1716E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
18. Remove differential side bearing outer race (1) from transaxle
case, using a brass rod.
CAUTION:
Never damage transaxle case.
19. Remove shim (2) from transaxle case.
PCIB1705E
20. Remove shifter lever A (1) retaining pin, using a pin punch.
21. Remove shifter lever A from transaxle case.
JPDIC0106ZZ
22. Remove shifter lever B (1) from transaxle case.
PCIB1712E
23. Remove oil gutter (1) from transaxle case.
PCIB1707E
24. Remove bushings (1) from transaxle case, using a remover

[Commercial service tool].
PCIB1710E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
25. Remove mainshaft rear bearing outer race from transaxle case,
using a remover [Commercial service tool]. A
26. Remove mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim from transaxle
case.
B
PCIB1706E
TM
27. Remove snap ring (1) and oil channel (2) from transaxle case.
G
PCIB1708E
28. Remove input shaft oil seal (1) from clutch housing, using an oil H
seal remover.
CAUTION:
Never damage clutch housing.
I
PCIB1714E K
29. Remove mainshaft front bearing outer race (1) from clutch hous-
ing, using the puller (A) [SST: KV381054S0 (J-34286)] and a
spacer (B) [Commercial service tool]. L
30. Remove oil channel (2) from clutch housing.
JPDIC0107ZZ
31. Remove bushing (1) from clutch housing, using a remover O

[Commercial service tool].
PCIB1717E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
32. Remove 2 way connector (1) from clutch housing.
33. Remove plug from clutch housing.
PCIB1720E
34. Remove pinion gear (1) and pinion shaft (2) from clutch housing.
PCIB1719E
Assembly INFOID:0000000012200777
1. Install pinion gear (1) and pinion shaft (2) to clutch housing.
CAUTION:
Replace transaxle assembly when replacing clutch hous-
ing.
2. Install plug to clutch housing.
PCIB1719E
3. Install 2 way connector (1) to clutch housing.
PCIB1720E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
4. Install bushings (1) so that they becomes even to clutch housing
edge surface, using a drift (A) [Commercial service tool]. A
5. Install oil channel to clutch housing.
CAUTION:
Never reuse oil channel. B
JPDIC0108ZZ
TM
6. Install mainshaft front bearing outer race to clutch housing,
using the drift (A) [SST: KV38100200 ( - )].
CAUTION:
E
Replace mainshaft front bearing outer race and mainshaft
front bearing inner race as a set.
G
PCIB1724E
7. Install input shaft oil seal (1) to clutch housing, using the drift (A)
H
[SST: ST33220000 ( - )].
PCIB1721E
K
8. Install snap ring (1) and oil channel (2) to transaxle case.
CAUTION:
• Select and install snap ring that has the same thickness L
as previous one.
• Replace transaxle assembly when replacing transaxle
case. M
9. Install mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim to transaxle case.
CAUTION:
Select mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim, as per the fol-
N
lowing procedure when replacing mainshaft adjusting
shim, 6th main gear, 5th main gear, or 4th main gear. PCIB1729E
• Replace mainshaft adjusting shim.
- If new mainshaft adjusting shim is thinner than previous one, offset the thickness difference by O
selecting thicker mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim.
- If new mainshaft adjusting shim is thicker than previous one, offset the thickness difference by
selecting thinner mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim.
P
• Replace 6th main gear, 5th main gear, or 4th main gear.
- Measure the thickness of the main gear used before and the new main gear
- Increase the thickness of the mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim, if the difference is smaller
than 0.025 mm (0.0010 in).
- Decrease the thickness of the mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim, if the difference is greater
than 0.025 mm (0.0010 in).

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
10. Install mainshaft rear bearing outer race to transaxle case, using
the drift (A) [SST: KV38100200 ( - )].
CAUTION:
Replace mainshaft rear bearing outer race and mainshaft
rear bearing inner race as a set.
PCIB1728E
11. Install bushings (1) to transaxle case, using a drift (A) [Commer-
cial service tool].
JPDIC0109ZZ
12. Install oil gutter (1) to transaxle case.
PCIB1730E
13. Install shifter lever B (1) to transaxle case.

CAUTION:
Replace shifter lever A and shifter lever B as a set.
14. Install shifter lever A to transaxle case.
CAUTION:
Replace shifter lever A and shifter lever B as a set.
PCIB1712E
15. Install retaining pin to shifter lever A (1), using a pin punch.
CAUTION:
Never reuse retaining pin.
16. Install shim to transaxle case.
BCIA0047E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
17. Install differential side bearing outer race (transaxle case side)
to transaxle case, using the drift (A) [SST: ST33400001 (J- A
26082)].
CAUTION:
Replace differential side bearing outer race (transaxle case B
side) and differential side bearing inner race (transaxle case
side) as a set.
C
PCIB1726E
TM
18. Install differential side bearing outer race (clutch housing side) to
clutch housing, using the drift (A) [SST: KV38100200 ( - )].
CAUTION: E
Replace differential side bearing outer race (clutch housing
side) and differential side bearing inner race (clutch hous-
ing side) as a set.
F
G
PCIB1722E
19. Install differential side oil seals (1) to clutch housing and tran- H
saxle case, using the drift [Stamping number: B.vi 1666-B] of the
drift set [SST: KV32500QAA ( - )].
A : Transaxle case side I

B : Clutch housing side
J
Dimension “L1” : 1.2 – 1.8 mm (0.047 – 0.071 in)
Dimension “L2” : 2.7 – 3.3 mm (0.106 – 0.130 in)
CAUTION: JPDIC0454ZZ K
• Never incline differential side oil seal.
• Never damage clutch housing and transaxle case.
20. Install magnet to clutch housing. L
21. Install final drive assembly to clutch housing.
22. Set fork rod (1) to input shaft assembly (2), and then install them
to clutch housing. M
JPDIC0608ZZ

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
23. Install mainshaft assembly (1), as per the following procedure.
a. Pull up input shaft assembly (2) and fork rod (3).
b. Set 1st-2nd fork rod (4) to mainshaft assembly, and then install
them to clutch housing.
JPDIC0609ZZ
24. Install reverse idler shaft assembly (1), as per the following pro-
cedure.
a. Install spring washer to clutch housing.
b. Pull up input shaft assembly (2), mainshaft assembly (3), fork
rod (4), and 1st-2nd fork rod (5).
NOTE:
side.
c. Set reverse fork rod (6) to reverse idler shaft assembly, and then
install them to clutch housing.
JPDIC0606ZZ
25. Shift 1st-2nd fork rod (1), fork rod (2), and reverse fork rod (3) to
the neutral position.
26. Install selector (4) to clutch housing.
CAUTION:
Replace selector lever and selector as a set.
SCIA7782E
27. Install selector spring (1) to return bushing (A).

28. Apply recommended sealant to mounting surface of transaxle
case.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV or an equivalent. Refer to GI-
22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
CAUTION:
• Never allow old liquid gasket, moisture, oil, or foreign
matter to remain on mounting surface.
• Check that mounting surface is not damaged.
• Apply sealant bead continuously.
JPDIC0445ZZ
29. Install transaxle case to clutch housing while rotating shifter

lever A (1) in the direction as shown in the figure.
JPDIC0110ZZ

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
30. Install reverse idler shaft mounting bolt ( ), as per the following
procedure. A
a. Install seal washer to reverse idler shaft mounting bolt, and
install reverse idler shaft mounting bolt to transaxle case.
CAUTION: B
Never reuse seal washer.
b. Tighten reverse idler shaft mounting bolt to the specified torque.
C
PCIB1695E
TM
31. Tighten transaxle case mounting bolts ( ) to the specified
torque.
E
G
PCIB1694E
32. Install position switch (1), as per the following procedure. H

a. Apply recommended sealant to threads of position switch.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV or an equivalent. Refer to GI-
22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". I
CAUTION:
Never allow old liquid gasket, moisture, oil, or foreign mat-
ter to remain on thread.
b. Install position switch to transaxle case, and tighten it to the J
specified torque.
33. Install bracket (2) to transaxle case, and tighten mounting bolt to
the specified torque. SCIA7784E K
34. Install selector lever (3), as per the following procedure.
a. Install selector lever to transaxle case.
CAUTION: L
Replace selector lever and selector as a set.
b. Install retaining pin to selector lever, using a pin punch.
CAUTION: M
Never reuse retaining pin.
35. Install drain plug, as per the following procedure.
a. Install gasket to drain plug. N
CAUTION:
Never reuse gasket.
b. Install drain plug to clutch housing, using a socket [Commercial service tool]. O
c. Tighten drain plug to the specified torque.
36. Install filler plug, as per the following procedure.
a. Install gasket to filler plug, and then install them to transaxle case. P
CAUTION:
Never reuse gasket.
b. Tighten filler plug to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Fill with gear oil before tighten filler plug to the specified torque.

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY

Check contact surface and sliding surface for excessive wear,
uneven wear, bend, and damage. Replace if necessary.
SCIA7785E

INPUT SHAFT AND GEAR
A
TM
L
JPDIC0407GB
1. Input shaft front bearing 2. Input shaft 3. 3rd input gear M

4. Spacer 5. Snap ring 6. 3rd baulk ring
7. 3rd-4th coupling sleeve 8. 3rd-4th synchronizer hub 9. Insert key
10. 4th baulk ring 11. 4th input gear 12. 5th input gear N
13. 5th baulk ring 14. 5th-6th coupling sleeve 15. 5th-6th synchronizer hub
16. 6th baulk ring 17. Needle bearing 18. 6th input gear
19. Input shaft rear bearing O
A. First step B. Final step
: Apply gear oil.

P
CAUTION:
• Fix input shaft in a vise with back plate, and then remove gears and snap rings.
• For removal of snap ring, set snap ring pliers and flat pliers at
both sides of snap ring. While expanding snap ring with snap
ring pliers, move snap ring with flat pliers.
• Disassemble gear components putting direction marks on the
parts that do not affect any functions.
SCIA1755J
1. Remove input shaft rear bearing mounting bolt (1), using the
drift (A) [SST: KV32300QAM ( - )].
JPDIC0449ZZ
2. Remove input shaft rear bearing (1), as per the following proce-
dure.
a. Set a puller [Commercial service tool] to input shaft rear bearing.
b. Remove input shaft rear bearing, using a drift (A) [Commercial
service tool].
JPDIC0111ZZ
3. Remove spacer (1), 6th input gear (2), needle bearing, 6th baulk
ring, and 5th-6th synchronizer hub assembly (3).
4. Remove insert keys and 5th-6th coupling sleeve from 5th-6th
synchronizer hub.
PCIB1750E

5. Remove snap ring (1).
6. Remove spacer, 5th baulk ring, 5th input gear (2), and spacer. A
PCIB1754E
TM
8. Remove spacer, 4th input gear (2), 4th baulk ring, and 3rd-4th
synchronizer hub assembly (3). E
9. Remove insert keys and 3rd-4th coupling sleeve from 3rd-4th
synchronizer hub.
F
G
PCIB1753E

H
11. Remove spacer, 3rd baulk ring, and 3rd input gear (2).
PCIB1752E
K
12. Set a puller [Commercial service tool] to input shaft front bearing
(1), and then remove input shaft front bearing.
L
N
PCIB1751E
Assembly INFOID:0000000012200781 O
Note the following procedures, and assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
CAUTION:
• Replace transaxle assembly when replacing input shaft. P

• For installation of snap ring, set snap ring pliers and flat pliers
at both sides of snap ring. While expanding snap ring with
snap ring pliers, move snap ring with flat pliers.
• Never reuse snap ring.
• Check that snap ring is securely installed in a groove.
• Replace 3rd-4th coupling sleeve and 3rd-4th synchronizer
hub as a set.
• Replace 5th-6th coupling sleeve and 5th-6th synchronizer hub
as a set.
SCIA1755J
• Be careful to install 3rd-4th synchronizer hub according to the

specified direction.
A : 3rd input gear side

B : 4th input gear side
PCIB1748E
• Be careful to install 5th-6th synchronizer hub according to the

specified direction.
A : 5th input gear side

PCIB1749E
• Install input shaft front bearing (1), using a drift (A) [Commercial
service tool].
JPDIC0112ZZ

• Install input shaft rear bearing (1), using a drift (A) [Commercial
service tool] and the drift (B) [SST: ST36720030 ( - )]. A
• Apply gear oil to 3rd baulk ring, 4th baulk ring, 5th baulk ring, and
6th baulk ring.
B
JPDIC0113ZZ
TM
• Install input shaft rear bearing mounting bolt (1), as per the follow-
ing procedure.
CAUTION: E
Follow the procedures. Otherwise it may cause a transaxle
malfunction.
1. Fix the drift (A) [SST: KV32300QAM ( - )] in a vise, and then set
input shaft assembly. F
2. Install input shaft rear bearing mounting bolt, and then tighten it
to the specified torque of the first step.
3. Loosen input shaft rear bearing mounting bolt by a half turn. G
4. Tighten input shaft rear bearing mounting bolt to the specified
torque of the final step.
JPDIC0449ZZ
H

I
Input Shaft and Gear
Check the following items and replace if necessary.
• Damage, peeling, bend, uneven wear, and distortion of shaft.
• Excessive wear, damage, and peeling of gear. J
SCIA7736E
Synchronizer Hub and Coupling Sleeve M

• Breakage, damage, and unusual wear on contact surface of cou-
pling sleeve, synchronizer hub, and insert key.
N
• Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub move smoothly.
P
SCIA1753J
Baulk Ring

Check contact surface of baulk ring cam and insert key for excessive
wear, uneven wear, bend, and damage. Replace if necessary.
SCIA0608J
Bearing
Check bearing for damage and unsmooth rotation. Replace if neces-
sary.
MTF0041D

MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
A
TM
L
SFIA3293E
1. Mainshaft front bearing outer 2. Mainshaft front bearing inner race 3. Mainshaft M
race
4. 1st main gear 5. 1st inner baulk ring 6. 1st synchronizer cone
7. 1st outer baulk ring 8. 1st-2nd coupling sleeve 9. Insert key
N
13. 2nd inner baulk ring 14. 2nd main gear 15. Bushing
16. 3rd main gear 17. Mainshaft adjusting shim 18. 4th main gear
O
19. 5th main gear 20. 6th main gear 21. Mainshaft rear bearing inner race
22. Mainshaft rear bearing outer race 23. Snap ring 24. Mainshaft rear bearing adjusting
shim
P
: Apply gear oil.

MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
CAUTION:
• Fix mainshaft in a vise with back plate, and then remove gears and snap rings.
• For removal of snap ring, set snap ring pliers and flat pliers at
both sides of snap ring. While expanding snap ring with snap
ring pliers, move snap ring with flat pliers.
• Disassemble gear components putting direction marks on the
parts that never affect any functions.
SCIA1755J
PCIB1745E
2. Remove 6th main gear (1) and mainshaft rear bearing inner race
(2), as per the following procedure.
a. Set a puller [Commercial service tool] to 6th main gear.
b. Remove mainshaft rear bearing inner race and 6th main gear,
using the drift (A) [SST: ST33052000 ( - )].
PCIB1744E
3. Remove 4th main gear (1) and 5th main gear (2), as per the fol-
lowing procedure.
a. Set a puller [Commercial service tool] to 4th main gear.
b. Remove 5th main gear and 4th main gear, using the drift (A)
[SST: ST33052000 ( - )].
4. Remove mainshaft adjusting shim.
PCIB1743E

MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
5. Remove 1st main gear (1), 1st-2nd synchronizer hub assembly
(2), 2nd main gear (3), and 3rd main gear (4), as per the follow- A
ing procedure.
a. Set a puller [Commercial service tool] to 1st main gear.
b. Remove 3rd main gear, busing, 2nd main gear, 2nd inner baulk B
ring, 2nd synchronizer cone, 2nd outer baulk ring, 1st-2nd syn-
chronizer hub assembly, 1st outer baulk ring, 1st synchronizer
cone, 1st inner baulk ring, and 1st main gear, using the drift (A)
C
[SST: ST33052000 ( - )].
c. Remove insert keys and 1st-2nd coupling sleeve from 1st-2nd
synchronizer hub. PCIB1742E
TM
6. Remove mainshaft front bearing inner race (1), as per the fol-
lowing procedure.
a. Set a puller [Commercial service tool] to mainshaft front bearing
E
inner race.
b. Remove mainshaft front bearing inner race, using the drift (A)
[SST: ST33052000 ( - )].
F
G
PCIB1741E
H
CAUTION:
• Select mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim, as per the following procedure when replacing main-
shaft adjusting shim, 6th main gear, 5th main gear, or 4th main gear.
- Replace mainshaft adjusting shim. I
• If new mainshaft adjusting shim is thinner than previous one, offset the thickness difference by
selecting thicker mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim.
• If new mainshaft adjusting shim is thicker than previous one, offset the thickness difference by J
selecting thinner mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim.
- Replace 6th main gear, 5th main gear, or 4th main gear.
• Measure the thickness of the main gear used before and the new main gear
K
• Increase the thickness of the mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim, if the difference is smaller than
0.025 mm (0.0010 in).
• Replace transaxle assembly when replacing mainshaft.
• For installation of snap ring, set snap ring pliers and flat pliers L
at both sides of snap ring. While expanding snap ring with
snap ring pliers, move snap ring with flat pliers.
M
SCIA1755J O

MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
1. Install mainshaft front bearing inner race (1), using the drift (A)
[SST: ST36720030 ( - )].
CAUTION:
Replace mainshaft front bearing outer race and mainshaft
2. Apply gear oil to 1st inner baulk ring, 1st synchronizer cone, 1st
outer baulk ring, 2nd inner baulk ring, 2nd synchronizer cone,
and 2nd outer baulk ring.
CAUTION:
• Replace 1st inner baulk ring, 1st synchronizer cone, and
1st outer baulk ring as a set. PCIB1733E
• Replace 2nd inner baulk ring, 2nd synchronizer cone, and
2nd outer baulk ring as a set.
3. Install insert keys and 1st-2nd coupling sleeve to 1st-2nd synchronizer hub.
CAUTION:
Replace 1st-2nd synchronizer hub and 1st-2nd coupling sleeve as a set.
4. Install 1st main gear (1), 1st inner baulk ring, 1st synchronizer
cone, 1st outer baulk ring, 1st-2nd synchronizer hub assembly
(2), 2nd inner baulk ring, 2nd synchronizer cone, and 2nd outer
baulk ring.
5. Install bushing (3), using the drift (A) [SST: KV32102700 ( - )].
PCIB1734E
6. Install 3rd main gear (1) and 2nd main gear (2), using the drift
(A) [SST: KV32102700 ( - )].
PCIB1735E
7. Measure dimension “L” as shown in the figure. Select mainshaft

adjusting shim (1) according to the following list, and then install
it to mainshaft.
2 : Mainshaft
3 : 3rd main gear
Unit: mm (in)
Dimension “L” Mainshaft adjusting shim thickness

147.690 – 147.666 (5.8146 – 5.8136) 1.500 (0.0591)
147.665 – 147.641 (5.8136 – 5.8126) 1.525 (0.0600) PCIB1736E
147.640 – 147.616 (5.8126 – 5.8116) 1.550 (0.0610)

147.615 – 147.591 (5.8116 – 5.8107) 1.575 (0.0620)
147.590 – 147.566 (5.8106 – 5.8097) 1.600 (0.0630)
147.565 – 147.541 (5.8096 – 5.8087) 1.625 (0.0640)
147.540 – 147.516 (5.8086 – 5.8077) 1.650 (0.0650)
147.515 – 147.491 (5.8077 – 5.8067) 1.675 (0.0659)

MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
Dimension “L” Mainshaft adjusting shim thickness
A
147.490 – 147.466 (5.8067 – 5.8057) 1.700 (0.0669)
147.465 – 147.441 (5.8057 – 5.8048) 1.725 (0.0679)
147.440 – 147.416 (5.8047 – 5.8038) 1.750 (0.0689) B
147.415 – 147.391 (5.8037 – 5.8028) 1.775 (0.0699)
8. Install 4th main gear (1), using the drift (A) [SST: KV32102700 ( -
)]. C
TM
PCIB1737E
F
9. Install 5th main gear (1), using the drift (A) [SST: KV32102700 ( -
)].
G
I
PCIB1738E
10. Install 6th main gear (1), using the drift (A) [SST: KV32102700 ( - J
)].
PCIB1739E M
11. Install mainshaft rear bearing inner race (1), using the drift (A)
[SST: ST30901000 (J-26010-01)].
CAUTION: N
Replace mainshaft rear bearing inner race and mainshaft
rear bearing outer race as a set.
12. Install snap ring. O
CAUTION:
Never reuse snap ring.
P
PCIB1740E

Mainshaft and Gear

MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
• Damage, peeling, bend, uneven wear, and distortion of shaft.
• Excessive wear, damage, and peeling of gear.
PCIB1775E
Synchronizer Hub and Coupling Sleeve

• Breakage, damage, and unusual wear on contact surface of cou-
pling sleeve, synchronizer hub, and insert key.
• Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub move smoothly.
SCIA1753J
Baulk Ring
Check contact surface of baulk ring cam and insert key for excessive
wear, uneven wear, bend, and damage. Replace if necessary.
SCIA0608J
Bearing
sary.
CAUTION:
• Replace mainshaft front bearing outer race and mainshaft
• Replace mainshaft rear bearing inner race and mainshaft rear
bearing outer race as a set.
SPD715

REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEAR
A
TM
J
JPDIC0425GB
1. Reverse output gear 2. Snap ring 3. Reverse baulk ring K

4. Return spring 5. Needle bearing 6. Seal washer
7. Reverse idler shaft 8. Spacer 9. Reverse input gear
10. Lock washer 11. Spring washer L
M
Disassembly INFOID:0000000012200788 N
1. Remove reverse output gear (1).

O
PCIB1760E

PCIB1759E
3. Remove reverse baulk ring (1) and return spring (2).
PCIB1758E
4. Remove snap ring (1), lock washer (2), and reverse input gear
(3).
PCIB1757E
5. Remove needle bearings (1) and washer.
PCIB1761E
Note the following procedures, and assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse snap ring.
• Check that snap ring is securely installed in a groove.
• Replace reverse output gear, snap ring, reverse baulk ring, return spring, needle bearing, reverse
idler shaft, spacer, reverse input gear, and lock washer as a set.

Shaft and Gear
Check the following items. Replace reverse output gear, snap ring, reverse baulk ring, return spring, needle A
bearing, reverse idler shaft, spacer, reverse input gear, and lock washer as a set, if necessary.
• Damage, peeling, bend, uneven wear, and distortion of shaft
• Excessive wear, damage, and peeling of gear
B
Bearing
Check damage and rotation of bearing. Replace reverse output gear, snap ring, reverse baulk ring, return
spring, needle bearing, reverse idler shaft, spacer, reverse input gear, and lock washer as a set, if necessary. C
TM

FINAL DRIVE
FINAL DRIVE
JPDIC0424GB
1. Shim 2. Differential side bearing outer race 3. Differential side bearing inner race
(transaxle case side) (transaxle case side)
4. Final gear 5. Differential case 6. Differential side bearing inner race
7. Differential side bearing outer race
1. Remove differential side bearing inner race (clutch housing side)

(1), as per the following procedure.
a. Set a puller [Commercial service tool] to differential side bearing
inner race (clutch housing side).
b. Remove differential side bearing inner race (clutch housing
side), using the drift (A) [SST: ST33061000 (J-8107-2)].
PCIB1767E

FINAL DRIVE
2. Remove final gear mounting bolts, and then remove final gear
(1). A
JPDIC0446ZZ
TM
3. Remove differential side bearing inner race (transaxle case
side) (1), as per the following procedure.
a. Set a puller [Commercial service tool] to differential side bearing E
inner race (transaxle case side).
b. Remove differential side bearing inner race (transaxle case
side), using a drift (A) [Commercial service tool].
F
G
JPDIC0114ZZ
H
1. Install final gear, and then tighten final gear mounting bolts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Replace final gear and differential case as a set. I
2. Install differential side bearing inner race (clutch housing side),
using a drift (A) [Commercial service tool].
CAUTION: J
Replace differential side bearing inner race (clutch housing
side) and differential side bearing outer race (clutch hous-
ing side) as a set.
K
L
JPDIC0115ZZ
3. Install differential side bearing inner race (transaxle case side), M

using a drift (A) [Commercial service tool].
CAUTION:
Replace differential side bearing inner race (transaxle case
side) and differential side bearing outer race (transaxle N
case side) as a set.
JPDIC0116ZZ P

Gear and Case
Check final gear and differential case. Replace if necessary.

FINAL DRIVE
Bearing
sary.
SPD715

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [6MT: RS6F94R]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A

General Specifications INFOID:0000000012200795
B
Transaxle type RS6F94R

C
Engine type MR16DDT
Axle type 2WD
Number of speed 6 TM
Synchromesh type Warner
Shift pattern
E
PCIB1769E
G
Gear ratio 1st 3.7273
2nd 2.1053
3rd 1.5185 H
4th 1.1714
5th 0.9143
6th 0.7674 I
Reverse 3.6865
Final gear 3.9333
J
Number of teeth Input gear 1st 11
2nd 19
3rd 27 K
4th 35
5th 35
L
6th 43
Reverse 11
Main gear 1st 41 M
2nd 40
3rd 41
N
4th 41
5th 32
6th 33 O
Reverse 42
Reverse idler gear Input/Output 28/29
Final gear Final gear/Pinion 59/15 P
Side gear/Pinion mate gear 13/10
Oil capacity (Reference) (US pt, Imp pt) Approx. 2.0 (4-1/4, 3-1/2)
Remarks Reverse synchronizer Installed
Triple-cone synchronizer 1st and 2nd

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [6MT: RS6F52H]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Service Manual.
WARNING:
see “SRS AIR BAG”.
connectors.
WARNING:
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
windshield.
PIIB3706J
When disconnecting the battery terminal, pay attention to the following.


PRECAUTIONS
switch and wait at least 30 seconds. A
B
C
SEF289H
TM
NOTE:
ECU may be active for several tens of seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF. If the battery terminal E
NOTE: F
- Driving for 30 minutes or more at 140 km/h (86 MPH) or more. G
NOTE: H
• After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result" of all ECUs and erase DTC. I
NOTE:
Precaution for Work INFOID:0000000012200799 J
• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
K
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip. L
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly. M
• Follow the steps below to clean components.
- Water soluble dirt: Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, and wring the water out of the cloth to wipe the dirty
area.
Then rub with a soft and dry cloth. N
- Oily dirt: Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%), and wipe
the dirty area.
Then dip a cloth into fresh water, and wring the water out of the cloth to wipe the detergent off. Then rub with O
a soft and dry cloth.
• Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol, or gasoline.
• For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.
P
Service Notice or Precaution INFOID:0000000012200800
• Do not reuse transaxle oil, once it has been drained.

• Check oil level or replace oil with vehicle on level surface.
• During removal or installation, keep inside of transaxle clear of dust or dirt.
• Check for the correct installation status prior to removal or disassembly. If matching marks are required, be
certain they do not interfere with the function of the parts they are applied.

PRECAUTIONS
• In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally from inside to outside. If tight-
ening sequence is specified, use it.
• Be careful not to damage sliding surfaces and mating surfaces.

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [6MT: RS6F52H]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000012200801
B
Tool number
Tool name
KV381054S0 • Removing differential side bearing outer
(J-34286) race (clutch housing side) TM
Puller • Removing differential side bearing outer
• Removing mainshaft front bearing
E
ZZA0601D
ST33400001 Installing differential side oil seal (clutch hous- F

(J-26082) ing side)
Drift a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia.
G
ZZA0814D
H
ST35321000 • Installing input shaft oil seal

( — ) • Installing reverse main gear
Drift • Installing 1st main gear bushing I
• Installing 1st-2nd synchronizer hub assem-
bly
• Installing 2nd main gear bushing
• Installing 3rd main gear J
a: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia.
ZZA1000D b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia.
KV40105320 Installing differential side bearing outer race K
( — ) (clutch housing side)
Drift a: 88 mm (3.46 in) dia.
ZZA0898D M
ST33200000 • Installing mainshaft front bearing
(J-26082) • Installing 6th input gear bushing
Drift • Installing 4th main gear N
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia. O
ZZA1002D

PREPARATION
Tool number
Tool name
ST30720000 • Installing differential side oil seal (transaxle
(J-25405) case side)
Drift • Installing differential side bearing outer race
• Installing differential side bearing outer race
(transaxle case side)
• Installing mainshaft rear bearing
• Installing differential side bearing (clutch
housing side)
• Installing differential side bearing (transaxle
ZZA0811D case side)
a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia.
b: 55.5 mm (2.185 in) dia.
ST33061000 • Installing bore plug
(J-8107-2) • Removing differential side bearing (transax-
Drift le case side)
• Removing differential side bearing (clutch
housing side)
a: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
ZZA1000D
ST33052000 • Removing input shaft rear bearing

( — ) • Removing 6th input gear, 6th input gear
Drift bushing, 5th-6th synchronizer hub assem-
bly, and 5th input gear
• Removing 5th input gear bushing, 4th input
gear, 4th input gear bushing, 3rd-4th syn-
chronizer hub assembly, and 3rd input gear
• Installing input shaft front bearing
• Removing mainshaft rear bearing
ZZA1023D • Removing 4th main gear and 5th main gear
a: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia.
b: 28 mm (1.10 in) dia.
KV40105020 Removing 3rd main gear, 2nd main gear, 2nd
( — ) main gear bushing, 1st-2nd synchronizer hub
Drift assembly, 1st main gear, 1st main gear bush-
ing, and reverse main gear
a: 39.7 mm (1.563 in) dia.
b: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia.
c: 15 mm (0.59 in)
ZZA1133D
ST30031000 Measuring wear of inner baulk ring

(J-22912-01)
Puller
ZZA0537D

PREPARATION
Tool number
(TechMate No.) Description A
Tool name
KV40105710 • Installing 3rd-4th synchronizer hub assem-
( — ) bly B
Press stand • Installing 4th input gear bushing
• Installing 5th input gear bushing
• Installing 5th-6th synchronizer hub assem-
bly C
• Installing 2nd main gear bushing
• Installing 3rd main gear
ZZA1058D
a: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia.
b: 41 mm (1.61 in) TM
ST30901000 • Installing input shaft rear bearing
(J-26010-01) • Installing 4th main gear
Drift • Installing 5th main gear E
• Installing mainshaft rear bearing
a: 79 mm (3.11 in) dia.
b: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia. F
c: 35.2 mm (1.386 in) dia.
ZZA0978D
ST30032000 Installing input shaft front bearing

(J-26010-01) a: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia. G
Drift b: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
c: 31 mm (1.22 in) dia.
H
ZZA0978D
I
ST38220000 • Installing reverse main gear
( — ) • Installing 1st main gear bushing
Press stand • Installing 1st-2nd synchronizer hub assem-
bly J
a: 63 mm (2.48 in) dia.
b: 65 mm (2.56 in)
K
ZZA1058D
KV40101630 Installing reverse main gear

(J-35870) a: 68 mm (2.68 in) dia.
L
Drift b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
ZZA1003D

PREPARATION
Tool number
Tool name
KV38102510 • Installing 1st main gear bushing
( — ) • Installing 1st-2nd synchronizer hub assem-
Drift bly
• Installing differential side bearing (transaxle
case side)
• Installing differential side bearing (clutch
housing side)
a: 71 mm (2.80 in) dia.
ZZA0838D b: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia.
— For removing trim
( J-46534 )
Trim tool set
AWJIA0483ZZ
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000012200802

Pin punch Removing and installing retaining pin
a: 4.5 mm (0.177 in) dia.
NT410
Pin punch Removing and installing retaining pin of selec-

tor lever
a: 5.5 mm (0.217 in) dia.
NT410
Pin punch Removing and installing retaining pin of each

shifter lever
a: 7.5 mm (0.295 in) dia.
NT410
Drift Installing striking rod oil seal and shifter lever

oil seal
a: 24.5 mm (0.965 in) dia.
S-NT063

PREPARATION
A
Puller Removing each bearing, gear, and bushing
C
ZZA0537D
Puller Removing each bearing, gear, and bushing
TM
NT077
Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts F
PBIC0190E
H

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [6MT: RS6F52H]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sectional View INFOID:0000000012200803
JSDIA5281GB
1. Transaxle case 2. 3rd input gear 3. 3rd-4th synchronizer hub

4. 3rd-4th coupling sleeve 5. 4th input gear 6. 5th input gear
7. 5th-6th synchronizer hub 8. 5th-6th coupling sleeve 9. 6th input gear
10. Input shaft rear bearing 11. Mainshaft rear bearing 12. 6th main gear
13. 5th main gear 14. 4th main gear 15. 3rd main gear
16. 2nd main gear 17. 1st-2nd synchronizer hub 18. 1st-2nd coupling sleeve
19. 1st main gear 20. Reverse main gear 21. Differential side bearing
22. Differential case assembly 23. Final gear 24. Mainshaft front bearing
25. Mainshaft 26. Input shaft 27. Input shaft front bearing
28. Clutch housing 29. Reverse idler shaft 30. Reverse idler gear (front)
31. Reverse coupling sleeve 32. Reverse idler gear(rear)

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [6MT: RS6F52H]
System Description INFOID:0000000012200804
A
DOUBLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER
Double-cone synchronizer is adopted for 3rd gear to reduce operating force of the control lever.
B
TRIPLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER
Triple-cone synchronizer are adopted for 1st and 2nd gears to reduce operating force of the control lever.
C
TM
E
PCIB1454E
REVERSE GEAR NOISE PREVENTION FUNCTION (SYNCHRONIZING METHOD) F

Reverse gear can be matched smoothly in a structure by setting syn-
chronizer hub (1) of reverse idler gear (rear), reverse coupling
sleeve (2), reverse baulk ring (3), and reverse insert spring (4) to
reverse idler gears, and letting reverse gear be synchronized. G
5 : Reverse idler gear (rear)

6 : Reverse idler gear (front) H
I
PCIB1909E

POSITION SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [6MT: RS6F52H]
POSITION SWITCH
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000012200805
1.CHECK BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH

Gear position Continuity

Reverse Yes
Except reverse No
1 : Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch

2 : Back-up lamp switch
Is the inspection result normal? PCIB1970E
NO >> Replace position switch. Refer to TM-82, "Removal and Installation".
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000012200806
1.CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH

Gear position Continuity

Neutral Yes
Except neutral No
NO >> Replace position switch.
PCIB1970E

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [6MT: RS6F52H]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
NVH Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000012200807
B
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspec-
tion. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
C
STRIKING ROD ASSEMBLY (Worn or damaged)

TM
SHIFT CONTROL LINKAGE (Worn)
BAULK RING (Worn or damaged)

E
BEARING (Worn or damaged)

OIL SEAL (Worn or damaged)
INSERT SPRING (Damaged)

SUSPECTED PARTS
GEAR (Worn or damaged)

(Possible cause)
F
OIL (Oil level is high.)
GASKET (Damaged)
SHIFT FORK (Worn)

OIL (Oil level is low.)
OIL (Wrong oil.)
TM-88, TM-117, TM-125, TM-136, TM-136

I
TM-125
J
TM-80
TM-88
TM-83
Reference page
L
Noise 1 2 3 3
Oil leakage 3 1 2 2
Symptoms M
Hard to shift or will not shift 1 1 2 3 3
Jumps out of gear 1 2 3 3
N

GEAR OIL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [6MT: RS6F52H]
GEAR OIL
OIL LEAKAGE
Make sure that gear oil is not leaking from transaxle or around it.
OIL LEVEL
2. Check the oil level from filler plug mounting hole as shown in the
figure.
CAUTION:
Never start engine while checking oil level.
CAUTION:
Never reuse gasket.
4. Tighten filler plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-88,
"Exploded View".
PCIB1968E
Draining INFOID:0000000012200809
1. Start engine and let it run to warm up transaxle.

2. Stop engine. Remove drain plug (1) and gasket, using a socket
[Commercial service tool] and then drain gear oil.
3. Set a gasket on drain plug and install it to clutch housing, using
a socket [Commercial service tool].
CAUTION:
Never reuse gasket.
4. Tighten drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-86,
"Exploded View".
PCIB1834E
Refilling INFOID:0000000012200810
Refilling
1. Remove plug (1). Fill the transaxle with new oil and check the oil
level (L) using suitable gauge (A) as shown.
Oil grade and capacity : Refer to TM-143, "General

Specification".
Oil level (L) : 38.5 - 45.5 mm (1.516 - 1.791 in)

2. Install a new O-ring onto plug (1) and then install it to transaxle.
Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to TM-88, "Exploded
View". PCIB1968E
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-ring.

SIDE OIL SEAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: RS6F52H]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

SIDE OIL SEAL
B
REMOVAL
1. Remove front drive shafts from transaxle assembly. Refer to FAX-28, "2WD : Removal and Installation". C
2. Remove differential side oil seal (1) using a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not damage transaxle case and clutch housing. TM
F
SCIA7625E
INSTALLATION
G
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Install differential side oil seal to clutch housing and transaxle case
to the specified dimension (A) using Tools.
H
Dimension A) : -0.5 - 0.5 mm (-0.020 - 0.020 in)
Tool numbers : ST30720000 (J-25405) I

: ST33400001 (J-26082)
CAUTION: J
Do not reuse oil seal.
• Check oil level after installation. Refer to TM-80, "Inspection" . SCIA1010E

POSITION SWITCH
POSITION SWITCH
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect position switch connector.
3. Remove position switch from transaxle case.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply recommended sealant to threads of position switch.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV or an equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products
and Sealants".
CAUTION:
2. Install position switch to transaxle case.
3. Tighten position switch to the specified torque. Refer to TM-88, "Exploded View".
4. For the next step and after, install in the reverse order of removal.

• Check continuity between position switch terminals. Refer toTM-78, "BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH : Compo-
nent Inspection" (Back-up lamp switch) and TM-78, "PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH : Compo-
nent Inspection" (PNP switch).
• Check the oil leakage. Refer to TM-80, "Inspection".

CONTROL LINKAGE
CONTROL LINKAGE
A
TM
I
LCIA0414E
1. Shift selector knob 2. Shift selector 3. Shift selector assembly J

4. Select cable 5. Lock plate 6. Cable bracket
7. Shift cable 8. Cable support bracket

K

L
REMOVAL
M
2. Remove air cleaner and air duct. Refer to EM-27, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove shift cable from shifter lever as shown. N
BCIA0052E

CONTROL LINKAGE
4. Remove select cable from selector lever A as shown.
BCIA0057E
5. Move shift selector to neutral position.

6. Remove shift selector knob.
7. Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-24, "Removal and Installation".
8. Remove shift selector assembly nuts.
9. Remove exhaust front tube, center muffler and heat shield. Refer to EX-10, "Removal and Installation".
10. Remove cable support bracket.
11. Remove select cable and shift cable from cable bracket.
12. Remove shift selector assembly from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
• Securely install each cable to shifter lever and selector lever.
• Be careful about the installation direction, and screw shift selector
knob onto shift selector.
: Front
SCIA7630E
• When shift selector is selected to 1st-2nd side and 5th-6th side, confirm shift selector returns to neutral posi-
tion smoothly.
• When shift selector is shifted to each position, make sure there is no binding or disconnection in each boot.

AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
A
TM
G
JSDIA7171ZZ
1. Air breather hose 2. Clip 3. Transaxle assembly

4. Air breather tube 5. Bracket 6 Air cleaner case
H

I
REMOVAL
J
1. Disconnect clip of air breather hose from bracket.
2. Remove air breather hose from air breather tube of transaxle assembly.
INSTALLATION K
CAUTION:
• Make sure there are no pinched or restricted areas on the air breather hose caused by bending or L
winding when installing it.
• Never reuse clip.
• Be sure to insert air breather hose into air breather tube until hose end reaches the tube's base.
• Set air breather hose with painted mark facing forward. M
• Install air breather hose to bracket by fully inserting the clip.

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: RS6F52H]
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
LCIA0413E
1. Transaxle assembly 2. LH engine mount bracket

A. Refer to TM-86, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
If transaxle assembly is removed from the vehicle, always replace CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder).
Inserted CSC returns to the original position when removing transaxle assembly. Dust on clutch disc
sliding parts may damage CSC seal, and may cause clutch fluid leakage.
REMOVAL
1. Remove clutch tube from CSC. Refer to CL-17, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Do not depress clutch pedal during removal procedure.
NOTE:
Cap or plug opening(s) to prevent fluid from spilling.
2. Remove engine and transaxle assembly. Refer to EM-64, "2WD : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove transaxle assembly to engine bolts.
5. Separate transaxle assembly from engine.
INSTALLATION
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: RS6F52H]
• If transaxle assembly is removed from the vehicle, always replace CSC. Refer to CL-17, "Removal and
Installation". A
• When installing the transaxle assembly to the engine, use the
specified tightening torque in the numerical sequence shown:
B
z : Transaxle to engine
X : Engine to transaxle
CAUTION: C
When installing transaxle assembly, do not allow the tran-
saxle input shaft to make contact with the clutch cover.
TM
Bolt symbol A B C D E F
PCIB1972E
Quantity 1 3 1 2 2 1
Bolt length “ ” 45 80 45 35 45 E
mm (in) (1.77) (3.15) (1.77) (1.38) (1.77)
Tightening torque 35.3 74.5 42.6 48.0
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) (3.6, 26) (7.6, 55) (4.3, 31) (4.9, 35) F
• Bleed the air from the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-10, "Air Bleeding".
• After installation, check oil level and check for leaks and loose mechanisms. Refer to TM-80, "Inspection".
G

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: RS6F52H]
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
CASE AND HOUSING
JSDIA5278GB
1. Differential side oil seal 2. Clutch housing 3. CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder)
4. Input shaft oil seal 5. Oil channel 6. Oil gutter A
7. Back-up lamp switch 8. Plunger 9. Gasket
10. Plug 11. Bore plug 12. Striking rod oil seal
13. Transaxle case 14. Oil gutter B 15. Air breather tube
16. Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch 17. Shifter lever oil seal 18. Drain plug
19. Magnet 20. O-ring 21. Plug
: Apply Genuine Silicone RTV or an equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Seal-
ants".

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY

A
SHAFT AND GEAR

B
TM
PCIB1888E
K
1. Input shaft front bearing 2. Input shaft 3. 3rd needle bearing
4. 3rd input gear 5. 3rd inner baulk ring 6. 3rd synchronizer cone
7. 3rd outer baulk ring 8. 3rd-4th spread spring 9. 3rd-4th shifting insert L
10. 3rd-4th synchronizer hub 11. 4th baulk ring 12. 3rd-4th coupling sleeve
13. 4th input gear bushing 14. 4th needle bearing 15. 4th input gear
16. Thrust washer 17. 5th input gear bushing 18. 5th needle bearing M
19. 5th input gear 20. 5th baulk ring 21. 5th-6th spread spring
22. 5th-6th shifting insert 23. 5th-6th synchronizer hub 24. 5th-6th coupling sleeve
25. 6th baulk ring 26. 6th input gear 27. 6th needle bearing N
28. 6th input gear bushing 29. Snap ring 30. Input shaft rear bearing
31. Oil channel 32. Input shaft rear bearing adjusting 33. Retaining pin
shim O
34. Reverse idler shaft 35. Thrust needle bearing 36. Reverse idler gear needle bear-
ing
37. Reverse insert spring 38. Reverse idler gear (front) 39. Reverse baulk ring P
40. Reverse coupling sleeve 41. Reverse idler gear (rear) 42. Reverse idler gear adjusting shim
: Apply gear oil.


TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
PCIB1889E
1. Mainshaft front bearing 2. Mainshaft bearing retainer 3. Mainshaft

4. Reverse main gear 5. 1st main gear 6. 1st main gear bushing
7. 1st needle bearing 8. 1st inner baulk ring 9. 1st synchronizer cone
10. 1st outer baulk ring 11. 1st-2nd spread spring 12. 1st-2nd shifting insert
16. 2nd inner baulk ring 17. 1st-2nd coupling sleeve 18. 2nd main gear bushing
19. 2nd needle bearing 20. 2nd main gear 21. 3rd main gear
22. 3rd-4th mainshaft spacer 23. 4th main gear adjusting shim 24. 4th main gear
25. 5th main gear 26. 5th-6th mainshaft spacer 27. 6th main gear
28. 6th main gear adjusting shim 29. Mainshaft rear bearing 30. Mainshaft C-ring
31. C-ring holder 32. Snap ring 33. Mainshaft rear bearing adjust-
ing shim
: Apply gear oil.

SHIFT FORK AND FORK ROD

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
TM
JSDIA5279GB
K
1. Clutch housing 2. Retaining pin 3. Reverse shift fork

4. Reverse fork rod 5. Return spring 6. Striking rod assembly L
7. Striking rod shim 8. Striking rod adjusting shim 9. Shifter lever A
10. Shifter lever B 11. Guide bolt 12. Selector lever
13. Transaxle case 14. 3rd-4th shift fork 15. 3rd-4th fork rod M
16. 1st-2nd shift fork 17. 1st-2nd fork rod 18. 5th-6th shift fork
19. 5th-6th fork rod
N
FINAL DRIVE O

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
JSDIA5268GB
1. Differential side bearing outer 2. Differential side bearing (clutch 3. Differential case assembly
race (clutch housing side) housing side)
4. Final gear 5. Differential side bearing (tran- 6. Differential side bearing outer
saxle case side) race (transaxle case side)
7. Differential side bearing adjust-
ing shim
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove drain plug and gasket from clutch housing.
PCIB1834E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
2. Remove plug bolt and then plug and O-ring from clutch housing.
A
PCIB1969E
TM
3. Remove plug and gasket from transaxle case.
G
PCIB1865E
4. Remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch (1) from transaxle

H
case.
5. Remove back-up lamp switch (2) and plunger from transaxle
case.
CAUTION: I
Do not lose plunger.
6. Remove air breather tube (3) from transaxle case.
J
PCIB1835E
K
7. Remove guide bolt from transaxle case.
N
PCIB1836E
8. Remove retaining pin using suitable tool and then remove selec- O
tor lever from transaxle case.
PCIB1837E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
9. Remove transaxle case bolts.
PCIB1838E
10. Remove bore plug from transaxle case using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
• Do not damage transaxle case.
• Access bore plug from cutout (A) of transaxle case when
removing.
PCIB1839E
11. Remove transaxle case following the procedures below.

a. Expand snap ring at mainshaft rear bearing accessing from the
bore plug hole. Then pull up transaxle case from clutch housing
until snap ring comes off.
PCIB1840E
b. With shifter lever A (1) held in the position shown, remove tran-
saxle case from clutch housing.
CAUTION:
Do not drop adjusting shims.
NOTE:
Make sure to hold shifter lever A in the position shown. Other-
wise transaxle case cannot be removed from clutch housing.
PCIB1808E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
12. Remove oil gutter A (1) and oil gutter B (2) from transaxle case.
A
A : Tab of oil gutter
PCIB1841E
TM
13. Remove snap ring from transaxle case.
G
PCIB1842E
14. Remove retaining pin using suitable tool and then remove shifter H
lever A and shifter lever B from transaxle case.
PCIB1844E K
15. Remove differential side bearing outer race (transaxle case
side) from transaxle case using Tool. Then remove differential
side bearing adjusting shim from transaxle case. L
Tool number : KV381054S0 (J-34286)

M
CAUTION:
Do not damage transaxle case or differential side bearing
outer race.
N
PCIB0936E
16. Remove differential side oil seal from transaxle case using suit- O
able tool.
CAUTION:
Do not damage transaxle case. P
SCIA0397E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
17. Remove shifter lever oil seal (1) and striking rod oil seal (2) from
transaxle case.
CAUTION:
Do not damage transaxle case.
PCIB1846E
18. Remove striking rod shim (1), striking rod adjusting shim (2),
mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim (3), input shaft rear bear-
ing adjusting shim (4), and reverse idler gear adjusting shim (5).
PCIB1858E
19. Remove retaining pin of reverse shift fork (1) using suitable tool.
2 : Reverse fork rod
PCIB1850E
20. Rotate striking lever of striking rod assembly as shown. Then

rotate reverse fork rod to a position where bracket of reverse
fork rod does not interfere with striking lever of striking rod
assembly.
21. Pull out reverse shift fork and reverse fork rod.
PCIB1851E
22. Remove retaining pin of 5th-6th shift fork (1) using suitable tool.
2 : 5th-6th fork rod
PCIB1852E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
23. Remove retaining pin of 3rd-4th shift fork (1) using suitable tool. A
24. Pull out 3rd-4th fork rod (2).
PCIB1853E
TM
25. Pull out 5th-6th shift fork (1) and 5th-6th fork rod (2).
E
G
PCIB1854E
26. Pull out 3rd-4th shift fork (1). H
PCIB1855E
K
27. Remove retaining pin of 1st-2nd shift fork (1) using suitable tool.
28. Pull out 1st-2nd shift fork and 1st-2nd fork rod (2). L
PCIB1856E
O
29. Remove striking rod assembly (1).
PCIB1857E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
30. Remove gear components from clutch housing in the following
procedure.
a. Remove a set of input shaft assembly, mainshaft assembly, and
reverse idler gear assembly by tapping the tip of input shaft from
the back of the clutch housing with a plastic hammer.
CAUTION:
Always withdraw mainshaft straight out. Failure to do so
can damage resin oil channel on clutch housing side.
b. Remove final drive assembly.
SCIA0964E
31. Remove magnet from clutch housing.
PCIB1859E
32. Remove mainshaft bearing retainer and then mainshaft front

bearing from clutch housing using the Tool.

CAUTION:
Do not damage clutch housing, mainshaft front bearing, or
oil channel.
33. Remove oil channel from clutch housing.
PCIB0937E
34. Remove differential side bearing outer race (clutch housing

side) from clutch housing using the puller.

CAUTION:
Do not damage clutch housing or differential side bearing
outer race.
PCIB0938E
35. Remove input shaft oil seal from clutch housing, using a suitable
tool.
CAUTION:
Do not damage clutch housing.
SCIA0398E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
36. Remove differential side oil seal from clutch housing, using a
suitable tool. A
CAUTION:
Do not damage clutch housing.
B
PCIB1874E
TM
ASSEMBLY E
1. Install differential side oil seal (1) to clutch housing using Tool
(A).
F
Dimension (H) : -0.5 - 0.5 mm (-0.020 - 0.020 in)
Tool number : ST33400001 (J-26082) G

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse differential side oil seal.
• When installing, do not incline differential side oil seal. H
• Do not damage clutch housing.
PCIB1864E
L

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
2. Install input shaft oil seal (1) to clutch housing using Tool (A).
Dimension (H) : 1.1 - 2.0 mm (0.043 - 0.078 in)
Tool number : ST35321000 ( — )

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse input shaft oil seal.
• When installing, do not incline input shaft oil seal.
• Do not damage clutch housing.
PCIB1814E
3. Install differential side bearing outer race (clutch housing side) to

clutch housing using Tools.
Tool number : KV40105320 ( — )

: ST30720000 (J-25405)
CAUTION:
Replace differential side bearing and differential side bear-
ing outer race as a set.
PCIB0933E
4. Install oil channel (1) on mainshaft side.

CAUTION:
When installing oil channel, fit the rib (A) of oil channel into
the processed area of the spot facing (B).
PCIB1921E
5. Install mainshaft front bearing to clutch housing using Tool.
Tool number : ST33200000 (J-26082)

CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation of mainshaft front bearing.
PCIB0939E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
6. Install mainshaft bearing retainer (1) to clutch housing and
tighten bolt to the specified torque. A
2 : Mainshaft front bearing

3 : Oil channel B
CAUTION:
Install with punched surface facing up.
C
PCIB1938E
TM
7. Install magnet to clutch housing.
G
PCIB1859E
8. Install final drive assembly into clutch housing.

H
SCIA0888E
K
9. Install input shaft assembly, mainshaft assembly, and reverse
idler gear assembly into clutch housing.
CAUTION: L
• Wrap a tape, etc. to the spline of input shaft so as not to
damage the input shaft oil seal.
• Be careful with the orientation of reverse idler shaft. M
N
SCIA0964E
10. Install striking rod assembly (1) into clutch housing. O
PCIB1857E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
• Check that return spring is securely seated in the groove
on return pin.
PCIB1866E
11. Install 1st-2nd shift fork (1) and 1st-2nd fork rod (2) and then
install retaining pin to 1st-2nd shift fork.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse retaining pin.
• Be careful with the orientation of 1st-2nd shift fork and
1st-2nd fork rod.
• Assemble retaining pin from the direction shown by the
arrow until it becomes flush with the end surface of 1st-
2nd shift fork.
PCIB1856E
12. Install 3rd-4th shift fork (1) to 3rd-4th coupling sleeve.

CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation of 3rd-4th shift fork.
PCIB1855E
13. Install 5th-6th shift fork (1) and 5th-6th fork rod (2) and then
install retaining pin to 5th-6th shift fork.
CAUTION:
• Be careful with the orientation of 5th-6th shift fork and
5th-6th fork rod.
arrow until it becomes flush with the end surface of 5th-
6th shift fork.
PCIB1852E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
14. Install 3rd-4th fork rod (2) and then install retaining pin to 3rd-4th
shift fork (1). A
CAUTION:
• Be careful with the orientation of 3rd-4th fork rod.
B
arrow until it becomes flush with the end surface of 3rd-
4th shift fork.
C
PCIB1853E
TM
15. Install reverse shift fork (1) and reverse fork rod (2).
CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation of reverse shift fork and
E
reverse fork rod.
G
PCIB1875E
16. Rotate striking lever of striking rod assembly as shown. Then

H
rotate reverse fork rod to a position where bracket of reverse
fork rod does not interfere with striking lever of striking rod
assembly.
I
PCIB1851E
K
17. Install retaining pin to reverse shift fork (1).
2 : Reverse fork rod L

CAUTION:
• Assemble retaining pin from the direction shown by the M
arrow until it becomes flush with the end surface of
reverse shift fork.
N
PCIB1850E
18. Install selected differential side bearing adjusting shim(s) and differential side bearing outer race (tran- O
saxle case side).
19. Install selected reverse idler gear adjusting shim onto reverse idler gear assembly.
20. Install selected input shaft rear bearing adjusting shim onto input shaft. P
21. Install selected striking rod adjusting shim and striking rod shim onto striking rod assembly.

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
22. Install shifter lever oil seal (1) and striking rod oil seal (2) to tran-
saxle case using suitable tool.
Dimension (H) : 0 - 1.0 mm (0 - 0.039 in)

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse shifter lever oil seal or striking rod oil seal.
• When installing, do not incline shifter lever oil seal and
striking rod oil seal.
PCIB1818E
23. Install differential side oil seal (1) to transaxle case using Tool
(A).
Dimension (H) : -0.5 - 0.5 mm (-0.020 - 0.020 in)
Tool number : ST30720000 (J-25405)

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse differential side oil seal.
• When installing, do not incline differential side oil seal.
PCIB1878E
24. Install shifter lever B (1) and shifter lever A (2) to transaxle case.
CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation of shifter lever B and shifter
lever A.
PCIB1843E
25. Install retaining pin to shifter lever A.

CAUTION:
arrow until it becomes flush with the end surface of shifter
lever A.
PCIB1844E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
26. Install transaxle case following the procedures below.
a. Install selected mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim into transaxle case. A
b. Install oil gutter A (1) and oil gutter B (2) to transaxle case.
CAUTION:
Insert the tab (A) of oil gutter A and oil gutter B into tran- B
saxle case.
TM
PCIB1841E
c. Temporarily install snap ring of mainshaft rear bearing into tran- E

saxle case.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse snap ring.
F
PCIB1842E H
d. Apply recommended sealant to mating surface of clutch housing

as shown. I
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV or an equivalent. Refer to MA-
11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
CAUTION:
• Remove old sealant adhering to the mounting surfaces. J
Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adher-
ing to both mounting surfaces.
• Apply sealant so as not to break the bead. K
• The width of sealant bead is 1 - 2 mm (0.04 - 0.08 in).
• The height of sealant bead is 0.4 - 1 mm (0.016 - 0.04 in).
PCIB1807E
• The overlap length of both ends of sealant bead is 3 - 5
mm (0.12 - 0.20 in). L
e. With shifter lever A (1) held in the position shown, temporarily

assemble transaxle case to clutch housing. M
CAUTION:
Do not damage striking rod oil seal.
NOTE:
Make sure to hold shifter lever A in the position shown. Other- N
wise transaxle case cannot be installed to clutch housing.
PCIB1808E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
f. While rotating shifter lever A (1) in the direction of the arrow
shown, assemble transaxle case to clutch housing.
2 : shifter lever B
PCIB1929E
g. Accessing from the bore plug hole, expand snap ring at main-
shaft rear bearing so that the ring catches the periphery of main-
shaft rear bearing.
h. Temporarily tighten transaxle case bolts.
PCIB1840E
i. Shift the shifter lever A (1) to 2nd gear position.

NOTE:
• The 2nd gear position is attained when shifter lever A is in the
position shown.
PCIB1809E
• When transaxle is shifted to the 2nd gear position, mainshaft

assembly is lifted.
j. Seat snap ring in the groove on mainshaft rear bearing. If snap
ring is not seated in the groove on mainshaft rear bearing,
remove transaxle case and repeat the procedure from step d.
SCIA0893E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
k. Tighten transaxle case bolts to the specified torque.
A
PCIB1838E
TM
l. Shift the shifter lever A (1) to neutral position.
NOTE:
The neutral position is attained when shifter lever A is in the E
position shown.
G
PCIB1930E
27. Install bore plug to transaxle case using Tool. H
Tool number : ST33061000 (J-8107-2))

CAUTION: I
Do not reuse bore plug.
PCIB0941E K
28. Install selector lever to transaxle case and then install retaining
pin to selector lever.
CAUTION: L
arrow until it becomes flush with the end surface of selec- M
tor lever.
PCIB1837E
29. Install guide bolt following the procedures below. O

a. Shift the shifter lever A and selector lever to neutral position.

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
b. Visually confirm from the guide bolt hole (C) that the lever is
securely set to neutral position (A). If it is not in the neutral posi-
tion, repeat the procedure from step a.
1 : Guide bolt
CAUTION:
The guide groove (D) of striking rod assembly will be dam-
aged when assembling guide bolt with the lever is in except
neutral position (B).
c. Check continuity between terminals of park/neutral position
(PNP) switch to confirm it in the neutral position. If it is not in the
neutral position, remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch and
repeat the procedure from step a. Refer to TM-78, "PARK/NEU-
TRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH : Component Inspection".
PCIB1890E
d. Install guide bolt to transaxle case and then tighten guide bolt to
the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse guide bolt.
PCIB1836E
30. Apply recommended sealant to threads of park/neutral position

(PNP) switch (1). Then install it to transaxle case and tighten to
CAUTION:
31. Install plunger to transaxle case.
32. Apply recommended sealant to threads of back-up lamp switch
(2). Then install it to transaxle case and tighten to the specified
torque. PCIB1835E

CAUTION:
33. Install air breather tube (3) to transaxle case.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse air breather tube.
• Assemble air breather tube until its collar element contacts with transaxle case.

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
34. Install gasket onto plug and then install them into transaxle
case. Tighten plug to the specified torque. A
CAUTION:
Do not reuse gasket.
B
PCIB1865E
TM
35. Install gasket onto drain plug and then install them into clutch
housing. Tighten drain plug to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
E
Do not reuse gasket.
G
PCIB1834E
36. Install O-ring onto plug and then install it into clutch housing.
H
Tighten bolt to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-ring.
• After oil is filled, tighten bolt to specified torque. I
PCIB1969E
K
Adjustment INFOID:0000000012200823
ADJUSTMENT L
Differential Side Bearing Preload

• When adjusting differential side bearing preload, select adjusting
shim for differential side bearing. To select adjusting shim, mea- M
sure clearance (L) between transaxle case and differential side
bearing outer race. Refer to TM-147, "Available Shims".
CAUTION: N
Up to 2 adjusting shims can be selected.
• Calculate dimension (L) (thickness of adjusting shim) using the fol-
lowing procedure to satisfy specification of preload for differential
side bearing. O
Preload : Refer to TM-147, "Available Shims". JSDIA5280GB
Dimension L = (L1 - L2 ) + Preload P
L : Thickness of adjusting shim

L1 : Distance between transaxle case end face
and mounting face of adjusting shim
L2 : Distance between differential side bearing
outer race and clutch housing end face

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
1. Using a depth micrometer and straightedge, measure dimension
(L1) between transaxle case end face and mounting face of
adjusting shim.
2. Install differential side bearing outer race onto differential side
bearing on final gear side. Holding lightly differential side bear-
ing outer race horizontally by hand, rotate final gear five times or
more (for smooth movement of bearing roller).
SCIA1078E
3. Using a depth micrometer and straightedge as shown, measure

dimension (L2) between differential side bearing outer race and
clutch housing end face.
CAUTION:
L2: Measure at 4 point by approximately 90 degrees and use
the average value.
SCIA1079E
4. Install selected differential side bearing adjusting shim and then

install differential side bearing outer race (transaxle case side)
using Tool.
Tool number : ST30720000 (J25405)

CAUTION:
Replace differential side bearing and differential side bear-
PCIB0942E
Reverse Idler Gear End Play

• When adjusting reverse idler gear end play, select adjusting shim
for reverse idler gear. To select adjusting shim (1), measure clear-
ance between transaxle case (2) and reverse idler gear (rear) (3).
Refer to TM-146, "Available Adjusting Shims".
CAUTION:
Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected.
• Calculate dimension (Q) (thickness of adjusting shim) using the fol-
lowing procedure to satisfy specification of end play for reverse
idler gear.
End play : Refer to TM-146, "Available Adjusting PCIB1925E

Shims".
Dimension Q = (Q1 - Q2 ) - End play
Q : Thickness of adjusting shim
Q1 : Distance between transaxle case end face
Q2 : Distance between clutch housing end face
and end face of reverse idler gear (rear)

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
1. Using a depth micrometer and straightedge, measure dimension
(Q1) between transaxle case end face and mounting face of A
adjusting shim.
SCIA1003E
TM
dimension (Q2) between clutch housing (1) end face and end
face of reverse idler gear (rear) (2).
E
CAUTION:
Q2: Measure at 4 point by approximately 90 degrees and
use the average value.
3. Install selected reverse idler gear adjusting shim onto reverse F
idler gear (rear).
G
PCIB1879E
Input Shaft End Play H

• When adjusting input shaft end play, select adjusting shim for input
shaft rear bearing. To select adjusting shim, measure clearance
between transaxle case and input shaft rear bearing. Refer to TM-
146, "Available Adjusting Shims". I
CAUTION:
• Calculate dimension (O) (thickness of adjusting shim) using the fol- J
lowing procedure to satisfy specification of end play for input shaft
rear bearing.
K
End play : Refer to TM-146, "Available Adjusting SCIA1001E
Shims".
Dimension O = (O1 - O2 ) - End play L
O : Thickness of adjusting shim
O1 : Distance between transaxle case end face
and mounting face of adjusting shim M
O2 : Distance between clutch housing end face
and end face of input shaft rear bearing
1. Using a depth micrometer and straightedge, measure dimension N
(O1) between transaxle case end face and mounting face of
adjusting shim.
CAUTION: O
O1: Measure at 4 point by approximately 90 degrees and
P
SCIA1002E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
dimension (O2) between clutch housing end face and end face
of input shaft rear bearing.
CAUTION:
(O2): Measure at 4 point by approximately 90 degrees and
3. Install selected input shaft rear bearing adjusting shim onto input
shaft.
PCIB0792E
Striking rod End Play

• When adjusting striking rod end play, select adjusting shim (1) for
striking rod (2). To select adjusting shim, measure clearance
between transaxle case (3) and striking rod shim (4). Refer to TM-
146, "Available Adjusting Shims".
CAUTION:
• Calculate dimension (R) (thickness of adjusting shim) using the fol-
lowing procedure to satisfy specification of end play for striking
rod.
End play : Refer to TM-146, "Available Adjusting PCIB1823E

Shims".
Dimension R = (R1 - R2 ) - End play
R : Thickness of adjusting shim
R1 : Distance between transaxle case end face
R2 : Distance between clutch housing end face
and end face of striking rod shim
1. Using a depth micrometer (A) and straightedge (B), measure
dimension (R1) between transaxle case (1) end face and mount-
ing face of adjusting shim.
CAUTION:
R1: Measure at 4 point by approximately 90 degrees and
PCIB1824E
2. Using a depth micrometer (A) and straightedge (B) as shown,

measure dimension (R2) between clutch housing (1) end face
and end face of striking rod shim (2).
CAUTION:
• R2: Measure at 4 point by approximately 90 degrees and
• When measuring, be careful for the inclination of striking
rod assembly and striking rod shim.
3. Install selected striking rod adjusting shim onto striking rod
assembly.
PCIB1825E
Mainshaft End Play

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
• When adjusting mainshaft end play, select adjusting shim (1) for
mainshaft rear bearing (2). To select adjusting shim, measure A
clearance (M) between transaxle case (3) and dummy adjusting
shim (4) on mainshaft rear bearing. Refer to TM-146, "Available
Adjusting Shims".
B
5 : Snap ring
6 : Mainshaft
C
CAUTION:
• Calculate dimension (P) (thickness of adjusting shim) using the fol- PCIB1880E
lowing procedure to satisfy specification of end play for mainshaft TM

rear bearing.
End play : Refer to TM-146, "Available Adjusting E

Shims".
Dimension P = (M + N) - End play
P : Thickness of adjusting shim F
M : Distance between dummy adjusting shim on
mainshaft rear bearing end face and transaxle
case end face G
N* : Thickness of dummy adjusting shim
*: Refer to the latest parts information to use a dummy adjusting shim of which part number is the thinnest in thickness. Refer to TM-
H
146, "Available Adjusting Shims".
1. Install transaxle case following the procedures below.
a. Temporarily install snap ring of mainshaft rear bearing into tran- I
saxle case.
CAUTION:
J
PCIB1842E L
b. Install dummy adjusting shim (1) to mainshaft assembly.

M
PCIB1826E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
c. With shifter lever A (1) held in the position shown, temporarily
assemble transaxle case to clutch housing.
CAUTION:
Do not damage striking rod oil seal.
NOTE:
Make sure to hold shifter lever A in the position shown. Other-
wise transaxle case cannot be installed to clutch housing.
PCIB1808E
d. While rotating shifter lever A (1) in the direction of the arrow

shown, assemble transaxle case to clutch housing.
2 : shifter lever B
PCIB1929E
e. Accessing from the bore plug hole, expand snap ring at main-
shaft rear bearing so that the ring catches the periphery of main-
shaft rear bearing.
f. Temporarily tighten transaxle case bolts.
PCIB1840E
2. Shift the shifter lever A to 2nd gear position.

NOTE:
• The 2nd gear position is attained when shifter lever A (1) is in
the position shown.
PCIB1809E
• When transaxle is shifted to the 2nd gear position, mainshaft

assembly (1) is lifted.
PCIB1923E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
3. Seat snap ring in the groove on mainshaft rear bearing. If snap ring is not seated in the groove on main-
shaft rear bearing, remove transaxle case and repeat the procedure 1 from step c. A
4. Shift the shifter lever A to 1st gear position, and then shift it to 2nd gear position. Repeat 3 times.
NOTE:
• The mainshaft rear bearing position will be stabilized by shifting between 1st gear position and 2nd gear B
position alternately.
• The 1st gear position is attained when shifter lever A (1) is in
the position shown.
C
TM
PCIB1881E
F
• When transaxle is shifted to the 1st gear position, mainshaft
assembly (1) is declined.
G
I
PCIB1934E
5. Set the dial indicator (A) to dummy adjusting shim (1) through J
the bore plug hole.
2 : Mainshaft rear bearing

K
3 : Snap ring
PCIB1827E
M

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
6. Shift the shifter lever A (1) to 2nd gear position (A), and then
rotate it in the direction of the arrow (C) shown until it stops.
Using this position as the reference point, measure the amount
of movement when shifting shifter lever A to 1st gear position (B)
and rotating it in the direction of the arrow (D) shown until it
stops. This measurement is the (M) dimension.
7. When measurement (M) is 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in), adjust-
ment terminates, and the dummy adjusting shim becomes regu-
lar adjusting shim. Select adjusting shim from the computed
expressions when measurement (M) is over 0.06 mm (0.0024
in).
PCIB1935E

INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS
A
TM
J
PCIB1888E
1. Input shaft front bearing 2. Input shaft 3. 3rd needle bearing K

4. 3rd input gear 5. 3rd inner baulk ring 6. 3rd synchronizer cone
7. 3rd outer baulk ring 8. 3rd-4th spread spring 9. 3rd-4th shifting insert
10. 3rd-4th synchronizer hub 11. 4th baulk ring 12. 3rd-4th coupling sleeve L
13. 4th input gear bushing 14. 4th needle bearing 15. 4th input gear
16. Thrust washer 17. 5th input gear bushing 18. 5th needle bearing
19. 5th input gear 20. 5th baulk ring 21. 5th-6th spread spring M
22. 5th-6th shifting insert 23. 5th-6th synchronizer hub 24. 5th-6th coupling sleeve
25. 6th baulk ring 26. 6th input gear 27. 6th needle bearing
28. 6th input gear bushing 29. Snap ring 30. Input shaft rear bearing N
31. Oil channel 32. Input shaft rear bearing adjusting 33. Retaining pin
shim
34. Reverse idler shaft 35. Thrust needle bearing 36. Reverse idler gear needle bear- O
ing
37. Reverse insert spring 38. Reverse idler gear (front) 39. Reverse baulk ring
40. Reverse coupling sleeve 41. Reverse idler gear (rear) 42. Reverse idler gear adjusting shim P
: Apply gear oil.

Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000012200825
DISASSEMBLY
1. Before disassembling, measure end play for 3rd, 4th, 5th, and
6th input gears.
End play standard value

: Refer to TM-144, "Gear End Play".
2. Remove oil channel.
SCIA0966E
3. Press out input shaft rear bearing using Tool and a puller.

4. Remove snap ring.
SCIA1037E
5. Press out 6th input gear, 6th needle bearing, 6th input gear
bushing, 5th-6th synchronizer hub assembly, and 5th input gear
using Tool (A) and a puller (B).
Tool number A: ST33052000 ( — )

6. Remove 5th needle bearing.
PCIB1882E
7. Press out 5th input gear bushing, thrust washer, 4th input gear,
4th needle bearing, 4th input gear bushing, 3rd-4th synchronizer
hub assembly, and 3rd input gear using Tool and a puller.

8. Remove 3rd needle bearing.
SCIA1030E

9. Press out input shaft front bearing using a puller.
A
SCIA0920E
TM
Input Shaft and Gears
Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones. E
• Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear, bending, etc. of shaft
• Excessive wear, damage, peeling, etc. of gears
F
SCIA1074J H
Synchronizer
Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones.
• Damage and excessive wear of contact surfaces of coupling I
sleeve, synchronizer hub and shifting insert
• Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub must move smoothly.
J
SMT387A
L
• If any crack, damage, or excessive wear is found on cam face of
baulk ring or working face of insert, replace it.
M
O
SMT867D
BAULK RING CLEARANCE P

• Single-cone synchronizer (4th, 5th, and 6th)

Push baulk ring on the cone and measure the clearance between
baulk ring and cone. If measurement is below limit, replace it with a
new one.
Clearance
Standard value : Refer to TM-144, "Baulk Ring Clear-
ance".
Limit value : Refer to TM-144, "Baulk Ring Clear-
ance".
SMT140
• Double-cone synchronizer (3rd)

Check the clearance between outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone,
and inner baulk ring as follows.
CAUTION:
The clearances (A) and (B) are controlled with outer baulk
ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring as a set.
Replace them as a set if the clearances are outside the limit
value.
SCIA0950E
1. Measure the clearance (A) at 2 points or more diagonally oppo-

site using a dial indicator. And then calculate mean value.
Tool number : ST30031000 (J-22912-01)
Clearance (A)
Standard value : Refer to TM-144, "Baulk Ring Clear-
ance".
Limit value : Refer to TM-144, "Baulk Ring Clear-
ance". PCIB0945E
2. Measure the clearance (B) at 2 points or more diagonally oppo-

site using a feeler gauge. And then calculate mean value.
Clearance (B)
Standard value : Refer to TM-144, "Baulk Ring
Clearance".
Limit value : Refer to TM-144, "Baulk Ring
Clearance".
SCIA1084E
Bearing

• Damage and rough rotation of bearing A
MTF0041D
TM
ASSEMBLY
1. Install 3rd needle bearing to input shaft.
2. Install 3rd input gear, 3rd inner baulk ring, 3rd synchronizer cone, and 3rd outer baulk ring to input shaft. E
CAUTION:
Replace 3rd inner baulk ring, 3rd synchronizer cone, and 3rd outer baulk ring as a set.
3. Install 3rd-4th spread springs, 3rd-4th shifting inserts, and 3rd-4th synchronizer hub onto 3rd-4th coupling
F
sleeve.
CAUTION:
• Be careful with orientation of 3rd-4th synchronizer hub.
• Do not reuse 3rd-4th synchronizer hub and 3rd-4th cou- G
pling sleeve.
• Replace 3rd-4th synchronizer hub and 3rd-4th coupling
sleeve as a set. H
SCIA0921E
J
• Be careful with orientation of 3rd-4th coupling sleeve.
M
PCIB0799E
N
• Be sure not to hook center projection of 2 spread springs
on same shifting insert.
SCIA1083E

4. Press in 3rd-4th synchronizer hub assembly using Tool.

CAUTION:
Align grooves of 3rd-4th shifting insert and 3rd outer baulk
ring.
SCIA1031E
5. Press in 4th input gear bushing using Tool.

6. Install 4th baulk ring.
7. Install 4th needle bearing and 4th input gear to input shaft.
PCIB0922E
8. Select thrust washer so that dimension "C2" satisfies the stan-

dard value below. Then install thrust washer onto input shaft.
Refer to TM-145, "Available Thrust Washer".
Standard value for dimension "C2”

: Refer to TM-145, "Available Thrust Washer".
CAUTION:
Only one thrust washer can be selected.
SCIA0925E
9. Press in 5th input gear bushing using Tool.

CAUTION:
Do not reuse 5th input gear bushing.
10. Install 5th needle bearing and 5th input gear to input shaft.
11. Install 5th baulk ring.
SCIA1033E

12. Install 5th-6th synchronizer hub, 5th-6th spread springs, and 5th-6th shifting inserts onto 5th-6th coupling
sleeve. A
CAUTION:
• Be careful with orientation of 5th-6th synchronizer hub.
B
A : Front side
B : Rear side
• Do not reuse 5th-6th synchronizer hub and 5th-6th cou- C
pling sleeve.
• Replace 5th-6th synchronizer hub and 5th-6th coupling
sleeve as a set.
TM
PCIB1883E
E
• Be careful with orientation of 5th-6th coupling sleeve.
A : 5th input gear side

F
H
PCIB1884E
• Be sure not to hook center projection of 2 spread springs I

on same shifting insert.
SCIA1083E L
13. Press in 5th-6th synchronizer hub assembly using Tool.
Tool number : KV40105710 ( — ) M
CAUTION:
Align grooves of 5th-6th shifting insert and 5th baulk ring.
N
SCIA1039E

14. Install 6th needle bearing, 6th input gear, 6th baulk ring onto 6th
input gear bushing and then press in 6th input gear bushing onto
input shaft using Tool.
Tool number : ST33200000 (J-26082)
WCIA0309E
15. Install snap ring onto input shaft and make sure that end play
(gap between snap ring and groove) of 6th input gear bushing
satisfies the standard value.

:Refer to TM-144, "Available Snap Rings".
• If measurement is outside the standard range, select snap
ring. Refer to TM-144, "Available Snap Rings".
CAUTION:
SCIA0970E
16. Press in input shaft rear bearing using Tool.
Tool number : ST30901000 (J-26010-01)

CAUTION:
Install input shaft rear bearing with its brown surface facing
the 6th input gear side.
WCIA0310E
17. Press in input shaft front bearing using Tools.
Tool number A: ST33052000 ( — )

B: ST30032000 (J-26010-01)
18. Install oil channel onto input shaft.
WCIA0311E
19. Check end play of 3rd, 4th, 5th, and 6th input gears.

SCIA0966E

MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
A
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS B
TM
PCIB1889E
K
1. Mainshaft front bearing 2. Mainshaft bearing retainer 3. Mainshaft
4. Reverse main gear 5. 1st main gear 6. 1st main gear bushing
L
7. 1st needle bearing 8. 1st inner baulk ring 9. 1st synchronizer cone
10. 1st outer baulk ring 11. 1st-2nd spread spring 12. 1st-2nd shifting insert
M
16. 2nd inner baulk ring 17. 1st-2nd coupling sleeve 18. 2nd main gear bushing
19. 2nd needle bearing 20. 2nd main gear 21. 3rd main gear
22. 3rd-4th mainshaft spacer 23. 4th main gear adjusting shim 24. 4th main gear
N
25. 5th main gear 26. 5th-6th mainshaft spacer 27. 6th main gear
28. 6th main gear adjusting shim 29. Mainshaft rear bearing 30. Mainshaft C-ring
31. C-ring holder 32. Snap ring 33. Mainshaft rear bearing adjust-
ing shim
O
: Apply gear oil.

: Replace the parts as a set. P
DISASSEMBLY
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
1. Before disassembling, measure the end play of 1st and 2nd
main gears.

SCIA0973E
2. Remove snap ring.

3. Remove C-ring holder and then remove mainshaft C-rings.
PCIB0805E
4. Press out mainshaft rear bearing, 6th main gear adjusting shim,
and 6th main gear using Tool and a puller.

5. Remove 5th-6th mainshaft spacer.
SCIA1056E
6. Press out 4th main gear and 5th main gear using Tool and a
puller.

7. Remove 4th main gear adjusting shim.
8. Remove 3rd-4th mainshaft spacer.
SCIA1044E
9. Press out 3rd main gear and 2nd main gear using Tool (A) and a
puller (B).
Tool number A: KV40105020 ( — )

10. Remove 2nd needle bearing.
PCIB1885E

MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
11. Press out 2nd main gear bushing, 1st-2nd synchronizer hub
assembly, 1st main gear, 1st needle bearing, 1st main gear A
bushing, and reverse main gear using Tool (A).
Tool number A: KV40105020 ( — ) B
PCIB1886E
TM
Mainshaft and Gears
Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones. E
• Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear, bending, and other non-
standard conditions of the shaft.
• Excessive wear, damage, peeling, and other non-standard condi-
tions of the gears. F
SCIA1076J H
Synchronizer
• Damage and unusual wear on contact surfaces of coupling sleeve, I
synchronizer hub and shifting insert.
• Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub must move smoothly.
J
SMT387A
L
M
O
SMT867D
P
BAULK RING CLEARANCE
Triple-cone synchronizer (1st and 2nd)

MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
• Check the clearance between outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone,
and inner baulk ring as follows.
CAUTION:
The clearances (A), B, and (C) are controlled with outer baulk
ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring as a set.
Replace them as a set if the clearances are outside the limit
value.
PCIB1358E
1. Measure the clearance (A) at 2 points or more diagonally oppo-

site using a feeler gauge when pressing baulk ring toward clutch
gear taper cone. And then calculate mean value.
Clearance (A)
Clearance".
Clearance".
PCIB1359E
2. Measure the clearance (B) at 2 points or more diagonally oppo-

site using a feeler gauge. And then calculate mean value.
Clearance (B)
Clearance".
Clearance".
PCIB1360E
3. Measure the clearance (C) at 2 points or more diagonally oppo-

site using a feeler gauge when pressing baulk ring toward clutch
gear taper cone. And then calculate mean value.
Clearance (C)
Clearance".
Clearance".
PCIB1361E
Bearing

MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
• Damage and rough rotation of bearing A
MTF0041D
TM
ASSEMBLY
1. Press in reverse main gear using Tools.
E
Tool number : KV40101630 (J-35870)
: ST35321000 ( — )
: ST38220000 ( — ) F
PCIB0946E
H
CAUTION:
• Be careful with orientation of reverse main gear.
• Do not reuse reverse main gear.
I
SCIA0992E
2. Press in 1st main gear bushing using Tools. L

M
: ST35321000 ( — )
: ST38220000 ( — )
3. Install 1st needle bearing and then 1st main gear. N
SCIA1049E
O
4. Install 1st-2nd spread springs, 1st-2nd shifting inserts, and 1st-2nd synchronizer hub onto 1st-2nd cou-
pling sleeve. P
CAUTION:

MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
• Be careful with orientation of 1st-2nd synchronizer hub.
• Do not reuse 1st-2nd synchronizer hub and 1st-2nd cou-
pling sleeve.
• Replace 1st-2nd synchronizer hub and 1st-2nd coupling
sleeve as a set.
SCIA0921E
• Be careful with orientation of 1st-2nd coupling sleeve.
PCIB0803E
• Be sure not to hook center projection of 2 spread springs

on same 1st-2nd shifting insert.
SCIA1083E
5. Install 1st inner baulk ring, 1st synchronizer cone, and 1st outer
baulk ring onto mainshaft and then press in 1st-2nd synchro-
nizer hub assembly onto mainshaft using Tools.
Tool number : KV40101630 (J-35870)

: ST35321000 ( — )
: ST38220000 ( — )
CAUTION:
• Outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring
on 2nd gear-side must have been removed. SCIA1050E
• Be careful with orientation of coupling sleeve.
• Replace 1st inner baulk ring, 1st synchronizer cone, and 1st outer baulk ring as a set.

MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
6. Press in 2nd main gear bushing using Tools.
A
: ST35321000 ( — )
B
7. Install 2nd outer baulk ring, 2nd synchronizer cone, and 2nd
inner baulk ring.
CAUTION:
Replace 2nd outer baulk ring, 2nd synchronizer cone, and C
2nd inner baulk ring as a set.
8. Install 2nd needle bearing and 2nd main gear. SCIA1051E
TM
9. Press in 3rd main gear using Tools.
Tool number : KV40105710 ( — ) E

: ST35321000 ( — )
CAUTION:
• Be careful with orientation of 3rd main gear. F
• Do not reuse 3rd main gear.
10. Install 3rd-4th mainshaft spacer.
G
SCIA1052E
11. Select 4th main gear adjusting shim so that dimension “C1” sat- H
isfies the standard value below and install 4th main gear adjust-
ing shim onto mainshaft. Refer to TM-146, "Available Adjusting
Shims".
I
Standard value for dimension “C1”
: Refer to TM-146, "Available Adjusting Shims".
J
CAUTION:
Only one adjusting shim can be selected.
K
N
PCIB0804E
12. Press in 4th main gear using Tools. O
Tool number : ST33200000 (J-26082)

: ST30901000 (J-26010-01) P
CAUTION:
• Be careful with orientation of 4th main gear.
• Do not reuse 4th main gear.
PCIB0947E

MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
13. Press in 5th main gear using Tools.
Tool number : ST33200000 (J-26082)

: ST30901000 (J-26010-01)
CAUTION:
• Be careful with orientation of 5th main gear.
• Do not reuse 5th main gear.
14. Install 5th-6th mainshaft spacer.
PCIB0948E
15. Press in 6th main gear using Tools (A), (B).
Tool number A: ST33200000 (J-26082)

B: ST30901000 (J-26010-01)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse 6th main gear.
WCIA0313E
16. Select 6th main gear adjusting shim and then install it onto mainshaft.
• Calculate thickness (S) of 6th main gear adjusting shim follow-
ing the procedure below so that end play dimension between
6th main gear and mainshaft rear bearing becomes the dimen-
sion shown below. Refer to TM-146, "Available Adjusting
Shims".
End play :Refer to TM-146, "Available Adjusting

Shims".
Dimension S = (S1 - S2 ) - End play
S : Thickness of adjusting shim
S1 : Dimension from mainshaft standard face to
mainshaft rear bearing press-fit end face
S2 : Dimension from mainshaft standard face to
6th main gear end face
CAUTION:
Only one adjusting shim can be selected.
a. Measure dimension (S1) and (S2) using a height gauge (A) and
pick tester (B).
b. Install selected 6th main gear adjusting shim to mainshaft.
PCIB1887E
17. Press in mainshaft rear bearing using Tools.

B: ST30901000 (J-26010-01)
WCIA0314E

MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
18. Install mainshaft C-rings onto mainshaft and check that end play A
of mainshaft rear bearing satisfies the standard value.

B
: Refer to TM-145, "Available C-Rings".
• If measurement is outside the standard range, reselect main-
shaft C-rings. Refer to TM-145, "Available C-Rings". C
SCIA0979E
TM
19. Install C-ring holder and then install snap ring.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse snap ring. E
G
PCIB0805E
20. Check end play of 1st and 2nd main gears. H

I
SCIA0973E
K

REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEARS
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove reverse idler gear (rear), reverse coupling sleeve, and reverse insert springs simultaneously.
2. Remove reverse idler gear needle bearing.
3. Remove thrust needle bearing.
4. Remove reverse baulk ring.
5. Remove reverse idler gear (front).
6. Remove reverse idler gear needle bearing.
7. Remove thrust needle bearing.
8. Remove retaining pin from reverse idler shaft.
Reverse Idler Shaft and Gears
• Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear, bending, and other non-
standard conditions of the shaft.
• Excessive wear, damage, peeling, and other non-standard condi-
tions of the gears.
SCIA0953J
Synchronizer
• Damage and unusual wear on contact surfaces of coupling sleeve,
synchronizer hub of reverse idler gear (rear), and insert spring.
• Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub of reverse idler gear (rear)
must move smoothly.
SMT637A

SMT867D
BAULK RING CLEARANCE

• Push baulk ring on the cone and measure the clearance between
baulk ring and cone. If the measurement is below limit, replace it A
with a new one.
Clearance B
Clearance".
Limit value : Refer to TM-144, "Baulk Ring C
Clearance".
SMT140
TM
Bearing
• Damage and rough rotation of bearing.
E
ASSEMBLY
Note the following, and assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
CAUTION: F
• Be careful with orientation of reverse insert spring.
G
: Front
PCIB1924E

FINAL DRIVE
FINAL DRIVE
FINAL DRIVE
FINAL DRIVE
JSDIA5268GB
1. Differential side bearing outer 2. Differential side bearing (clutch 3. Differential case assembly
race (clutch housing side) housing side)
4. Final gear 5. Differential side bearing (tran- 6. Differential side bearing outer
saxle case side) race (transaxle case side)
7. Differential side bearing adjust-
ing shim
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove final gear bolts and then separate the final gear from differential case.
2. Remove differential side bearing (clutch housing side) using
Tool and pullers (B).
Tool number A: ST33061000 (J-8107-2)

CAUTION:
Hook a puller on the cage of differential side bearing.
PCIB1876E

FINAL DRIVE
3. Remove differential side bearing (transaxle case side) using A

Tool and puller.
Tool number A: ST33061000 (J-8107-2)

B
CAUTION:
Hook a puller on the inner race of differential side bearing.
C
PCIB0951E
TM
Bearing
E
• Check for bearings damage and rough rotation. If necessary,
replace with a new one.
CAUTION:
When replacing tapered roller bearing, replace outer and inner F
races as a set.
H
SPD715
ASSEMBLY
1. Press in differential side bearing (transaxle case side) to differ- I
ential case using Tools.
Tool number : KV38102510 ( — ) J

: ST30720000 (J-25405)
CAUTION:
Replace differential side bearing and differential side bear- K
PCIB0952E
L
2. Press in differential side bearing (clutch housing side) to differ-

ential case using Tools. M

B: KV38102510 ( — ) N
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse differential side bearing and differential side
bearing outer race. O
• Replace differential side bearing and differential side
bearing outer race as a set.
JSDIA5267GB

FINAL DRIVE
3. Install final gear into differential case and tighten final gear bolts
to the specified torque. Refer to TM-136, "Exploded View".
SCIA0912E

SHIFT CONTROL
SHIFT CONTROL
A
SHIFT CONTROL B
TM
JSDIA5279GB
M
1. Clutch housing 2. Retaining pin 3. Reverse shift fork
4. Reverse fork rod 5. Return spring 6. Striking rod assembly
7. Striking rod shim 8. Striking rod adjusting shim 9. Shifter lever A N
10. Shifter lever B 11. Guide bolt 12. Selector lever
13. Transaxle case 14. 3rd-4th shift fork 15. 3rd-4th fork rod
16. 1st-2nd shift fork 17. 1st-2nd fork rod 18. 5th-6th shift fork O
19. 5th-6th fork rod
P
DISASSEMBLY

SHIFT CONTROL
1. Remove return spring to striking rod assembly.
PCIB1867E

Striking Rod Assembly and Return Spring
• Check contact surfaces and sliding area for wear, damage, bend-
ing, etc. If necessary, replace parts.
PCIB1868E
Fork Rod and Shift Fork

SHIFT CONTROL
• Check contact surfaces and sliding area for wear, damage, bend-
ing, etc. If necessary, replace parts. A
TM
G
PCIB1869E
• Check if the width of shift fork hook (sliding area with coupling H
sleeve) is within allowable specification below.
Item One-side wear specification Sliding width of new part

I
7.80 - 7.93 mm
1st-2nd 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
(0.3071 - 0.3122 in)
7.80 - 7.93 mm J
3rd-4th 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
(0.3071 - 0.3122 in)
6.10 - 6.23 mm
5th-6th 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
(0.2402 - 0.2453 in) SMT801D
K
12.80 - 12.93 mm
Reverse 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
(0.5039 - 0.5091 in)
ASSEMBLY L
1. Temporarily install return spring to striking rod assembly.
CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation of return spring. M
O
PCIB1830E

SHIFT CONTROL
2. Attach one end of the return spring to striking interlock of striking
rod assembly while holding return spring.
PCIB1831E
CAUTION:
• When installing, check that return spring is securely
seated in the groove of striking interlock of striking rod
assembly.
PCIB1833E

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [6MT: RS6F52H]

General Specification INFOID:0000000012200833
B
TRANSAXLE
C
Engine type MR16DDT
Transaxle model RS6F52H
Model code number 3YW0D TM
Number of speed 6
Synchromesh type Warner
E
Shift pattern
G
PCIB1769E
Gear ratio 1st 3.727

2nd 2.043 H
3rd 1.392
4th 1.055
5th 0.865
I
6th 0.732
Reverse 3.641 J
Number of teeth Input gear 1st 11
2nd 23
3rd 28 K
4th 36
5th 52
L
6th 56
Reverse 11
Main gear 1st 41 M
2nd 47
3rd 39
N
4th 38
5th 45
6th 41 O
Reverse 38
Reverse idler gear Front 37
P
Rear 39
Oil level mm (in) 38.5 - 45.5 (1.516 - 1.791)
Oil capacity (Reference) (US pt, Imp pt) 1.9 (4, 3-3/8)
Remarks Reverse synchronizer Installed
Double-cone synchronizer 3rd
Triple-cone synchronizer 1st and 2nd

FINAL GEAR
Engine type MR16DDT

Transaxle model RS6F52H
Model code number 3YW0D
Final gear ratio 4.428
Number of teeth Final gear/Pinion 62/14
Side gear/Pinion mate gear —
Gear End Play INFOID:0000000012200834
Unit: mm (in)
Gear Standard value

1st main gear 0.20 - 0.30 (0.0079 - 0.0118)
2nd main gear 0.06 - 0.16 (0.0024 - 0.0063)
3rd input gear 0.18 - 0.31 (0.0071 - 0.0122)
4th input gear 0.20 - 0.30 (0.0079 - 0.0118)
5th input gear 0.06 - 0.16 (0.0024 - 0.0063)
6th input gear 0.06 - 0.16 (0.0024 - 0.0063)
Baulk Ring Clearance INFOID:0000000012200835
Unit: mm (in)
Measurement point Standard value Limit value

3rd Clearance between synchronizer cone and 0.6 - 0.8 (0.024 - 0.031) 0.2 (0.008)
(Double-cone synchronizer) inner baulk ring end face (A)
Clearance between outer baulk ring pawl 0.6 - 1.1 (0.024 -0.043) 0.2 (0.008)
and synchronizer cone (B)
PCIB0249E
1st and 2nd Clearance between synchronizer cone and 0.6 - 1.2 (0.024 - 0.047) 0.3 (0.012)
(Triple-cone synchronizer) clutch gear end face (A)
Clearance between outer baulk ring pawl 0.6 - 1.1 (0.024 - 0.043) 0.2 (0.008)
and synchronizer cone (B)
Clearance between inner baulk ring and 0.7 - 1.1 (0.028 - 0.043) 0.3 (0.012)
clutch gear end face (C)
PCIB0835J
4th 0.9 - 1.45 (0.035 - 0.057) 0.7 (0.028)

5th 0.95 - 1.4 (0.037 - 0.055) 0.7 (0.028)
6th 0.95 - 1.4 (0.037 - 0.055) 0.7 (0.028)
Reverse 0.95 - 1.4 (0.037 - 0.055) 0.7 (0.028)
Available Snap Rings INFOID:0000000012200836
6TH INPUT GEAR BUSHING

End play standard value 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in) A

Thickness mm (in) Part number* Thickness mm (in) Part number*
1.76 (0.0693) 32204 8H511 2.01 (0.0791) 32204 8H516
1.81 (0.0713) 32204 8H512 2.06 (0.0811) 32204 8H517 B
1.86 (0.0732) 32204 8H513 2.11 (0.0831) 32204 8H518
1.91 (0.0752) 32204 8H514 2.16 (0.0850) 32204 8H519
1.96 (0.0772) 32204 8H515 2.21 (0.0870) 32204 8H520
C
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Available C-Rings INFOID:0000000012200837
TM
MAINSHAFT C-RING
End play standard value 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) E

2.535 (0.0998) 32348 8H800 2.835 (0.1116) 32348 8H810
2.565 (0.1010) 32348 8H801 2.865 (0.1128) 32348 8H811 F
2.595 (0.1022) 32348 8H802 2.895 (0.1140) 32348 8H812
2.625 (0.1033) 32348 8H803 2.925 (0.1152) 32348 8H813
2.655 (0.1045) 32348 8H804 2.955 (0.1163) 32348 8H814
2.685 (0.1057) 32348 8H805 2.985 (0.1175) 32348 8H815 G
2.715 (0.1069) 32348 8H806 3.015 (0.1187) 32348 8H816
2.745 (0.1081) 32348 8H807 3.045 (0.1199) 32348 8H817
2.775 (0.1093) 32348 8H808 3.075 (0.1211) 32348 8H818 H
2.805 (0.1104) 32348 8H809
Available Thrust Washer INFOID:0000000012200838

I
INPUT SHAFT THRUST WASHER

J
SCIA1008E
Standard value for dimension “C2” 154.7 - 154.8 mm (6.091 - 6.094 in) N
3.84 (0.1512) 32347 8H500 4.02 (0.1583) 32347 8H503
3.90 (0.1535) 32347 8H501 4.08 (0.1606) 32347 8H504 O
3.96 (0.1559) 32347 8H502 4.14 (0.1630) 32347 8H505
P
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR THRUST WASHER
Allowable Clearance between side gear and differential case with

0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in)
thrust washer

Thickness mm (in) Part number*
0.75 (0.0295) 38424 81X00
0.80 (0.0315) 38424 81X01
0.85 (0.0335) 38424 81X02
0.90 (0.0354) 38424 81X03
0.95 (0.0374) 38424 81X04
Available Adjusting Shims INFOID:0000000012200839
4TH MAIN GEAR ADJUSTING SHIM
SCIA1009E
Standard value for dimension “C1” 173.85 - 173.95 mm (6.844 - 6.848 in)
0.52 (0.0205) 32238 8H500 0.84 (0.0331) 32238 8H504
0.60 (0.0236) 32238 8H501 0.92 (0.0362) 32238 8H505
0.68 (0.0268) 32238 8H502 1.00 (0.0394) 32238 8H506
0.76 (0.0299) 32238 8H503 1.08 (0.0425) 32238 8H507
INPUT SHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM
End play standard value 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in)

Thickness mm (in) Part number* Thickness mm (in) Part number* Thickness mm (in) Part number*
0.40 (0.0157) 32225 8H500 0.88 (0.0346) 32225 8H512 1.36 (0.0535) 32225 8H524
0.44 (0.0173) 32225 8H501 0.92 (0.0362) 32225 8H513 1.40 (0.0551) 32225 8H560
0.48 (0.0189) 32225 8H502 0.96 (0.0378) 32225 8H514 1.44 (0.0567) 32225 8H561
0.52 (0.0205) 32225 8H503 1.00 (0.0394) 32225 8H515 1.48 (0.0583) 32225 8H562
0.56 (0.0220) 32225 8H504 1.04 (0.0409) 32225 8H516 1.52 (0.0598) 32225 8H563
0.60 (0.0236) 32225 8H505 1.08 (0.0425) 32225 8H517 1.56 (0.0614) 32225 8H564
0.64 (0.0252) 32225 8H506 1.12 (0.0441) 32225 8H518 1.60 (0.0630) 32225 8H565
0.68 (0.0268) 32225 8H507 1.16 (0.0457) 32225 8H519 1.64 (0.0646) 32225 8H566
0.72 (0.0283) 32225 8H508 1.20 (0.0472) 32225 8H520
0.76 (0.0299) 32225 8H509 1.24 (0.0488) 32225 8H521
0.80 (0.0315) 32225 8H510 1.28 (0.0504) 32225 8H522
0.84 (0.0331) 32225 8H511 1.32 (0.0520) 32225 8H523
MAINSHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM

End play standard value 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) A

0.44 (0.0173) 32238 8H510 0.80 (0.0315) 32238 8H519
0.48 (0.0189) 32238 8H511 0.84 (0.0331) 32238 8H520 B
0.52 (0.0205) 32238 8H512 0.88 (0.0346) 32238 8H521
0.56 (0.0220) 32238 8H513 0.92 (0.0362) 32238 8H522
0.60 (0.0236) 32238 8H514 0.96 (0.0378) 32238 8H523
0.64 (0.0252) 32238 8H515 1.00 (0.0394) 32238 8H524 C
0.68 (0.0268) 32238 8H516 1.04 (0.0409) 32238 8H560
0.72 (0.0283) 32238 8H517 1.08 (0.0425) 32238 8H561
0.76 (0.0299) 32238 8H518
TM
REVERSE IDLER GEAR ADJUSTING SHIM

E
End play standard value 0.04 - 0.10 mm (0.0016 - 0.0039 in)
F
1.76 (0.0693) 32237 8H800 2.24 (0.0882) 32237 8H812
1.80 (0.0709) 32237 8H801 2.28 (0.0898) 32237 8H813
1.84 (0.0724) 32237 8H802 2.32 (0.0913) 32237 8H814
1.88 (0.0740) 32237 8H803 2.36 (0.0929) 32237 8H815 G
1.92 (0.0756) 32237 8H804 2.40 (0.0945) 32237 8H816
1.96 (0.0772) 32237 8H805 2.44 (0.0961) 32237 8H817
2.00 (0.0787) 32237 8H806 2.48 (0.0976) 32237 8H818
2.04 (0.0803) 32237 8H807 2.52 (0.0992) 32237 8H819 H
2.08 (0.0819) 32237 8H808 2.56 (0.1008) 32237 8H820
2.12 (0.0835) 32237 8H809 2.60 (0.1024) 32237 8H821
2.16 (0.0850) 32237 8H810 2.64 (0.1039) 32237 8H822
2.20 (0.0866) 32237 8H811 I
6TH MAIN GEAR ADJUSTING SHIM J
End play standard value 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in)

Thickness mm (in) Part number* Thickness mm (in) Part number* K
0.88 (0.0346) 32237 8H560 1.20 (0.0472) 32237 8H564
0.96 (0.0378) 32237 8H561 1.28 (0.0504) 32237 8H565
1.04 (0.0409) 32237 8H562 1.36 (0.0535) 32237 8H566 L
1.12 (0.0441) 32237 8H563
STRIKING ROD ADJUSTING SHIM M
End play standard value 0.05 - 0.152 mm (0.0020 - 0.0060 in)

Thickness mm (in) Part number* Thickness mm (in) Part number* N
1.12 (0.0441) 33761 JA60A 1.52 (0.0598) 33761 JA65A
1.20 (0.0472) 33761 JA61A 1.60 (0.0630) 33761 JA66A
1.28 (0.0504) 33761 JA62A 1.68 (0.0661) 33761 JA67A O
1.36 (0.0535) 33761 JA63A 1.76 (0.0693) 33761 JA68A
1.44 (0.0567) 33761 JA64A 1.84 (0.0724) 33761 JA69A
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. P
Available Shims INFOID:0000000012200840
— Differential Side Bearing Preload and Adjusting Shim

BEARING PRELOAD
Differential side bearing preload: L* 0.15 - 0.21 mm (0.0059 - 0.0083 in)

*: Install shims which are “deflection of differential case” + “L” in thickness.
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM(S)

0.48 (0.0189) 31438 80X00 0.72 (0.0283) 31438 80X06
0.52 (0.0205) 31438 80X01 0.76 (0.0299) 31438 80X07
0.56 (0.0220) 31438 80X02 0.80 (0.0315) 31438 80X08
0.60 (0.0236) 31438 80X03 0.84 (0.0331) 31438 80X09
0.64 (0.0252) 31438 80X04 0.88 (0.0346) 31438 80X10
0.68 (0.0268) 31438 80X05 0.92 (0.0362) 31438 80X11

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [CVT: RE0F10B]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Service Manual.
WARNING: E
F
connectors. H
WARNING:
serious injury.
K
L
windshield.
PIIB3706J
O
When disconnecting the battery terminal, pay attention to the following. P


PRECAUTIONS

SEF289H
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
Precaution for On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of CVT and Engine INFOID:0000000012200844
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
• Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal
before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid
valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
• Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
• Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MI to light up due to a short circuit.
• Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system, etc.
• Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution for TCM and Transaxle Assembly Replacement INFOID:0000000012200845
CAUTION:
• To replace TCM, refer to TM-219, "Description".
• To replace transaxle assembly, refer to TM-221, "Description".
Removal and Installation Procedure for CVT Unit Connector INFOID:0000000012200846
REMOVAL

PRECAUTIONS
Rotate bayonet ring (1) counterclockwise, pull out CVT unit harness
connector (2) upward and remove it. A
SCIA6685J
TM
INSTALLATION
1. Align ∆ marking on CVT unit harness connector terminal body
with marking on bayonet ring, insert CVT unit harness con-
E
nector, and then rotate bayonet ring clockwise.
SCIA2097E
H
2. Rotate bayonet ring clockwise until ∆ marking on CVT unit har-
ness connector terminal body is aligned with the slit on bayonet
ring as shown in the figure (correctly fitting condition), install
CVT unit harness connector to CVT unit harness connector ter- I
minal body.
K
SCIA2098E
CAUTION: L
• Securely align ∆ marking on CVT unit harness connector
terminal body with bayonet ring slit. Then, be careful not
to make a half fit condition as shown in the figure.
• Never mistake the slit of bayonet ring for other dent por- M
tion.
O
SCIA2099E

PRECAUTIONS
General Precautions INFOID:0000000012200847
• Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness connec-

tor, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery
cable. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if igni-
tion switch is turned OFF.
SEF289H
• When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from TCM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
When connecting pin connectors make sure that there are not
any bends or breaks on TCM pin terminal.
SEF291H
• Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal

inspection and make sure whether TCM functions properly or
not. Refer to TM-195, "Reference Value".
MEF040DA
• After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform “DTC

Confirmation Procedure”.
If the repair is completed the DTC should not be displayed in
the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
• Always use the specified brand of CVT fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Flu-
ids and Lubricants".
• Use lint-free paper, not cloth rags, during work.
• After replacing the CVT fluid, dispose of the waste oil using the
methods prescribed by law, ordinance, etc.
JSBIA1315ZZ
Service Notice or Precaution INFOID:0000000012200848
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS
• CVT self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through
the blinking pattern of the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the table on TM-190, "CONSULT Func-
tion" for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result.
• The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MI are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM memories.

PRECAUTIONS
Always perform the procedure on TM-188, "Diagnosis Description" to complete the repair and avoid
unnecessary blinking of the MIL. A
For details of OBD-II, refer to EC-73, "Diagnosis Description".
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD-II, may use the new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-6, "Harness
B
Connector".
TM

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [CVT: RE0F10B]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000012200849
Tool number
Tool name
— Measuring line pressure
(OTC3492)
Oil pressure gauge set
SCIA7531E
1. ST25054000 Measuring line pressure

( — )
Adapter
2. ST25055000
( — )
Adapter
SCIA8372J
KV31103600 Measuring line pressure

(J-45674)
Joint pipe adapter
(With ST25054000)
ZZA1227D
KV38107900 Installing drive shaft

( — )
Protector
a: 32 mm (1.26 in) dia.
PDIA1183J
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000012200850

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [CVT: RE0F10B]
Tool number
Description
Tool name A
Power tool Loosening nuts and bolts
C
PBIC0190E
Drift Installing differential side oil seal (transaxle

a: 53 mm (2.09 in) dia. case side) TM
b: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia.
NT115
F
Drift Installing differential side oil seal (converter
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. housing side)
H
SCIA5338E
Drift Installing converter housing oil seal

a: 65 mm (2.13 in) dia.
b: 60 mm (1.97 in) dia. I
NT115

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CVT: RE0F10B]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000012200851
JSDIA5164GB
1. Multi display unit (MDU) 2. ABS actuator and electric unit (control 3. ECM
Refer to DMS-4, "Component Parts unit) Refer to EC-27, "ENGINE CONTROL
Location". Refer to BRC-9, "Component Parts Lo- SYSTEM :
cation". Component Parts Location".
4. IPDM E/R 5. BCM 6. Combination meter
Refer to PCS-5, "Component Parts Lo- Refer to BCS-5, "BODY CONTROL
cation" SYSTEM : Component Parts Location"
7. Manual mode indicator 8. Shift position indicator 9. CVT indicator
(On the combination meter) (On the combination meter) (On the combination meter)
10. Paddle shifter (shift-down switch) 11. Paddle shifter (shift-up switch) 12. Secondary speed sensor
13. Control valve* 14. CVT unit connector 15. Primary speed sensor
16. Transmission range switch 17. TCM 18. Stop lamp switch
19. Manual mode switch
A. Transaxle assembly B. Engine room C. Brake pedal, upper

COMPONENT PARTS
D. CVT shift selector assembly
*: Control valve is installed in transaxle assembly. A
NOTE:
• The following components are included in control valve assembly.
B
- CVT fluid temperature sensor
- Secondary pressure sensor
- Line pressure solenoid valve
C
- Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
- Lock-up select solenoid valve
- Step motor
TM
- ROM assembly
• The following components are included in manual mode switch.
- Mode select switch
- Select position switch
E
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Description INFOID:0000000012200852
F
Name Function
TCM TM-158, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM"
G
Transmission range switch TM-158, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch"
Primary speed sensor TM-158, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Speed Sensor"
Secondary speed sensor TM-158, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Speed Sensor" H
CVT fluid temperature sensor TM-159, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor"
Secondary pressure sensor TM-159, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure Sensor"
I
Line pressure solenoid valve TM-160, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve"
Secondary pressure solenoid valve TM-160, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure Solenoid Valve"
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-160, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve" J
Lock-up select solenoid valve TM-160, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Lock-up Select Solenoid Valve"
Step motor TM-161, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Step Motor"
K
Manual mode switch TM-161, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch"
Shift position indicator TM-161, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Shift Position Indicator"
Manual mode indicator TM-161, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Indicator" L
Paddle shifter (shift-down switch) TM-162, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Paddle Shifter"
Paddle shifter (shift-up switch) TM-162, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Paddle Shifter"
M
Accelerator pedal position sensor EC-33, "Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor"
Stop lamp switch BRC-13, "Stop Lamp Switch"
• For purposes including improving the feeling when shifting speeds and preventing N
drops in engine speed, control signals are exchanged between the ECM and TCM,
and real-time cooperative control is performed according to the vehicle driving condi-
tions. (Engine and CVT integrated control)
- Engine and CVT integrated control signal O
NOTE:
ECM General term for the communication (torque-down permission, torque-down request,
etc.) exchanged between the ECM and TCM.
• The TCM receives the following signal via CAN communications from the ECM for P
judging the vehicle driving conditions.
- Engine speed signal
- Accelerator pedal position signal
- Closed throttle position signal
The TCM receives the following signal via CAN communications from the BCM for judg-
BCM ing the vehicle driving conditions.
• Stop lamp switch signal

COMPONENT PARTS
Name Function
The TCM receives the following signal via CAN communications from the ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit) for judging the vehicle driving conditions.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Vehicle speed signal (ABS)
• ABS operation signal
The TCM receives the following signal via CAN communications from the combination
meter for judging the driving request from the driver.
• Manual mode signal
Combination meter
• Non-manual mode signal
• Manual mode shift up signal
• Manual mode shift down signal
The TCM receives the following signal via CAN communications from the ABS actuator
IPDM E/R and electric unit (control unit) for judging the vehicle driving conditions.
• A/C compressor feedback signal
The TCM receives the following signals from MDU via CAN communication to switch
driving mode of the Integrated Control System.
MDU • NORMAL mode signal
• ECO mode signal
• SPORT mode signal
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM INFOID:0000000012200853
• The vehicle driving status is judged based on the signals from the sensors, switches, and other control units,
and the optimal transaxle control is performed.
• For TCM control items, refer to TM-180, "CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description".
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch INFOID:0000000012200854
• The transmission range switch is installed to upper part of transaxle case.

• The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position.
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000012200855
• The primary speed sensor is installed to front part of transaxle assembly.

• The primary speed sensor detects primary pulley speed.
• The primary speed sensor generates the ON-OFF pulse (short waveform) in proportion to the rotating body
speed which is “The higher the rotating body speed is, the faster the change cycle is”. The TCM judges the
rotating speed from the changing cycle of this pulse signal.
JSDIA1824GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000012200856
• The secondary speed sensor is installed to upper part of converter housing.

• The secondary speed sensor detects secondary pulley speed.

COMPONENT PARTS
• The secondary speed sensor generates the ON-OFF pulse (short waveform) in proportion to the rotating
body speed which is “The higher the rotating body speed is, the faster the change cycle is”. The TCM judges A
the rotating speed from the changing cycle of this pulse signal.
TM
JSDIA1824GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000012200857 G
• The CVT fluid temperature sensor is installed to control valve.

• The CVT fluid temperature sensor detects CVT fluid temperature in oil pan. H
• The fluid temperature sensor uses a thermistor, and changes the signal voltage by converting changes in the
CVT fluid temperature to a resistance value. TCM evaluates the CVT fluid temperature from the signal volt-
age value.
I
JSDIA1825GB
N
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure Sensor INFOID:0000000012200858
O
• The secondary pressure sensor is installed to control valve.
• The secondary pressure sensor detects the pressure applied to the secondary pulley.

COMPONENT PARTS
• When pressure is applied to the ceramic device in the secondary pressure sensor, the ceramic device is
deformed, resulting in voltage change. TCM evaluates the secondary pressure from its voltage change. Volt-
age is increased along with pressure increase.
JSDIA1831GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000012200859
• The line pressure solenoid valve is installed to control valve.

• The line pressure solenoid valve controls the pressure regulator valve. For information about the pressure
regulator valve, refer to TM-173, "MECHANICAL SYSTEM : Component Description".
• The line pressure solenoid valve uses the linear solenoid valve [N/H (normal high) type].
NOTE:
• The principle of the linear solenoid valve utilizes the fact that the force pressing on the valve spool installed
inside the coil increases nearly in proportion to the current. This allows it to produce a fluid pressure that is
proportional to this pressing force.
• The N/H (normal high) produces hydraulic control when the coil is not energized.
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000012200860
• The secondary pressure solenoid valve is installed to control valve.

• The secondary pressure solenoid valve controls the secondary valve. For information about the secondary
valve, refer to TM-173, "MECHANICAL SYSTEM : Component Description".
• The secondary pressure solenoid valve uses the linear solenoid valve [N/H (normal high) type].
NOTE:
• The N/H (normal high) produces hydraulic control when the coil is not energized.
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000012200861
• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is installed to control valve.

• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve controls the torque converter clutch control valve. For information
about the torque converter clutch control valve, refer to TM-173, "MECHANICAL SYSTEM : Component
Description".
• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve utilizes a linear solenoid valve [N/L (normal low) type].
NOTE:
• The N/L (normal low) type does not produce hydraulic control when the coil is not energized.
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Lock-up Select Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000012200862
• The lock-up select solenoid valve is installed to control valve.

• The lock-up select solenoid valve controls the select switch valve. For information about the select switch
valve, refer to TM-173, "MECHANICAL SYSTEM : Component Description".
• The lock-up select solenoid valve utilizes an ON-OFF solenoid valve.
COMPONENT PARTS
NOTE:
• The only operations of the valve spool installed inside the coil are pressing or not pressing the ball which A
seals the hydraulic supply section into the seat. This A/T uses N/L (normal low) type.
• When voltage is not applied to the coil, the force of the pilot pressure presses the ball against the seat,
stopping the pilot pressure at that point.
B
• When voltage is applied to the coil, the valve is pulled in the direction of the coil, disengaging the hydraulic
seal which the ball creates. This supplies pilot pressure to the operating locations.
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Step Motor INFOID:0000000012200863
C
The step motor changes the step with turning 4 coils ON/OFF according to the signal from TCM. As a result,
the flow of line pressure to primary pulley is changed and pulley ratio is controlled.
TM
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch INFOID:0000000012200864
• The manual mode switch [mode select switch and position select switch (shift-up/shift-down)] is installed in
E
the CVT shift selector assembly.
• The mode select switch detects the position (the main shift gate side or manual shift gate side) of the selec-
tor lever and transmits a manual mode signal or a not manual mode signal to the combination meter. Then,
the TCM receives a manual mode signal or non-manual mode signal from the combination meter. F
• The position select switch (shift-up) detects that the selector lever is shifted to the shift-up side of the manual
shift gate and transmits a manual mode shift up signal to the combination meter. Then, the TCM receives a
manual mode shift up signal from the combination meter.
G
• The position select switch (shift-down) detects that the selector lever is shifted to the shift-down side of the
manual shift gate and transmits a manual mode shift down signal to the combination meter. Then, the TCM
receives a manual mode shift down signal from the combination meter.
H
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : CVT Indicator INFOID:0000000012200865
• CVT indicator is positioned on the combination meter.

• CVT indicator turns on for a certain period of time when the ignition switch turns ON, and then turns OFF. I
Condition (status) CVT indicator

Ignition switch OFF. OFF J
Ignition switch ON. ON (Approx. 2sec.)
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Shift Position Indicator INFOID:0000000012200866 K
TCM transmits shift position signal to combination meter via CAN communication. The actual shift position is
displayed on combination meter according to the signal. L
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Indicator INFOID:0000000012200867
• Manual mode indicator (A) is positioned on the combination meter. M

• The manual mode indicator illuminates when the selector lever is
operated to the manual shift gate side. It also displays the gear
position (M1⇔M8) when the selector lever is operated to the +
side or – side. (Operates only during driving.) N
• The manual mode indicator turns off when the selector lever is
operated to the main shift gate side.
O
Condition (status) Manual mode indicator
Selector lever is operated to the manual shift gate
Display P
side. JSDIA2386ZZ
Selector lever is operated to the + side or – side. M1⇔M8

Selector lever is operated to the main shift gate side. Nothing displayed.

COMPONENT PARTS
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Paddle Shifter INFOID:0000000012200868
• The paddle shifter is installed to the steering column.

• The paddle shifter transmits shift up and shift down signals to com-
bination meter. Then TCM receives signals from the combination
meter via CAN communication.
JSDIA4188ZZ
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000012200869
JSDIA2337ZZ
1. Shift lock release button cover* 2. Shift lock solenoid 3. Park position switch
4. Stop lamp switch
A: CVT shift selector assembly B: Brake pedal, upper
*: Shift lock release button becomes operative by removing shift lock cover.
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Description INFOID:0000000012200870

COMPONENT PARTS
Component Function
A
Shift lock solenoid It operates according to the signal from the stop lamp switch and moves the lock lever.
• Rotates according to shift lock solenoid activation and releases the shift lock.
Lock lever • If shift lock solenoid does not activate, lock lever can be rotated when shift lock release but-
ton is pressed and shift lock is released. B
Detent rod It links with the selector button and restricts the selector lever movement.
Park position switch It detects that the selector lever is in “P” position.
C
Shift lock release button Forcibly releases the shift lock when pressed.
• The stop lamp switch turns ON when the brake pedal is depressed.
Stop lamp switch
• When the stop lamp switch turns ON, the shift lock solenoid is energized.
TM

TRANSAXLE
TRANSAXLE : Cross-Sectional View INFOID:0000000012200871
JSDIA2389GB
1. Converter housing 2. Driven sprocket 3. Chain

4. Reverse brake 5. Oil pump 6. Forward clutch
7. Planetary carrier 8. Primary pulley 9. Sun gear
10. Steel belt 11. Side cover 12. Internal gear
13. Parking gear 14. Secondary pulley 15. Final gear
16. Differential case 17. Idler gear 18. Reduction gear
19. Taper roller bearing 20. Output gear 21. Drive sprocket
22. Input shaft 23. Torque converter

TRANSAXLE : Main Component Elements INFOID:0000000012200872
A
TORQUE CONVERTER (WITH LOCK-UP FUNCTION)
In the same way as a conventional A/T, the torque converter is a system that increases the engine torque and
transmits the torque to the transaxle. A symmetrical 3-element, 1-stage, 2-phase type is used here. B
OIL PUMP
Utilizes a vane-type oil pump that is driven by the engine through the oil pump drive chain in order to increase
efficiency of pump discharge volume in low-speed zone and optimize pump discharge volume in high-speed C
zone. Discharged oil from oil pump is transmitted to control valve. It is used as the oil of primary and second-
ary pulley operation, the oil of clutch operation, and the lubricant for each part.
FORWARD/REVERSE SELECTION UNIT TM
• A planetary gear type of forward/reverse selector mechanism is installed between the torque converter and
primary pulley.
• The power from the torque converter is input via the input shaft, operating a wet multi-plate clutch by means E
of hydraulic pressure to switch between forward and reverse driving.
JSDIA2426GB
FINAL DRIVE AND DIFFERENTIAL K

The deceleration gears are composed of 2 stages: primary deceleration (output gear, idler gear pair) and sec-
ondary deceleration (reduction gear, final gear pair). All of these gears are helical gears.
The lubrication oil is the same as the fluid (Genuine CVT fluid) which lubricates the entire transaxle. L
JSDIA2427GB

TRANSAXLE : Belt & Pulley INFOID:0000000012200873
STRUCTURE
JSDIA2428GB
MECHANISM
It is composed of a pair of pulleys (the groove width is changed freely in the axial direction) and the steel belt
(the steel plates are placed continuously and the belt is guided with the multilayer steel rings on both sides).
The groove width changes according to wrapping radius of steel belt and pulley from low status to overdrive
status continuously with non-step. It is controlled with the oil pressures of primary pulley and secondary pulley.
STEEL BELT
It is composed of multiple steel plates (A) and two steel rings (B)
stacked to a several number. The feature of this steel belt transmits
power with compression of the steel plate in contrast with transmis-
sion of power in pulling with a rubber belt. Friction force is required
with the pulley slope to transmit power from the steel plate. The force
is generated with the following mechanism:
Oil pressure applies to the secondary pulley to nip the plate. ⇒The
plate is pushed and extended outward. ⇒The steel ring shows with-
stands. ⇒Pulling force is generated on the steel ring. ⇒The plate of
the primary pulley is nipped between the pulley. ⇒Friction force is
generated between the steel belt and the pulley.
JSDIA2431ZZ
Therefore, responsibilities are divided by the steel plate that trans-
mits the power with compression and the steel ring that maintains necessary friction force. In this way, the

tension of the steel ring is distributed on the entire surface and stress variation is limited, resulting in good
durability. A
PULLEY
The primary pulley (input shaft side) and the secondary pulley (output shaft side) have the shaft with slope
(fixed cone surface), movable sheave (movable cone surface that can move in the axial direction) and oil pres- B
sure chamber at the back of the movable sheave.
The movable sheave slides on the shaft to change the groove width of the pulley. Input signals of engine load
(accelerator pedal opening), primary pulley speed and secondary pulley speed change the operation pres- C
sures of the primary pulley and the secondary pulley, and controls the pulley groove width.
TM
JSDIA2429GB O
FLUID COOLER & FLUID WARMER SYSTEM
FLUID COOLER & FLUID WARMER SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000012200874
P
CVT FLUID COOLER SCHEMATIC

JSDIA2826GB
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
CVT Oil Warmer
• The CVT oil warmer (1) is installed on the front part of transaxle
assembly.
• When engine is started while engine and CVT are cold, engine
coolant temperature rises more quickly than CVT fluid tempera-
ture. CVT oil warmer is provided with two circuits for CVT and
engine coolant respectively so that warmed engine coolant warms
CVT quickly. This helps shorten CVT warming up time, improving
fuel economy.
• A cooling effect is obtained when A/T fluid temperature is high.
JSDIA2228ZZ
Heater Thermostat
The heater thermostat (1) is installed on the front part of transaxle
assembly.
JSDIA2439ZZ
MECHANICAL SYSTEM

MECHANICAL SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000012200875
TM
JSDIA2432GB
I
MECHANICAL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000012200876
Traction force of engine is transmitted to wheel via torque converter, planetary gear, belt, pulley, differential
J
gear, and others. Also includes a parking mechanism that mechanically fixes secondary pulley when selector
lever is shifted to the “P” position.
ACTIVATION STATE ACCORDING TO EACH SHIFTING K
×: Operates
Solenoid valve
Secondary
Selector lever position pressure Line pres- Secondary Torque con- Step motor L
Lock-up select sole-
sensor sure sole- pressure sole- verter solenoid
noid valve
noid valve noid valve valve
P × × × ×
M
R × × × × ×
N × × × × ×
D (Low) × × × × × N
D (High) × × × × ×
D
× × × × × O
(Lock-up)
POWER TRANSMISSION
“P” position P
• Traction force from input shaft is not transmitted to primary pulley because forward clutch and reverse brake
are not engaged and run idle.
• Torque from the wheels is not transmitted to secondary pulley because secondary pulley is mechanically
fixed when parking pole that is linked with selector lever is engaged with parking gear that is integrated with
secondary pulley.

JSDIA2433GB
Planetary gear
Name Sun gear Planet carrier Internal gear
Condition Stop Idled Input
Direction of rotation — — Clockwise revolution
“R” position
• Traction force from input shaft rotates sun gear in opposite direction of input shaft rotation because reverse
brake is engaged and planetary gear is fixed.
• Therefore primary pulley rotates in opposite direction of input shaft rotation and traction force output is in
opposite direction rotation.

TM
H
JSDIA2434GB
Planetary gear
I
Condition Output Fixed Input
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution
“N” position J
• Traction force from input shaft is not transmitted to primary pulley because forward clutch and reverse brake
are not engaged and run idle.
• Torque from wheel is not transmitted to input shaft because forward clutch and reverse brake are not K
engaged and planetary carrier runs idle.

JSDIA2435GB
Planetary gear
Condition Stop Idle Input
Direction of rotation — — Clockwise revolution
“D” position
• Traction force from input shaft rotates sun gear via forward clutch in the same direction of input shaft
because forward clutch is engaged.
• Therefore primary pulley rotates in the same direction of input shaft rotation and traction force output is in the
same direction rotation.

TM
H
JSDIA2436GB
Planetary gear
I
Condition Input/output Idle Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution
J
MECHANICAL SYSTEM : Component Description INFOID:0000000012200877
Part name Function K

Torque converter Increases engine torque and transmits it to the transaxle.
Utilizes a vane-type oil pump that is driven by the engine through the oil pump drive chain in order to
increase efficiency of pump discharge volume in low-speed zone and optimize pump discharge volume L
Oil pump
in high-speed zone. Discharged oil from oil pump is transmitted to control valve. It is used as the oil of
primary and secondary pulley operation, the oil of clutch operation, and the lubricant for each part.
The forward clutch is wet and multiple plate type clutch that consists of clutch drum, piston, drive plate, M
Forward clutch and driven plate. It is a clutch to move the vehicle forward by activating piston hydraulically, engaging
plates, and directly connecting sun gear and input shaft.
The reverse brake is a wet multiple-plate type brake that consists of transaxle case, piston, drive plate,
N
Reverse brake and driven plate. It is a brake to move the vehicle in reverse by activating piston hydraulically, engaging
plates, and fixing planetary gear.
The internal gear is directly connected to forward clutch drum. It is a gear that moves the outer edge of
Internal gear pinion planet of planet carrier. It transmits power to move the vehicle in reverse when the planet carrier O
is fixed.
Composed of a carrier, pinion planet, and pinion shaft. This gear fixes and releases the planet carrier in
Planet carrier
order to switch between forward and reverse driving. P
Sun gear is a set part with planet carrier and internal gear. It transmits transmitted force to primary fixed
Sun gear sheave. It rotates in forward or reverse direction according to activation of either forward clutch or re-
verse brake.
The input shaft is directly connected to forward clutch drum and transmits traction force from torque con-
Input shaft verter. In shaft center, there are holes for hydraulic distribution to primary pulley and hydraulic distribu-
tion for lockup ON/OFF.

Part name Function
Primary pulley It is composed of a pair of pulleys (the groove width is changed freely in the axial direction) and the steel
belt (the steel plates are placed continuously and the belt is guided with the multilayer steel rings on both
Secondary pulley
sides). The groove width changes according to wrapping radius of steel belt and pulley from low status
to overdrive status continuously with non-step. It is controlled with the oil pressures of primary pulley and
Steel belt
secondary pulley.
Manual shaft
Parking rod When the manual shaft is in the P position, the parking rod that is linked to the manual shaft rotates the
parking pole. When the parking pole rotates, it engages with the parking gear, fixing the parking gear.
Parking pawl As a result, the secondary pulley that is integrated with the parking gear is fixed.
Parking gear
Output gear
Idler gear The deceleration gears are composed of 2 stages: primary deceleration (output gear, idler gear pair) and
Reduction gear secondary deceleration (reduction gear, final gear pair). All of these gears are helical gears.
Differential
Torque converter regulator Adjusts the feed pressure to the torque converter to the optimum pressure corresponding to the driving
valve condition.
Adjusts the discharge pressure from the oil pump to the optimum pressure (line pressure) corresponding
Pressure regulator valve
to the driving condition.
Torque converter clutch
Adjusts the torque converter engage and disengage pressures.
control valve
Controls the line pressure that is applied to the primary pulley according to the stroke difference between
Shift control valve
the step motor and primary pulley.
Secondary valve Reduces the line pressure and adjusts the secondary pressure.
Clutch regulator valve Adjusts the clutch operating pressure according to the driving conditions.
Manual valve Distributes the clutch operation pressure to each circuit according to the selector lever position.
Select control valve Engages when selected. Adjusts the forward clutch pressure and reverse brake pressure.
Performs switching control of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve control pressure when lock-up
Select switch valve is engaged/disengaged, and when the forward/reverse clutches (forward clutch and reverse brake) are
engaged/disengaged.
• Step motor changes step by turning 4 coils ON or OFF according to signal from TCM.
Step motor • By changing step, step motor controls outward flow and inward flow of line pressure to primary pulley,
determines the primary pulley position, and controls gear ratio.

SYSTEM
SYSTEM
A
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000012200878
B
TM
JSDIA6363GB

SYSTEM
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000012200879
JSDIA5166GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000012200880
The TCM has an electrical fail-safe mode. In this mode TCM is operator even if there is an error in a main
electronic control input/output signal circuit.
DESCRIPTION
When a malfunction is detected in each sensor, switch, solenoid or others, this function provides control to
minimize reduction of drivability so that durability of transmission assembly can be acquired.
DTC Condition Vehicle behavior

• Start is slow
P0703 —
• Acceleration is slow
• Position indicator on combination meter is not dis-
played
• Selector shock is large
P0705 — • Start is slow
• Acceleration at high load state is slow
• Manual mode is not activated
• Lock-up is not performed
Engine coolant temperature when engine starts is 10°C (50°F) or
Start is slow
more
• Start is slow
P0710 • Acceleration is slow
less
• Vehicle speed is not increased
Engine coolant temperature when engine starts is −35°C (−31°F)
Vehicle speed is not increased
or less

SYSTEM
A
• Re-start is slow after vehicle is stop by strong decel-
P0715 — eration
• Manual mode is not activated B
• Start is slow
C
P0720 —
eration
• Lock-up is not performed TM
P0725 — Lock-up is not performed
P0740 —
• Lock-up is not performed E
• Start is slow
A malfunction is detected • Acceleration is slow F
P0746
• Start is difficult
Function is excessively reduced after a malfunction is detected • Drive is difficult G
P0778 — Vehicle speed is not increased
P0826 — Manual mode is not activated H
• Start is slow
P0840 —
• Start is slow I
P0841 —
• Start is slow
P0845 —
• Acceleration is slow J
• Start is slow
P0868 —
• Start is slow K
P1701 —
P1705 —
• Lock-up is not performed L
• Start is slow
P1709 —
• Shift position indicator (P, N) is not displayed, or is
displayed with delay. M
P1722 — Lock-up is not activated in coast state
• Re-start is slow after vehicle is stop by strong decel- N
A malfunction is detected in primary pulley speed sensor side eration
O
P1723 • Start is slow
A malfunction is detected in secondary pulley speed sensor P
eration
P1726 — Acceleration is slow
P1740 —

SYSTEM
A malfunction is detected in low side (when vehicle is stopped)
A malfunction is detected in high side (during driving) • Acceleration is slow
• Start is slow
U0100 — • Acceleration is slow
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
OIL PRESSURE CONTROL SYSTEM

OIL PRESSURE CONTROL SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000012200881
JSDIA2384GB
OIL PRESSURE CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000012200882
The hydraulic control mechanism consists of the oil pump directly driven by the engine, the hydraulic control
valve that controls line pressure and transmission, and the input signal line.
LINE PRESSURE AND SECONDARY PRESSURE CONTROL
• When an input torque signal equivalent to the engine driving force is transmitted from the ECM to the TCM,
the TCM controls the line pressure solenoid valve and secondary pressure solenoid valve.

SYSTEM
• Highly accurate line pressure control and secondary pressure control reduces friction for improvement of
fuel economy. A
TM
JSDIA2455GB
Normal Oil Pressure Control F

Appropriate line pressure and secondary pressure suitable for driving condition are determined based on the
accelerator pedal position, engine speed, primary pulley (input) speed, secondary pulley (output) speed, input
torque, stop lamp switch signal, transmission range switch signal, lock-up signal, power voltage, target shift G
ratio, oil temperature and oil pressure.
Secondary Pressure Feedback Control
In normal oil pressure control and oil pressure control in shifting, highly accurate secondary pressure is deter- H
mined by detecting the secondary pressure using an oil pressure sensor and by feedback control.
CONTROL SYSTEM
I
CONTROL SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000012200883
JSDIA5166GB

SYSTEM
CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000012200884
The TCM senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always controls the opti-
mum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
TCM FUNCTION
The function of the TCM is to:
• Receive input signals transmitted from various switches and sensors.
• Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, etc.
• Transmit required output signals to the respective solenoids.
Sensor (or signal) ⇒ TCM function ⇒ Actuator

Shift control
Transmission range switch Line pressure control
CVT fluid temperature sensor Primary oil pressure control
Line pressure solenoid valve
Secondary pressure sensor Secondary oil pressure control
Secondary pressure solenoid valve
Primary speed sensor Lock-up control
Torque converter clutch solenoid
Secondary speed sensor Engine brake control
valve
Engine speed signal Vehicle speed control
Lock-up select solenoid valve
Accelerator pedal position signal Integrated Control System
Step motor
Closed throttle position signal Fail-safe function
Shift position indicator
Stop lamp switch signal Self-diagnosis function
Manual mode indicator
Manual mode switch signal Communication function with CON-
Vehicle speed signal SULT
CAN communication control
TCM INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL
CAN com- Fail-safe

Line pres- Select con- Lock-up
Control item Shift control munication
sure control trol control
control function*2
Transmission range switch × × × × × ×

CVT fluid temperature sensor × × × × ×
Secondary pressure sensor × × ×
Primary speed sensor × × × × ×
Secondary speed sensor × × × × × ×
Engine speed signal*1 × × × × ×

Input
Accelerator pedal position signal*1 × × × × × ×
Closed throttle position signal*1 × × × ×
Stop lamp switch signal*1 × × × ×
Manual mode signal*1 × × × × ×
Paddle shifter*1 × × × ×
TCM power supply × × × × × ×
Line pressure solenoid × × × ×
Secondary pressure solenoid × × ×
Output Torque converter clutch solenoid × × ×
Lock-up select solenoid valve × × ×
Step motor × ×
*1: Input by CAN communications.
*2: If these input/output signals show errors, TCM activates the fail-safe function.
CONTROL SYSTEM : CAN Communication INFOID:0000000012200885
• CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle
multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection abil-

SYSTEM
ity. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and
links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are A
connected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H and CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
• For a list of CAN communication signals, refer to LAN-30, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Com-
B
munication Signal Chart".
CONTROL SYSTEM : Engine and CVT Integrated Control (CAN Communication Con-
trol) INFOID:0000000012200886 C
• For purposes including improving the feeling when shifting speeds and preventing drops in engine speed,
engine output control signals are exchanged between the ECM and TCM, and real-time cooperative control TM
is performed according to the vehicle driving conditions.
• TCM sends the sudden deceleration signal, lock-up engaged signal, torque-down request signal, and other
information to ECM, and also receives the torque-down permission/prohibit signals, lock-up permission/pro-
hibit signals, accelerator position, and other information from ECM. E
CONTROL SYSTEM : Control between CVT and Combination Meter (CAN Communi-
cation Control) INFOID:0000000012200887
F
TCM sends the manual mode display request, shift position indicator signal, and other information to the com-
bination meter, and also receives the manual mode signal and other information from the combination meter.
G
CONTROL SYSTEM : Control between CVT and BCM (CAN Communication Control)
INFOID:0000000012200888
TCM receives signals from the stop lamp switch via BCM. H
LOCK-UP AND SELECT CONTROL SYSTEM
LOCK-UP AND SELECT CONTROL SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000012200889 I
N
JSDIA1355GB
LOCK-UP AND SELECT CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000012200890 O
• The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to
increase power transmission efficiency.
P
• The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve, which is controlled by a signal from TCM. The torque converter clutch control valve engages or
releases the torque converter clutch piston.
• When shifting between “N” (“P”) ⇒“D” (“R”), torque converter clutch solenoid valve controls engagement
power of forward clutch and reverse brake.

SYSTEM
• The lock-up applied gear range was expanded by locking up the
torque converter at a lower vehicle speed than conventional A/T
models.
• If the CVT fluid temperature is low or the vehicle is in fail-safe
mode due to malfunction, lock-up control is prohibited.
JPDIA0312GB
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH AND SELECT CONTROL VALVE CONTROL

Lock-up Released
In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid valve and the lock-up apply pressure is drained.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled.
Lock-up Applied
In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the torque
converter clutch solenoid valve and lock-up apply pressure is generated.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled.
Select Control
When shifting between “N” (“P”) ⇒“D” (“R”), optimize the operating pressure on the basis of the throttle posi-
tion, the engine speed, and the secondary pulley (output) revolution speed to lessen the shift shock.
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000012200891
JSDIA5167GB
NOTE:
The gear ratio is set for each position separately.
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000012200892
• To select the gear ratio that can give the driving force to meet driver's intent or vehicle situation, the vehicle
driving condition such as vehicle speed or accelerator pedal position is detected and the most appropriate
gear ratio is selected and the shifting method before reaching the speed is determined. The information is

SYSTEM
output to the primary pressure solenoid valve to control the line pressure input/output to the primary pulley,
to determine the primary pulley (movable pulley) position and to control the gear position. A
JSDIA2456GB TM
• The gear ratio is set for each position separately.
“D” POSITION
Gear shifting is performed in all shifting ranges from the lowest to the E
highest gear ratio.
SCIA1953E H
“M” POSITION
When the selector lever or paddle shifter is put in the manual shift
gate side, the fixed changing gear line is set. By moving the selector I
lever to + side or - side, the manual mode switch is changed over,
and shift change like M/T becomes possible following the changing
gear set line step by step. J
JSDIA5168GB
L
Manual Mode Information
The TCM transmits the manual mode shift refusal signal to the combination meter if the TCM refuses the tran-
saxle from the driving status of vehicle when the selector lever shifts to “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (− side)” side.
M
The combination meter blinks shift position indicator on the combination meter and sounds the buzzer to indi-
cate the driver that the shifting is not performed when receiving this signal. However, the TCM does not trans-
mit the manual mode shift refusal signal in the conditions as per the following.
• When the selector lever or the paddle shifter shifts to “DOWN (− side)” side while driving in M1. N
• When the selector lever or the paddle shifter shifts to “UP (+ side)” side while driving in M8.
BLIPPING CONTROL
Using engine torque, the blipping control enables a faster and more responsive gear shifting by compensating O
inertia torque generated from the rotational change during gear shifting in real time.
Operation
• The blipping control is activated when the driver shifts up/down the transaxle in manual mode or when the P
transaxle is shifted up/down in “D” position SPORT mode.
NOTE:
The blipping control is not activated when the vehicle is in the following conditions:
• When CAN communication is abnormal.
• During the retard inhibit signal transmission from ECM within the engine-CVT integrated control.
• Engine coolant temperature is less than 20°C (68°F).
• CVT fluid temperature is more than 120°C (248°F).

SYSTEM
• Vehicle speed is less than 20 km/h (12 MPH).
• When ABS, TCS or VDC is active.
• During wheel spin.
• ECM selects blipping control or normal shift control according to the gear position, the selector lever posi-
tion, etc.
• The blipping control is activated when ECM judges it controllable after receiving a control permit signal from
TCM.
• ECM controls engine torque, based on generated inertia torque.
JSDIA2841GB
HILL CLIMBING AND DESCENDING CONTROL

If a downhill is detected with the accelerator pedal is released, the system performs downshift to increase the
engine brake force so that vehicle may not be accelerated more than necessary. If a climbing hill is detected,
the system improves the acceleration performance in re-acceleration by limiting the gear shift range on the
high side.
NOTE:
For engine brake control on a downhill, the control can be stopped with CONSULT.
JSDIA2060GB
CONTROL IN ACCELERATION
From change of the vehicle speed or accelerator pedal position, the acceleration request level of the driver or
driving scene is evaluated. In start or acceleration during driving, the gear shift characteristics with linearity of
revolution increase and vehicle speed increase are gained to improve the acceleration feel.
INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM

SYSTEM
INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000012200893
TM
JSDIA2410GB
M
INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000012200894
• TCM receives the NORMAL mode signal, ECO mode signal or SPORT mode signal from the multi display
unit through CAN communication. N
• TCM sends the recognized control mode to ECM through CAN communication (drive mode select signal).
• With operation on the multi display unit, the mode is changed on the display, but the mode is actually not
changed due to CAN communication malfunction. O
• When the selector lever is in any position other than D position, the gear shift line is not changed according
to changes in the control mode.
CONTROL DETAILS OF EACH MODE P

SYSTEM
Control mode Control

Driving mode that automatically selects the shift schedule considering the balance of fuel economy and
NORMAL mode
driving performance based on the driving condition and driving trend.
Keeps high engine speed and provides direct feel and acceleration performance suitable for driving on
SPORT mode winding road. This driving mode also provides a rhythmical feel obtained by A/T like shifting, and pro-
duces sporty driving.
Driving mode that selects the shift schedule with priority on fuel economy which gives low engine revo-
ECO mode
lution.
FAIL-SAFE
If CAN communication malfunction occurs between TCM and the multi display unit, the mode when the mal-
function occurs is maintained for approximately 30 seconds and the mode is changed to NORMAL mode
when the accelerator pedal is released.
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000012200895
• The shift lock is the mechanism provided to prevent quick start of a vehicle by incorrect operation of a drive
when the selector lever is in P position.
• Selector lever can be shifted from the P position to another position when the following conditions are satis-
fied.
- Ignition switch is ON.
- Stop lamp switch ON (brake pedal is depressed)
- Press the selector button.
SHIFT LOCK OPERATION AT P POSITION
When brake pedal is not depressed (no selector operation allowed)
When the brake pedal is not depressed with the ignition switch ON,
the shift lock solenoid (A) is OFF (not energized) and the solenoid
rod (B) is extended with spring.
The connecting lock lever (C) is located at the position shown in the
figure when the solenoid rod is extended. It prevents the movement
of the detent rod (D). The selector lever cannot be shifted from the P
position for this reason.
JSDIA2338ZZ
When brake pedal is depressed (selector lever operation allowed)

The shift lock solenoid (A) is turned ON (energized) when the brake
pedal is depressed with the ignition switch ON. The solenoid rod (B)
is compressed with the electromagnetic force. The connecting lock
lever (C) rotates when the solenoid rod is compressed. Therefore,
the detent rod (D) can be moved. The selector lever can be shifted to
other positions for this reason.
JSDIA2339ZZ
P POSITION HOLD MECHANISM (IGNITION SWITCH LOCK)

SYSTEM
The shift lock solenoid (A) is not energized when the ignition switch
is in any position other than ON. The shift mechanism is locked and A
P position is held. The operation cannot be performed from P posi-
tion if the brake pedal is depressed with the ignition switch ON when
the operation system of shift lock solenoid is malfunctioning. How-
B
ever, the lock lever (B) is forcibly rotated and the shift lock is
released when the shift lock release button (C) is pressed from
above. The selector operation from P position can be performed.
C
D : Detent rod
CAUTION: JSDIA2340ZZ
Use the shift lock release button only when the selector lever TM
cannot be operated even if the brake pedal is depressed with the ignition switch ON.
KEY LOCK SYSTEM
E
KEY LOCK SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000012200896
KEY LOCK MECHANISM F

The key is not set to LOCK when the selector lever is not selected to P position. This prevents the key from
being removed from the key cylinder.
Key lock status G
The slider (B) in the key cylinder (A) is moved to the left side of the
figure when the selector lever is in any position other than P position.
The rotator (D) that rotates together with the key (C) cannot be
rotated for this reason. The key cannot be removed from the key cyl- H
inder because it cannot be turned to LOCK (E).
J
JPDIA0108ZZ
Key unlock status

The slider (B) in the key cylinder (A) is moved to the right side of the K
figure when the selector lever is in P position and the finger is
removed from the selector button. The rotator (C) can be rotated for
this reason. The key (D) can be removed from the key cylinder L
because it can be turned to LOCK (E).
JPDIA0109ZZ N

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000012200897
DESCRIPTION
The CVT system has two self-diagnostic systems.
The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination
with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in
the ECM memory, and the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis performed by the TCM. The malfunction is stored in the TCM
memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail, refer to TM-190,
"CONSULT Function".
OBD-II FUNCTION
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the CVT system. One function
is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the CVT system. The signal is sent to the
ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a
diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches
and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MIL automatically illuminates in “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” when a malfunction is sensed in rela-
tion to CVT system parts.
ONE OR TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC OF OBD-II
One Trip Detection Logic
If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in
the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function.
Two Trip Detection Logic
When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC
(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — 1st trip
If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive,
the MIL will illuminate. — 2nd trip
The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation.
OBD-II DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
( with CONSULT or GST) CONSULT or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0720 etc.
These DTC are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
• 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
• Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. How-
ever, in case of the Mode II and GST, they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or
occurred in the past and returned to normal.
CONSULT can identify them as shown below, therefore, CONSULT (if available) is recommended.
- DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode for “ENGINE” with
CONSULT. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
- If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
- If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”.
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
• The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated
load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data,
and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT
or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT screen, not on the GST. For
details, refer to EC-84, "CONSULT Function".
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority

for 1st trip freeze frame data, and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no A
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
B
Priority Items
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0304
1
Freeze frame data Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172
C
2 Except the above items (Includes CVT related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTC) are cleared when the ECM mem- TM
ory is erased.
How to Erase DTC
• The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as E
described following.
- If the battery cable is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours.
- When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode F
selector on the ECM.
• The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC
related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-115, "DTC Index".
- Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) G
- 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC)
- Freeze frame data
- 1st trip freeze frame data H
- System readiness test (SRT) codes
- Test values
How to Erase DTC (With CONSULT) I

The emission related diagnostic information in the TCM and ECM can be erased by selecting “ALL Erase” in
the “Description” of “FINAL CHECK” mode with CONSULT.
J
How to Erase DTC (With GST)
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. K
2. Select Mode 4 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL)
L
Description
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
M
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
• If the MIL does not light up, refer to EC-575, "Component
Function Check".
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. N
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
O
JSBIA1315ZZ

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000012200898
APPLICATION ITEMS
Conditions Function
All DTC Reading Display all DTCs or diagnostic items that all ECUs are recording and judging.
Work Support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately.
Self Diagnostic Results Retrieve DTC from ECU and display diagnostic items.
Data Monitor Monitor the input/output signal of the control unit in real time.
CAN Diagnosis This mode displays a network diagnosis result about CAN by a diagram.
CAN Diagnosis Support Mon-
It monitors the status of CAN communication.
itor
ECU Identification Display the ECU identification number (part number etc.) of the selected system.
CALIB DATA The calibration data status of TCM can be checked.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Refer to TM-203, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
X: Application : Optional selection
Monitor item selection
Monitored item (Unit) (Unit) ECU IN- Remarks

MAIN
PUT SIG-
SIGNALS
NALS
Displays the vehicle speed calculated from the CVT out-
VSP SENSOR (km/h or mph) X
put shaft speed.
Displays the vehicle speed signal (ABS) received
ESTM VSP SIG (km/h or mph) X
through CAN communication.
Displays the primary pulley speed calculated from the
PRI SPEED SEN (rpm) X
pulse signal of the primary speed sensor.
Displays the engine speed received through CAN com-
ENG SPEED SIG (rpm) X
munication.
Displays the signal voltage of the secondary pressure
SEC HYDR SEN (V) X
sensor.
• Displays the signal voltage of the primary pressure
PRI HYDR SEN (V) X sensor.
• It is displayed although not equipped.
Displays the signal voltage of the CVT fluid temperature
ATF TEMP SEN (V) X
sensor.
VIGN SEN (V) X Displays the battery voltage applied to TCM.
VEHICLE SPEED (km/h or mph) X Vehicle speed recognized by the TCM.
PRI SPEED (rpm) X Displays the primary pulley speed recognized by TCM.
Displays the secondary pulley speed recognized by

SEC SPEED (rpm)
TCM.
ENG SPEED (rpm) X Displays the engine speed recognized by TCM.
Displays the speed difference between the input shaft
SLIP REV (rpm) X
speed of CVT and the engine speed.

A
MAIN
PUT SIG-
SIGNALS
NALS
Displays the pulley gear ratio calculated from primary B
GEAR RATIO X
pulley speed/secondary pulley speed.
Displays the acceleration and deceleration speed of the
G SPEED (G)
vehicle calculated from vehicle speed change. C
Displays the estimated throttle position received through
ACC PEDAL OPEN (0.0/8) X X
CAN communication.
Displays the secondary pressure calculated from the sig- TM
SEC PRESS (MPa) X
nal voltage of the secondary pressure sensor.
• Displays the primary pressure calculated from the sig-
PRI PRESS (MPa) X nal voltage of the primary pressure sensor. E
Means CVT fluid temperature. Actual oil temperature (°
ATFTEMP COUNT X
numeric value is converted. Refer to TM-194
F
Displays the target primary pulley speed calculated from
DSR REV (rpm)
processing of gear shift control.
DGEAR RATIO Displays the target gear ratio. G
Displays the target number of steps of the step motor,
DSTM STEP (step)
calculated from processing of gear shift control.
Displays the actual number of steps of the step motor, H
STM STEP (step) X
calculated from processing of gear shift control.
Displays the target oil pressure of the torque converter
LU PRS (MPa) clutch solenoid valve calculated from oil pressure pro- I
cessing of gear shift control.
Displays the target oil pressure of the line pressure sole-
LINE PRS (MPa) noid valve calculated from oil pressure processing of
gear shift control.
J
Displays the target oil pressure of the secondary pres-

TGT SEC PRESS (MPa) sure solenoid valve calculated from oil pressure process-
ing of gear shift control. K
Displays the command current from TCM to the torque
ISOLT1 (A) X
converter clutch solenoid valve.
Displays the command current from TCM to the line pres- L
ISOLT2 (A) X
sure solenoid valve.
Display the command current from TCM to the second-
ISOLT3 (A) X
ary pressure solenoid valve. M
Monitors the command current from TCM to the torque
SOLMON1 (A) X X converter clutch solenoid valve and displays the moni-
tored value. N
Monitors the command current from TCM to the line
SOLMON2 (A) X X pressure solenoid valve and displays the monitored val-
ue.
O
Monitors the command current from TCM to the second-
SOLMON3 (A) X X ary pressure solenoid valve and displays the monitored
value.
P
Displays the reception status of the stop lamp switch sig-
BRAKE SW (On/Off) X X
nal received through CAN communication.
• Displays the reception status of the wide open throttle
FULL SW (On/Off) X X position signal received through CAN communication.
Displays the reception status of the closed throttle posi-
IDLE SW (On/Off) X X
tion signal received through CAN communication.


MAIN
PUT SIG-
SIGNALS
NALS
• Displays the reception status of the sport mode switch
SPORT MODE SW (On/Off) X X signal received through CAN communication.
Displays the operation status of the paddle shifter (down
STRDWNSW (On/Off) X
switch).
Displays the operation status of the paddle shifter (up
STRUPSW (On/Off) X
switch).
Displays the operation status of the selector lever (down
DOWNLVR (On/Off) X
switch).
Displays the operation status of the selector lever (up
UPLVR (On/Off) X
switch).
Displays if the selector lever position is not at the manual
NONMMODE (On/Off) X
shift gate.
Displays if the selector lever position is at the manual
MMODE (On/Off) X
shift gate.
• Displays the transmission status of the shift position (L
position) signal transmitted through CAN communica-
INDLRNG (On/Off)
tion.
Displays the transmission status of the shift position (D
INDDRNG (On/Off) position) signal transmitted through CAN communica-
tion.
Displays the transmission status of the shift position (N
INDNRNG (On/Off) position) signal transmitted through CAN communica-
tion.
Displays the transmission status of the shift position (R
INDRRNG (On/Off) position) signal transmitted through CAN communica-
tion.
Displays the transmission status of the shift position (P
INDPRNG (On/Off) position) signal transmitted through CAN communica-
tion.
Displays the transmission status of the CVT indicator sig-
CVT LAMP (On/Off)
nal transmitted through CAN communication.
• Displays the transmission status of the S mode indica-
SPORT MODE IND (On/Off) tor signal transmitted through CAN communication.
Displays the transmission status of the manual mode sig-
MMODE IND (On/Off)
nal transmitted through CAN communication.
SMCOIL D (On/Off) Displays the energizing status of step motor coil “D”.
SMCOIL C (On/Off) Displays the energizing status of step motor coil “C”.
SMCOIL B (On/Off) Displays the energizing status of step motor coil “B”.
SMCOIL A (On/Off) Displays the energizing status of step motor coil “A”.
Displays the command value from TCM to the lock-up

LUSEL SOL OUT (On/Off)
select solenoid valve.
Monitors the command value from TCM to the lock-up
LUSEL SOL MON (On/Off)
select solenoid valve and displays the monitored value.
Displays the reception status of the VDC operation signal
VDC ON (On/Off) X
received through CAN communication.
Displays the reception status of the TCS operation signal
TCS ON (On/Off) X

A
MAIN
PUT SIG-
SIGNALS
NALS
Displays the reception status of the ABS operation signal B
ABS ON (On/Off) X
ACC ON (On/Off) X It is displayed although not equipped.
C
RANGE X Displays the gear position recognized by TCM.
M GEAR POS X Display the target gear of manual mode
Displays the operation status of the transmission range TM

D POSITION SW (On/Off) X
switch (D position).
Displays the operation status of the transmission range
N POSITION SW (On/Off) X
switch (N position). E
L POSITION SW (On/Off) X
switch (L position).
Displays the operation status of the transmission range F
P POSITION SW (On/Off) X
switch (P position).
R POSITION SW (On/Off) X
switch (R position). G
• Displays the drive mode status recognized by TCM.
DRIVE MODE STATS (On/Off) • Only vehicle with Integrated Control System are dis-
played. H
• Display the drive mode (SNOW switch status) of Inte-
grated Control System received through CAN commu-
nication.
SNOW MODE (On/Off) I
• Only vehicle with Integrated Control System are dis-
played.
• Display the driving mode (ECO switch status) of Inte- J
ECO MODE (On/Off) nication.
played. K
• Display the driving mode (AUTO switch status) of Inte-
NORMAL MODE (On/Off) nication. L
played.
• Display the driving mode (SPORT switch status) of In-
M
tegrated Control System received through CAN com-
SPORT MODE (On/Off) munication.
played. N
CVT-A (On/Off) — — This monitor item does not use.
CVT-B (On/Off) — — This monitor item does not use.
O
WORK SUPPORT
Item name Description

P
ENGINE BRAKE ADJ. The engine brake level setting can be canceled.
CONFORM CVTF DETERIORTN The CVT fluid deterioration level can be checked.
Engine Brake Adjustment
“ENGINE BRAKE LEVEL”

0: Initial set value (Engine brake level control is activated)
OFF: Engine brake level control is deactivated.
CAUTION:
Mode of “+1”“0”“−1”“−2”“OFF” can be selected by pressing the “UP”“DOWN” on CONSULT screen.
However, do not select mode other than “0” and “OFF”. If the “+1” or “−1” or “–2” is selected, that
might cause the irregular driveability.
Check CVT Fluid Deterioration Date
“CVTF DETERIORATION DATE”

210000 or more:
It is necessary to change CVT fluid.
Less than 210000:
It is not necessary to change CVT fluid.
CAUTION:
Touch “CLEAR” after changing CVT fluid, and then erase “CVTF DETERIORATION DATE”.
ATFTEMP COUNT Conversion Table INFOID:0000000012200899
ATFTEMP COUNT Temperature °C (°F) ATFTEMP COUNT Temperature °C (°F)

4 –30 (–22) 177 90 (194)
8 –20 (–4) 183 95 (203)
13 –10 (14) 190 100 (212)
17 –5 (23) 196 105 (221)
21 0 (32) 201 110 (230)
27 5 (41) 206 115 (239)
32 10 (50) 210 120 (248)
39 15 (59) 214 125 (257)
47 20 (68) 218 130 (266)
55 25 (77) 221 135 (275)
64 30 (86) 224 140 (284)
73 35 (95) 227 145 (293)
83 40 (104) 229 150 (302)
93 45 (113) 231 155 (311)
104 50 (122) 233 160 (320)
114 55 (131) 235 165 (329)
124 60 (140) 236 170 (338)
134 65 (149) 238 175 (347)
143 70 (158) 239 180 (356)
152 75 (167) 241 190 (374)
161 80 (176) 243 200 (392)
169 85 (185) — —
Diagnostic Tool Function INFOID:0000000012200900
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST)

Refer to EC-73, "GST (Generic Scan Tool)".

TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [CVT: RE0F10B]
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A

TCM
Reference Value INFOID:0000000012200901
B
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

NOTE: C
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.) TM

Approximately matches the speedometer
VSP SENSOR During driving
reading.
E
Approximately matches the speedometer
ESTM VSP SIG During driving
reading.
PRI SPEED SEN During driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed.
F
ENG SPEED SIG Engine running Closely matches the tachometer reading.
• After engine warm up
SEC HYDR SEN • Selector lever: “N” position 0.8 V
• At idle G
CVT fluid: Approx. 20°C (68°F) 2.01 – 2.05 V
ATF TEMP SEN CVT fluid: Approx. 50°C (122°F) 1.45 – 1.50 V
H
VIGN SEN Ignition switch: ON 10 – 16 V
Approximately matches the speedometer I
VEHICLE SPEED During driving
reading.
PRI SPEED During driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed.
48 X Approximately matches the speed- J
SEC SPEED During driving
ometer reading.
ENG SPEED Engine running Closely matches the tachometer reading.
K
SLIP REV During driving engine speed − primary speed
GEAR RATIO During driving 2.349 – 0.394
Vehicle stopped 0.00 G L
The value changes to the positive side
During acceleration
G SPEED along with acceleration.
The value changes to the positive side M
During deceleration
along with deceleration.
Released accelerator pedal - Fully depressed acceler-
ACC PEDAL OPEN 0.0/8 – 8.0/8
ator pedal
N
SEC PRESS • Selector lever: “N” position 1.6 MPa
• At idle
O
CVT fluid: Approx. 20°C (68°F) 47
ATFTEMP COUNT* CVT fluid: Approx. 50°C (122°F) 104
CVT fluid: Approx. 80°C (176°F) 161 P
DSR REV During driving
DGEAR RATIO During driving
DSTM STEP During driving 0 step – 182 step
STM STEP During driving 0 step – 182 step

TCM
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
• Engine started
−0.400 MPa
• Vehicle is stopped.
LU PRS • Selector lever: “D” position
• Accelerator pedal position: 1/8 or less 0.400 MPa
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH) or more
• Selector lever: “N” position 0.750 MPa
• At idle
LINE PRS
• Selector lever: “N” position 4.930 – 5.430 MPa
• Depress the accelerator pedal fully
TGT SEC PRESS • Selector lever: “N” position 0.700 MPa
• At idle
ISOLT1 — —
ISOLT2 — —
ISOLT3 — —
SOLMON1 — —
SOLMON2 — —
SOLMON3 — —
Depressed brake pedal On
BRAKE SW
Released brake pedal Off
FULL SW Always Off
Released accelerator pedal On
IDLE SW
Fully depressed accelerator pedal Off
SPORT MODE SW Always Off
Paddle shifter (Down) is pulled On
STRDWNSW
Other than the above Off
Paddle shifter (Up) is pulled On
STRUPSW
Selector lever: - side On
DOWNLVR
Selector lever: + side On
UPLVR
Manual shift gate position (neutral, +side, -side) Off
NONMMODE
Other than the above On
Manual shift gate position (neutral) On
MMODE
INDLRNG Always Off
Selector lever in “D” position On
INDDRNG
When setting selector lever to other positions Off
Selector lever in “N“ position On
INDNRNG
Selector lever in “R” position On
INDRRNG
Selector lever in “P” position On
INDPRNG

TCM
A
Approx. 2 seconds after ignition switch ON On
CVT LAMP
Other conditions Off
SPORT MODE IND Always Off B
In manual mode On
MMODE IND
SMCOIL D During driving Changes On ⇔ Off C
SMCOIL C During driving Changes On ⇔ Off
SMCOIL B During driving Changes On ⇔ Off
TM
SMCOIL A During driving Changes On ⇔ Off
Selector lever: “P”, “N” positions On
LUSEL SOL OUT Wait at least for 5 seconds with the selector lever in E
Off
“R”, “D” positions
Selector lever: “P”, “N” positions On
LUSEL SOL MON Wait at least for 5 seconds with the selector lever in F
Off
“R”, “D” positions
ESP is activated On
VDC ON G
TCS is activated On
TCS ON
Other conditions Off H
ABS is activated On
ABS ON
ACC ON Always Off I
Selector lever in “N” or “P” position N·P
RANGE Selector lever in “R” position R
J
Selector lever in “D” position D
Gear position: M1 1
Gear position: M2 2 K
Gear position: M3 3
Gear position: M4 4
M GEAR POS L
Gear position: M5 5
Gear position: M6 6
Gear position: M7 7 M
Gear position: M8 8
Selector lever in “D” position On
D POSITION SW N
Other than the above position Off
Selector lever in “N“ position On
N POSITION SW
Other than the above position Off O
L POSITION SW Always Off
Selector lever in “P” position On
P POSITION SW
Other than the above position Off P
Selector lever in “R” position On
R POSITION SW
Other than the above position Off
Integrated Control System: NORMAL mode NORMAL
DRIVE MODE STATS Integrated Control System: ECO mode ECO
Integrated Control System: SPORT mode SPORT

TCM
Integrated Control System: SPORT mode On
SPORT MODE
Integrated Control System: NORMAL mode On
NORMAL MODE
Integrated Control System: ECO mode On
ECO MODE
SNOW MODE Always Off
CVT-A — —
CVT-B — —
*: Means CVT fluid temperature. Convert numerical values for actual fluid temperature °C (°F). Refer to TM-194, "ATFTEMP COUNT
Conversion Table".
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JSDIA1968ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal No.
Description
(wire color) Condition Value (Approx.)
+ − Signal name Input/Output
Selector lever in “R”
10 – 16 V
1 position
Ground R RANGE SW Input
(G) Other than the above
0V
position
Selector lever in “N”
10 – 16 V
2 Ignition position
Ground N RANGE SW Input
(Y) switch ON Other than the above
0V
position
Selector lever in “D”
10 – 16 V
3 positions
Ground D RANGE SW Input
(W) Other than the above
0V
position
4*1 — — — — —
(V)
5
Ground Ground Output Always 0V
(B)
8
— CLOCK (SEL2) — — —
(BR)
9 CHIP SELECT
— — — —
(G) (SEL1)
10
— DATA I/O (SEL3) — — —
(W)

TCM
Terminal No.
Description
(wire color) Condition Value (Approx.) A
Selector lever in “P”
10 – 16 V B
11 Ignition position
Ground P RANGE SW Input
(L) switch ON Other than the above
0V
position
When CVT fluid tem- C
perature is 20°C 2.01 – 2.05 V
(68°F)
When CVT fluid tem- TM
13 CVT fluid temper- Ignition
Ground Input perature is 50°C 1.45 – 1.50 V
(SB) ature sensor switch ON
(122°F)
When CVT fluid tem- E
perature is 80°C 0.90 – 0.94 V
(176°F)
15 Secondary pres- • Selector lever: “N” position
(P)
Ground
sure sensor
Input
• Idle speed
0.8 V F
25
Ground Sensor ground Input Always 0V
(Y)
G
26 Sensor power Ignition switch ON 5.0 V
Ground Output
(LG) supply Ignition switch OFF 0V
27 H
Ground Step motor D Output Within 2 seconds after ignition switch 10.0 msec
(GR)
ON, the time measurement by using
28 the pulse width measurement func-
Ground Step motor C Output 30.0 msec
(V) tion (Hi level) of CONSULT.*2 I
29 CAUTION:
Ground Step motor B Output Connect the diagnosis data link ca- 10.0 msec
(BG)
ble to the vehicle diagnosis con-
30 nector. J
Ground Step motor A Output 30.0 msec
(R)
31
— CAN-L Input/Output — —
(P)
K
32
— CAN-H Input/Output — —
(L)
720 Hz
L
33
Ground
Primary speed
Input • Selector lever: “M1” position
(BG) sensor • While driving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) M
N
JPDIA0819ZZ
480 Hz
O
34
Ground
Secondary speed
Input • Selector lever: “M1” position
(R) sensor • While driving at 20 km/h (12 MPH)
P
JPDIA0901ZZ
Selector lever in “P”

10 – 16 V
or “N” positions
37 Lock-up select Ignition Wait at least for 5
Ground Output
(L) solenoid valve switch ON seconds with the se-
0V
lector lever in “R” or
“D” positions.

TCM
Terminal No.
Description
(wire color) Condition Value (Approx.)
When CVT performs
Torque converter When vehicle 6.0 V
38 lock-up
Ground clutch solenoid Output cruises in “D”
(G) When CVT does not
valve position 1.5 V
perform lock-up
Release your foot
from the accelerator 5.0 – 7.0 V
Secondary pres- pedal.
39
Ground sure solenoid Output
(W) Press the accelera-
valve
tor pedal all the way 3.0 – 4.0 V
“P” or “N” po- down.
sition idle Release your foot
from the accelerator 5.0 – 7.0 V
40 Line pressure so- pedal.
Ground Output
(Y) lenoid valve Press the accelera-
tor pedal all the way 1.0 V
down.
42
Ground Ground Output Always 0V
(B)
Ignition
— 10 – 16 V
46 Ignition power switch ON
Ground Input
(LG) supply Ignition
— 0V
switch OFF
Battery power
47 supply
Ground Input Always 10 – 16 V
(BG) (memory back-
up)
Ignition
— 10 – 16 V
48 Ignition power switch ON
Ground Input
(Y) supply Ignition
— 0V
switch OFF
*1: This harness is not used.
*2: A circuit tester cannot be used to test this item.
Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000012200902
The TCM has an electrical fail-safe mode. In this mode TCM is operator even if there is an error in a main
electronic control input/output signal circuit.
DESCRIPTION
When a malfunction is detected in each sensor, switch, solenoid or others, this function provides control to
minimize reduction of drivability so that durability of transmission assembly can be acquired.

• Start is slow
P0703 —
• Position indicator on combination meter is not dis-
played
P0705 — • Start is slow
• Acceleration at high load state is slow

TCM
A
Start is slow
more
• Start is slow
Engine coolant temperature when engine starts is 10°C (50°F) or B
less
Engine coolant temperature when engine starts is −35°C (−31°F)
Vehicle speed is not increased
or less C
P0715 — eration TM
• Start is slow
• Acceleration is slow E
P0720 —
eration
F

• Selector shock is large G
P0740 —
• Start is slow H
A malfunction is detected • Acceleration is slow
P0746
• Start is difficult
I
Function is excessively reduced after a malfunction is detected • Drive is difficult
P0778 — Vehicle speed is not increased
J
P0826 — Manual mode is not activated
• Start is slow
P0840 —
K
• Start is slow
P0841 —
• Start is slow L
P0845 —
• Start is slow
P0868 —
M
• Start is slow
P1701 —
P1705 —
• Lock-up is not performed N
• Start is slow
P1709 —
• Shift position indicator (P, N) is not displayed, or is O
displayed with delay.
P1722 — Lock-up is not activated in coast state
P

TCM
A malfunction is detected in primary pulley speed sensor side eration
A malfunction is detected in secondary pulley speed sensor
eration
P1726 — Acceleration is slow
P1740 —
A malfunction is detected in low side (when vehicle is stopped)
A malfunction is detected in high side (during driving) • Acceleration is slow
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000012200903
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
Priority Detected items (DTC) Reference

P1709 INCOMPLETED DATA WRITING TM-285, "DTC Logic"
U0100 LOST COMM (ECM A) TM-235, "DTC Logic"
1
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT TM-236, "DTC Logic"
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) TM-237, "DTC Logic"
P0725 ENGINE SPEED TM-254, "DTC Logic"
2 P1705 TP SENSOR TM-284, "DTC Logic"
P1726 THROTTLE CONTROL SIG TM-290, "DTC Logic"

TCM
Priority Detected items (DTC) Reference
A
P0703 BRAKE SWITCH B TM-238, "DTC Logic"
P0705 T/M RANGE SENSOR A TM-241, "DTC Logic"
P0710 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A TM-244, "DTC Logic" B
P0715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A TM-248, "DTC Logic"
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR TM-251, "DTC Logic"
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER TM-255, "DTC Logic" C
P0745 PC SOLENOID A TM-260, "DTC Logic"
3
P0778 PC SOLENOID B TM-266, "DTC Logic"
TM
P0826 UP/DOWN SHIFT SWITCH TM-268, "DTC Logic"
P0840 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW A TM-274, "DTC Logic"
P1701 TCM TM-281, "DTC Logic" E
P1722 VEHICLE SPEED TM-287, "DTC Logic"
P1740 SLCT SOLENOID TM-291, "DTC Logic"
F
P1777 STEP MOTOR TM-293, "DTC Logic"
P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER TM-258, "DTC Logic"
P0746 PC SOLENOID A TM-262, "DTC Logic" G
4 P0841 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW A TM-277, "DTC Logic"
H
P0868 FLUID PRESS LOW TM-279, "DTC Logic"
P1723 SPEED SENSOR TM-288, "DTC Logic"
P1778 STEP MOTOR TM-296, "DTC Logic" I
DTC Index INFOID:0000000012200904
NOTE: J
If multiple malfunction codes are detected at the same time, check each code according to the "DTC check pri-
ority list". TM-202, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart".
K
DTC
Items
“ENGINE” with CONSULT or “TRANSMISSION” with Reference
(CONSULT screen terms)
* CONSULT L
GST
— P0703 BRAKE SWITCH B TM-238
P0705 P0705 T/M RANGE SENSOR A TM-241
M
P0710 P0710 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A TM-244
P0715 P0715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A TM-248
P0720 P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR TM-251 N
— P0725 ENGINE SPEED TM-254
P0740 P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER TM-255
P0744 P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER TM-258 O
P0745 P0745 PC SOLENOID A TM-260
P0746 P0746 PC SOLENOID A TM-262
P
P0776 P0776 PC SOLENOID B TM-264
P0778 P0778 PC SOLENOID B TM-266
— P0826 UP/DOWN SHIFT SWITCH TM-268
P0840 P0840 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW A TM-274
— P0841 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW A TM-277

TCM
DTC
Items
“ENGINE” with CONSULT or “TRANSMISSION” with Reference
GST* CONSULT
— P0868 FLUID PRESS LOW TM-279
— P1701 TCM TM-281
— P1705 TP SENSOR TM-284
— P1709 INCOMPLETED DATA WRITING TM-285
— P1722 VEHICLE SPEED TM-287
— P1723 SPEED SENSOR TM-288
— P1726 THROTTLE CONTROL SIG TM-290
P1740 P1740 SLCT SOLENOID TM-291
P1777 P1777 STEP MOTOR TM-293
P1778 P1778 STEP MOTOR TM-296
U0100 U0100 LOST COMM (ECM A) TM-235
— U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT TM-236
— U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) TM-237
*: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [CVT: RE0F10B]
WIRING DIAGRAM A
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000012200905
B
TM
JRDWC6631GB

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
JRDWC6632GB

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
TM
JRDWC6633GB

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
JRDWC6634GB

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
TM
JRDWC6635GB

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
JRDWC6636GB

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
TM
JRDWC6637GB

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
JRDWC6638GB

CVT SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A
TM
P
JRDWC6639GB

JRDWC6640GB

TM
JRDWC6641GB

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [CVT: RE0F10B]
BASIC INSPECTION
Work Flow INFOID:0000000012200907
INTRODUCTION
The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, transmission range switch and provides shift con-
trol or lock-up control via CVT solenoid valves.
The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal
sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the
CVT system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capa-
ble of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store mal-
functions in its memory.
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the
operation of the CVT system. The CVT system must be in good
operating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve mal-
function, etc.
SAT631IB
It is much more difficult to diagnose an error that occurs intermit-

tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent errors are caused
by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful
checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of
good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the errors. A road test
with CONSULT (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be per-
formed. Follow the “DETAILED FLOW”.
SAT632I
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a

customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such errors, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Work Sheet” as shown on
the example (Refer to TM-217) should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” errors first. This will
help troubleshoot driveability errors on an electronically controlled
engine vehicle.
Also check related Service bulletins.
SEF234G
DETAILED FLOW
1.COLLECT THE INFORMATION FROM THE CUSTOMER
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred) using diagnosis worksheet. Refer to TM-217, "Diagnostic Work Sheet".
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SYMPTOM 1
Check the following items based on the information obtained from the customer.
• Fail-safe. Refer to TM-200, "Fail-Safe".
• CVT fluid inspection. Refer to TM-314, "Inspection".
• Line pressure test. Refer to TM-228, "Inspection and Judgment".

• Stall test. Refer to TM-226, "Inspection and Judgment".
A
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DTC B
1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected.
• Record DTC.
C
• Erase DTC. Refer to TM-188, "Diagnosis Description".
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4. TM
NO >> GO TO 5.
4.PERFORM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the displayed DTC. E
>> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATIOM PROCEDURE” for the displayed DTC.

Is DTC detected? G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK SYMPTOM 2 H
Confirm the symptom described by the customer.

Is any malfunction present? I
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> INSPECTION END
7.RODE TEST J
Perform “RODE TEST”. Refer to TM-230, "Description".
K
>> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK SYMPTOM 3
Confirm the symptom described by the customer. L
Is any malfunction present?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> INSPECTION END M
Diagnostic Work Sheet INFOID:0000000012200908
N
INFORMATION FROM CUSTOMER
KEY POINTS
• WHAT..... Vehicle & CVT model O
• WHEN..... Date, Frequencies
• WHERE..... Road conditions
• HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms
P
Customer name MR/MS Model & Year VIN
Trans. Model Engine Mileage
Malfunction Date Manuf. Date In Service Date
Frequency Continuous Intermittent ( times a day)

Symptoms Vehicle does not move. ( Any position Particular position)
No shift
Lock-up malfunction
Shift shock or slip ( N → D N→R Lock-up Any drive position)
Noise or vibration
No pattern select
Others
( )
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) Continuously lit Not lit
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
1 Read the item on cautions concerning fail-safe and understand the customer's complaint. TM-200
CVT fluid inspection, stall test and line pressure test
CVT fluid inspection
Leak (Repair leak location.) TM-314
State
Amount
2
Stall test
Torque converter one-way clutch Engine
Reverse brake Line pressure low TM-226,
Forward clutch Primary pulley TM-228
Steel belt Secondary pulley
Line pressure inspection - Suspected part:
3 Perform self-diagnosis.
TM-190
Enter checks for detected items.
Perform road test. TM-230
4-1. Check before engine is started TM-230
4
4-2. Check at idle TM-230
4-3. Cruise test TM-231
After completing all rode test, check malfunction phenomena to repair or replace malfunctioning part. Refer to TM-303,
"Symptom Table".
5 Drive vehicle to check that the malfunction phenomenon has been resolved.
TM-188,
6 Erase the results of the self-diagnosis from the TCM and the ECM.
TM-190

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCM
A
Description INFOID:0000000012200909
When replacing the TCM, perform the following work. For work procedure, refer to TM-219, "Work Procedure". B
TCM PROGRAMMING
• Since vehicle specifications are not yet written in a new TCM, it is necessary to write them with CONSULT.
CAUTION: C
When replacing TCM, save TCM data on CONSULT before removing TCM.
LOADING AND STORING OF CALIBRATION DATA
• The TCM acquires calibration data (individual characteristic value) of each solenoid that is stored in the TM
ROM assembly (in the control valve). This enables the TCM to perform accurate control. After the TCM is
replaced, check that the calibration data is correctly loaded and stored.
CAUTION: E
When replacing TCM and transaxle assembly simultaneously, replace transaxle assembly first and
then replace TCM.
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000012200910 F
CAUTION:
Immediately after TCM is replaced or after control valve or transaxle assembly is replaced (after TCM
initialization is complete), self-diagnosis result of “P1701”, “P1709” may be displayed. In this case, G
erase self-diagnosis result using CONSULT. After erasing self-diagnosis result, perform DTC “P1701”,
“P1709” reproduction procedure and check that malfunction is not detected. Refer to TM-281, "DTC
Logic" (P1701), TM-285, "DTC Logic" (P1709). H
1.CHECK NEW TCM PART NUMBER
Check new TCM part number to see whether it is blank TCM or not.
NOTE: I
• Part number of blank TCM is 310F6-XXXXX.
• Check the part number when ordering TCM or with the one included in the label on the container box.
Is new TCM a blank TCM? J
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
2.SAVE TCM DATA (VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS) K
NOTE:
Save necessary data stored in TCM in CONSULT according to the following instructions: L
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect all of disconnected connectors.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. M
4. Select “Re/programming, Configuration”.
5. Select “AT/CVT”.
NOTE: N
If “AT/CVT” is not displayed and TCM data cannot be saved on CONSULT, GO TO 3.
6. Select “Programming”.
7. Save TCM data on CONSULT according to the CONSULT display.
O
>> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE THE TCM P
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds.
2. Replace the TCM. Refer to TM-328, "Removal and Installation".
>> GO TO 4.
4.LOAD CALIBRATION DATA
1. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check that “P” is displayed on shift position indicator on combination meter.
NOTE:
Displayed approximately 1 – 2 seconds after the selector lever is moved to the “P” position.
Does the shift position indicator display “P”?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
• Harness between the TCM and the ROM assembly inside the transaxle assembly is open or shorted.
• Disconnected, loose, bent, collapsed, or otherwise abnormal connector housing terminals
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
6.STORE CALIBRATION DATA
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
Does the shift position indicator display “P” at the same time when turning ON the ignition switch?
YES -1 (TCM is blank)>>GO TO 7.
YES -2 (TCM is not blank)>>WORK END
NO >> Check harness between battery and TCM harness connector terminal. Refer to TM-281, "Diagno-
sis Procedure".
7.WRITE TCM DATA (VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS)
NOTE:
Write data saved in CONSULT into a new TCM according to the following instructions:
With CONSULT
2. Perform programming according to the CONSULT display.
>> WORK END

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL VALVE OR TRANSAXLE
ASSEMBLY
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL VALVE OR TRAN-
A
SAXLE ASSEMBLY
B
When replacing the transaxle assembly/control valve, perform the following work. For work procedure, refer to
.TM-219, "Work Procedure".
C
ERASING, LOADING AND STORING OF CALIBRATION DATA
• The TCM acquires calibration data (individual characteristic value) of each solenoid that is stored in the
ROM assembly (in the control valve). This enables the TCM to perform accurate control. For this reason,
after the transaxle assembly/control valve is replaced, it is necessary to erase the calibration data previously TM
stored in TCM, to load new calibration data, and to store them.
ERASING OF CVT FLUID DEGRADATION LEVEL DATA
• TCM records the degradation level of the CVT fluid calculated from the vehicle driving status. Therefore, if E
the transaxle assembly/control valve is replaced, it is necessary to erase the CVT fluid degradation level
data recorded by TCM.
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000012200912
F
CAUTION:
Immediately after TCM is replaced or after control valve or transaxle assembly is replaced (after TCM G
initialization is complete), self-diagnosis result of “P1701”, “P1709” may be displayed. In this case,
erase self-diagnosis result using CONSULT. After erasing self-diagnosis result, perform DTC “P1701”,
“P1709” reproduction procedure and check that malfunction is not detected. Refer to TM-281, "DTC
H
Logic" (P1701), TM-285, "DTC Logic" (P1709).
1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK
With CONSULT I
1. Start the engine.
CAUTION:
Never drive the vehicle. J
2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Select “ATFTEMP COUNT”.
Is “ATFTEMP COUNT” 47 [equivalent to 20°C (68°F)] or more?
K
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> 1. Warm up the transaxle assembly until “ATFTEMP COUNT” reaches “47” [equivalent to 20°C
(68°F)] or more.
2. GO TO 2. L
2.PERFORM TCM INITIALIZATION

With CONSULT M
CAUTION:
N
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
4. Shift selector lever to “R” position.
5. Depress slightly the accelerator pedal (Pedal angle: 2.0/8) while depressing the brake pedal. O
6. Select “Erase” with step 5.
7. Release brake pedal and accelerator pedal.
8. Select “CALIB DATA” in “TRANSMISSION”. P
9. Check that “CALIB DATA” value is as shown as in the following table.
Item name Display value

UNIT CLB ID 1 00
UNIT CLB ID 2 00
UNIT CLB ID 3 00

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL VALVE OR TRANSAXLE
ASSEMBLY
Item name Display value
UNIT CLB ID 4 00
UNIT CLB ID 5 00
UNIT CLB ID 6 00
Is “CALIB DATA” value it?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 1.
1. Shift selector lever to “P” position.
NOTE:
It indicates approximately 1 – 2 seconds after shifting the selector lever to “P” position.
Does shift position indicator display “P”?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
• Power supply and ground of TCM. (Refer to TM-281, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
YES >> GO TO 1.
YES >> GO TO 6.
sis Procedure".
6.ERASE CVT FLUID DEGRADATION LEVEL DATA
With CONSULT
1. Select “WORK SUPPORT” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Select “CONFORM CVTF DETERIORTN”.
3. Touch “Clear”.
>> WORK END

CVT FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
A
Cleaning INFOID:0000000012200913
Whenever an automatic transaxle is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, the CVT fluid cooler mounted in the B
radiator must be inspected and cleaned.
Metal debris and friction material, if present, can be trapped or be deposited in the CVT fluid cooler. This
debris can contaminate the newly serviced CVT or, in severe cases, can block or restrict the flow of CVT fluid.
In either case, malfunction of the newly serviced CVT may occur. C
Debris, if present, may deposit as CVT fluid enters the cooler inlet. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler
through the cooler outlet in order to flush out any built up debris.
CVT FLUID COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE TM
1. Position an oil pan under the transaxle's inlet and outlet cooler hoses.
2. Identify the inlet and outlet fluid cooler hoses. E
3. Disconnect the fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the
steel cooler tubes or bypass valve.
NOTE:
Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose F
remains on the tube fitting.
4. Allow any CVT fluid that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into
the oil pan. G
H
SCIA4421E
5. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission I

Cooler Cleaner into the cooler outlet hose.
CAUTION:
• Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the
Transmission Cooler Cleaner. J
• Spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner only with adequate
ventilation.
• Avoid contact with eyes and skin. K
• Never breath vapors or spray mist.
6. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmis-
sion Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet SCIA4422E L
hose until CVT fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 sec-
onds.
7. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.
M
8. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of the cooler
outlet hose.
9. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 to 9 kg/cm2 (70 to 130 psi) N
through the cooler outlet hose for 10 seconds to force out any
remaining CVT fluid.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times. O
11. Position an oil pan under the banjo bolts that connect the CVT
fluid cooler steel lines to the transaxle.
12. Remove the banjo bolts. SCIA4423E
P
13. Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the tran-
saxle by spraying Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds.
14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 to 9 kg/cm2 (70 to 130 psi) through each steel line from the cooler
side back toward the transaxle for 10 seconds to force out any remaining CVT fluid.
15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines.
16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings.

17. Perform “CVT FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE”.
CVT FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Insufficient cleaning of the cooler inlet hose exterior may lead to inaccurate debris identification.
2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler inlet hose.
3. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission
CAUTION:
Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
ventilation.
• Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
sion Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet SCIA4421E
onds.
5. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the
cooler inlet hose.
SCIA4424E
7. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of cooler outlet
hose.
8. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 to 9 kg/cm2 (70 to 130 psi)
through the cooler outlet hose to force any remaining CVT fluid
into the coffee filter.
9. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler inlet hose.
10. Perform “CVT FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE”.
SCIA4425E
CVT FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1. Inspect the coffee filter for debris.
a. If small metal debris less than 1 mm (0.040 in) in size or metal
powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal
debris is found, the CVT fluid cooler/radiator can be reused and
the procedure is ended.
SCIA2967E

b. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1 mm
(0.040 in) in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in A
the coffee filter, the fluid cooler is not serviceable. The radiator/
fluid cooler must be replaced and the inspection procedure is
ended.
B
SCIA7031E
TM
CVT FLUID COOLER FINAL INSPECTION
After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components.
E

STALL TEST
STALL TEST
Inspection and Judgment INFOID:0000000012200914
INSPECTION
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.
2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the
CVT fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Inspect the
amount of CVT fluid. Replenish if necessary.
SAT647B
3. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
4. Install a tachometer where it can be seen by driver during test.
NOTE:
It is good practice to mark the point of specified engine rpm on
indicator.
5. Start engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D”
position.
SCIA7463E
6. While holding down the foot brake, gradually press down the
accelerator pedal.
7. Quickly read off the stall speed, and then quickly remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
Never hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 sec-
onds during this test.
Stall speed : Refer to TM-353, "Stall Speed".

8. Move the selector lever to the “N” position. SAT514G
9. Cool down the CVT fluid.

CAUTION:
Run the engine at idle for at least 1 minute.
10. Repeat steps 6 through 9 with selector lever in “R” position.
JUDGMENT

STALL TEST
Selector lever position A

Expected problem location
“D” “R”
H O • Forward clutch
O H • Reverse brake
B
L L • Engine and torque converter one-way clutch

Stall rotation
• Line pressure low C
• Primary pulley
H H
• Secondary pulley
• Steel belt
O: Stall speed within standard value position. TM
H: Stall speed is higher than standard value.
L: Stall speed is lower than standard value.
E

LINE PRESSURE TEST
LINE PRESSURE TEST
Inspection and Judgment INFOID:0000000012200915
INSPECTION
Line Pressure Test Port
A : Line pressure test port
JSDIA2475ZZ
Line Pressure Test Procedure

1. Inspect the amount of engine oil and replenish if necessary.
2. Drive the car for about 10 minutes to warm it up so that the CVT fluid reaches in the range of 50 to 80°C
(122 to 176°F), then inspect the amount of CVT fluid and replenish if necessary.
NOTE:
The CVT fluid temperature rises in the range of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F) during 10 minutes of driv-
ing.
3. After warming up CVT, remove the oil pressure detection plug
and install the joint pipe adapter (SST: KV31103600) (A),
adapter (SST: 25054000) (B), oil pressure gauge set (commer-
cial service tool) (C).
CAUTION:
When using the oil pressure gauge, be sure to use the O-
ring attached to the oil pressure detection plug.
JPDIA0467ZZ
4. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
SCIA7463E

LINE PRESSURE TEST
5. Start the engine, and then measure the line pressure at both idle
and the stall speed. A
CAUTION:
• Keep the brake pedal pressed all the way down during
measurement.
B
• When measuring the line pressure at the stall speed, refer
to TM-226, "Inspection and Judgment".
Line pressure : Refer to TM-353, "Line Pres- C

sure".
6. After the measurements are complete, install the oil pressure
SAT493G
TM
detection plug and tighten to the specified torque below.
: 7.5 N·m (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb)

E
CAUTION:
• Never reuse O-ring.
• Apply CVT fluid to O-ring. F
JUDGMENT
Judgment Possible cause G

Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and low oil pump output.
For example
Low for all positions • Oil pump wear H
(“P”, “R”, “N”, “D”) • Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking or spring fatigue
• Oil strainer ⇒ oil pump ⇒ pressure regulator valve passage oil leak
• Engine idle speed too low
Only low for a spe- Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after
I
Idle speed cific position the pressure is distributed by the manual valve.
Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the line pressure adjustment func-
tion. J
For example
High • Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction
• CVT fluid temperature sensor malfunction
• Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking in OFF state, filter clog, cut line) K
• Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the pressure adjustment function.
Line pressure does For example L
not rise higher than • Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction
the line pressure for • TCM malfunction
idle. • Line pressure solenoid malfunction (shorting, sticking in ON state)
• Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking M
Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and malfunction in the pres-
Stall speed
The pressure rises, sure adjustment function.
but does not enter For example N
the standard posi- • Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction
tion. • Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking, filter clog)
• Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
O
Only low for a spe- Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after
cific position the pressure is distributed by the manual valve.

ROAD TEST
ROAD TEST
DESCRIPTION
• The purpose of the test is to determine overall performance of CVT
and analyze causes of problems.
• The road test consists of the following three parts:
1. “Check Before Engine Is Started” TM-230.
2. “Check at Idle” TM-230.
3. “Cruise Test” TM-231.
SAT786A
• Before road test, familiarize yourself with all test procedures and
items to check.
• Perform tests on all items until specified symptom is found. Trou-
bleshoot items the malfunctioning items after road test.
SAT496G
Check before Engine Is Started INFOID:0000000012200917
1.CHECK CVT INDICATOR LAMP

1. Park vehicle on flat surface.
2. Move selector lever to “P” position.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Wait at least 5 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
Is shift position indicator activated for about 2 seconds?
YES >> 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Perform self-diagnosis and note NG items.
Refer to TM-190, "CONSULT Function".
3. Go to TM-230, "Check at Idle".
NO >> Stop “Road Test”. Refer to TM-303, "Symptom Table".
Check at Idle INFOID:0000000012200918
1.CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE

2. Move selector lever to “P” or “N” position.
4. Turn ignition switch to “START” position.
Is engine started?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE
2. Move selector lever to “D”, “M” or “R” position.
3. Turn ignition switch to “START” position.

ROAD TEST
Is engine started?
YES >> Stop “Road Test”. Refer to TM-303, "Symptom Table". A
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK “P” POSITION FUNCTION
B
3. Release parking brake.
4. Push vehicle forward or backward. C
5. Apply parking brake.
Does vehicle move forward or backward?
YES >> Refer to TM-303, "Symptom Table". Continue “Road Test”. TM
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK “N” POSITION FUNCTION E
1. Start engine.
2. Move selector lever to “N” position.
3. Release parking brake.
F
Does vehicle move forward or backward?
YES >> Refer to TM-303, "Symptom Table". Continue “Road Test”.
NO >> GO TO 5.
G
5.CHECK SHIFT SHOCK
1. Apply foot brake.
2. Move selector lever to “R” position. H
Is there large shock when changing from “N” to “R” position?
YES >> Refer to TM-303, "Symptom Table". Continue “Road Test”.
NO >> GO TO 6. I
6.CHECK “R” POSITION FUNCTION
Release foot brake for several seconds. J
Does vehicle creep backward when foot brake is released?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Refer toTM-303, "Symptom Table". Continue “Road Test”. K
7.CHECK “D” POSITION FUNCTION
Move selector lever to “D” position and check if vehicle creeps forward.
L
Does vehicle creep forward in all positions?
YES >> Go to TM-231, "Cruise Test".
M
Cruise Test INFOID:0000000012200919
1.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS — PART 1 N

1. Drive vehicle for approximately 10 minutes to warm engine oil and CVT fluid up to operating temperature.
CVT fluid operating temperature: 50 – 80°C (122 – 176°F) O

4. Start engine. P
5. Move selector lever to “D” position.

ROAD TEST
6. Accelerate vehicle to 2/8-way throttle depressing accelerator
pedal constantly.
Read vehicle speed and engine speed. Refer to TM-353,
"Shift Characteristics".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refer to TM-303, "Symptom Table". Continue “Road
Test”.
SCIA6644E
2.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS — PART 2

2. Move selector lever to “D” position.
3. Accelerate vehicle to full depression depressing accelerator
pedal constantly.
Read vehicle speed and engine speed.Refer to TM-353,
"Shift Characteristics".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refer to TM-303, "Symptom Table". Continue “Road
Test”.
SCIA4366E
3.CHECK MANUAL MODE FUNCTION

Move to manual mode from “D” position.
Does it switch to manual mode?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Refer to TM-303, "Symptom Table". Continue “Road Test”.
4.CHECK SHIFT-UP FUNCTION
During manual mode driving, is upshift from M1 → M2 → M3 → M4 → M5 → M6 performed?
Read the gear position. Refer to TM-190, "CONSULT Function".
Is upshifting correctly performed?
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK SHIFT-DOWN FUNCTION
During manual mode driving, is downshift from M6 → M5 → M4 → M3 → M2 → M1 performed?
Read the gear position. Refer to TM-190, "CONSULT Function".
Is downshifting correctly performed?
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK ENGINE BRAKE FUNCTION
Check engine brake.
Does engine braking effectively reduce speed in M1 position?
YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to TM-190, "CONSULT Function".
NO >> Refer to TM-303, "Symptom Table". Then continue trouble diagnosis.

CVT POSITION
CVT POSITION
A
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000012200920
INSPECTION B
1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop).
2. Make sure that selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed.
Also make sure that selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed. C
3. Move the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle.
4. Confirm the selector lever stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all
the positions. Check that the actual position of the selector lever matches the position shown by the shift TM
position indicator and the manual lever on the transaxle.
5. The method of operating the selector lever to individual posi-
tions correctly should be as shown. E
6. When selector button is pressed in “P”, “R” or “N” position with-
out applying forward/backward force to selector lever, check but-
ton operation for sticking. F
7. Confirm the back-up lamps illuminate only when selector lever is
placed in the “R” position. Confirm the back-up lamps do not illu-
minate when the selector lever is pushed toward the “R” position G
when in the “P” or “N” position.
8. Confirm the engine can only be started with the selector lever in
the “P” and “N” positions. JPDIA0344GB
H
9. Make sure transaxle is locked completely in “P” position.
10. When selector lever is set to manual shift gate, make sure that manual mode is displayed on combination
meter. I
Shift selector lever to “+” and “–” sides, and check that set shift position changes.
ADJUSTMENT
1. Place selector lever in “P” position. J
CAUTION:
Turn wheels more than 1/4 rotations and apply the park lock.
2. Loosen nut (A) and place manual lever (B) in “P” position. K
CAUTION:
Never apply any force to the manual lever.
3. Tighten nut. Refer to TM-319, "Removal and Installation". L
CAUTION:
Fix the manual lever when tightening.
M
JSDIA2396ZZ N

CVT FLUID
CVT FLUID
Changing INFOID:0000000012200921
CAUTION:
Replace drain plug gasket with new ones at the final stage of the operation when installing.
1. Remove drain plug from oil pan.
2. Remove drain plug gasket from drain plug.
3. Install drain plug gasket to drain plug.
CAUTION:
Never reuse drain plug gasket.
4. Install drain plug to oil pan.
Drain plug – tightening torque : Refer to TM-330, "Exploded View".

5. Fill CVT fluid from CVT fluid charging pipe to the specified level.
Recommended fluid and fluid capacity : Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
CAUTION:
• Use only recommended CVT fluid. Never mix with other fluid.
• Using CVT fluid other than recommended CVT fluid will deteriorate in driveability and CVT dura-
bility, and may damage the CVT, which is not covered by the warranty.
• When filling CVT fluid, take care not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust.
• Sufficiently shake the container of CVT fluid before using.
• Delete CVT fluid deterioration date with CONSULT after changing CVT fluid.
6. With the engine warmed up, drive the vehicle in an urban area.
NOTE:
When ambient temperature is 20°C (68°F), it takes about 10 minutes for the CVT fluid to warm up to 50 to
80°C (122 to 176°F).
7. Check CVT fluid level and condition.
8. Repeat steps 1 to 5 if CVT fluid has been contaminated.
9. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION” using CONSULT.
11. Select “Erase”.

U0100 LOST COMMUNICATION (ECM A)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CVT: RE0F10B]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000012200922
B
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

C
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detection condition Possible causes
When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is un- • ECM
Lost Communication With able to receive the CAN communications • Harness or connector
U0100 TM
ECM/PCM A signal from ECM continuously for 2 sec- (CAN communication line is open or
onds or more. shorted)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E

If another “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test. F
>> GO TO 2.
G
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine and wait for at least 5 seconds.
2. Check the first trip DTC. H
Is “U0100” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-235, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END I
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012200923
For the diagnosis procedure, refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". J

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are con-
nected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H and CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with
less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When the ignition switch is ON, TCM cannot Harness or connector
U1000 CAN Communication Line send the CAN communication signal continu- (CAN communication line is open or
ously for 2 seconds or more. shorted)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
2. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
For the diagnosis procedure, refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
A
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- B
with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are con-
nected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H and CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with C
less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

E
TCM Communication Mal- When detecting error during the initial diagno-
U1010 TCM
function sis of CAN controller to TCM.
F
1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK G
H
>> GO TO 2.
I
With CONSULT
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. J
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”.
Is “U1010” detected? K
L
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT M

Refer to GI-45, "Intermittent Incident".
YES >> Replace the TCM. Refer to TM-328, "Removal and Installation". N
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

P0703 BRAKE SWITCH B
BCM detects ON/OFF state of the stop lamp switch and transmits the data to the CVT control unit via CAN
communication by converting the data to a signal.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• Harness or connectors
- (Stop lamp switch, and BCM circuit are
• TCM detects malfunction in CAN communi-
open or shorted.)
cation between BCM.
P0703 Brake Switch B Circuit - (CAN communication line is open or
• TCM detects a state that ON/OFF of stop
shorted.)
lamp switch signal is not switched.
• Stop lamp switch
• BCM

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
3. Select “VEHICLE SPEED”.
4. Drive the vehicle.
5. Maintain the following condition for 10 seconds or more.
VEHICLE SPEED : 30 km/h (19 MPH)

6. Stop the vehicle.
Is “P0703” detected?
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector.
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch harness connector terminal and ground.
+
Stop lamp switch − Voltage
Connector Terminal
E102 1 Ground Battery voltage

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 6. A
2.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND BCM (PART 1)
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
B
2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector terminal and BCM harness connector ter-
minal.
Stop lamp switch BCM

C
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E102 2 M68 9 Existed TM
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. E
3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND BCM (PART 2)
Check short circuit in harness between stop lamp switch harness connector terminal 2 and BCM harness con-
F
nector terminal 9.
YES >> GO TO 4.
G
4.CHECK INSTALLATION POSITION OF STOP LAMP SWITCH
Check stop lamp switch mounting position. Refer to BR-9, "Inspection and Adjustment". H
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Adjust stop lamp switch mounting position. I
5.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-239, "Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)". J
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-45, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace stop lamp switch. K
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between battery and stop lamp switch connector terminal 1. Refer to L
PG-12, "Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY -".
• Battery
• 10A fuse [No.38, located in fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-80, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement". M
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. N
Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) INFOID:0000000012200933
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH O
Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals.

P
Stop lamp switch
Condition Continuity
Terminal
Depressed brake pedal Existed
1–2
Released brake pedal Not existed
NO >> Replace the stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-20, "Exploded View".

P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A
A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

• Harness or connectors C
Transmission Range Sensor • Range signal is not input to TCM. (Transmission range switches circuit is
P0705
A Circuit (PRNDL Input) • 2 or more position signals are input to TCM. open or shorted.)
• Transmission range switch
TM
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. E
>> GO TO 2.
G
2.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK (PART 2)
Perform function check of combination meter. Refer to MWI-21, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
H
>> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM FUNCTION CHECK I
NOTE:
DTC cannot be identified through this inspection.
1. Turn ignition switch ON. J
2. Check that the shift position indicator on the combination meter is displayed correctly when the selector
lever is shifted to each position (“P”, “R”, “N”, “D”).
Is the check result normal?
K
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012200935 L
1.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH POWER CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
2. Disconnect transmission range switch connector.
4. Check voltage between transmission range switch harness connector terminal and ground. N
+
Transmission range switch − Condition Voltage O
Connector Terminal
Ignition switch: ON 10 – 16 V
F27 3 Ground P
Ignition switch: OFF Approx. 0 V
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 6.
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (PART 1)

2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals and transmission range switch harness con-
nector terminals.
TCM Transmission range switch

Continuity
1 5
2 6
F81 F27 Existed
3 7
11 4
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (PART 2)
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals and ground.
TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
2
F81 Ground Not existed
3
11
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH MOUNTING POSITION
1. Remove control cable from manual lever. Refer to TM-319, "Exploded View".
2. Check transmission range switch mounting position. Refer to TM-326, "Inspection and Adjustment".
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Adjust transmission range switch mounting position.
5.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
1. Install control cable to manual lever. Refer to TM-319, "Exploded View".
2. Check transmission range switch. Refer to TM-243, "Component Inspection (Transmission Range
Switch)".
NO >> Replace transmission range switch.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH AND IPDM E/R
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check continuity between transmission range switch harness connector terminal and IPDM E/R harness
connector terminal.
IPDM E/R Transmission range switch

Continuity
E15 57 F27 3 Existed
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A

• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-43, "Wiring Dia-
B
gram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -".
• Short circuit in harness between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal 57 and transmission range switch
harness connector terminal 5.
• 10A fuse (No.55, IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-82, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement". C
• IPDM E/R
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-45, "Intermittent Incident". TM
Component Inspection (Transmission Range Switch) INFOID:0000000012200936
E
Check continuity between transmission range switch connector terminals.
F
Transmission range switch

Terminal G
Manual lever: “P” and “N” position Existed
1–2
Other than the above Not existed
H
Manual lever: “P” position Existed
3–4
Manual lever: “R” position Existed I
3–5
Manual lever: “N” position Existed
3–6 J
Manual lever: “D” position Existed
3–7
K
NO >> Replace transmission range switch. Refer to TM-326, "Removal and Installation". L

P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• Detected value from CVT fluid temperature
sensor received by TCM is less than 20°C • Harness or connectors
(68°F) for a certain length of time. (Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• CVT Fluid temperature sensor value that • CVT fluid temperature sensor
TCM receives is more than 180°C (356°F).
A/T fluid temperature does not rise to the
specified temperature after driving for a cer- • Harness or connectors
tain period of time with the TCM-received fluid (Sensor circuit is stuck.)
Transmission Fluid Tempera-
P0710 temperature sensor value between -40°C (- • A/T fluid temperature sensor
ture Sensor A Circuit
40°F) and 9°C (48.2°F).
The following conditions are maintained for 5
minutes after the completion of engine diag-
nosis P0111, P0116, and P0196:
• A/T fluid temperature − Engine coolant tem- A/T fluid temperature sensor
perature > 53°C (127°F)
• A/T fluid temperature − Engine coolant tem-
perature < −27°C (−16.6°F)

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION (PART 1)
With CONSULT
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more

With GST
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
2. Disconnect CVT unit connector.
3. Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminals.

CVT unit A
Condition Resistance
Connector Terminal
CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°F) Approx. 6.83 – 6.29 kΩ
B
F209 17 – 19 CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°F) Approx. 2.25 – 2.10 kΩ
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES (With CONSULT)>>GO TO 4.
YES (With GST)>>GO TO 5.
NO >> There is a malfunction of the CVT fluid temperature sensor. Replace the control valve. Refer to TM
TM-330, "Removal and Installation".
4.CONFIRM CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and cool the engine.
CAUTION: F
4. Select “ATFTEMP COUNT”. G
Is the value of “ATFTEMP COUNT” 32 or more?
NO >> GO TO 5. H
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine and wait for at least 4 minutes. I
2. Drive the vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 minutes or more.
Selector lever : “D” position J

Accelerator pedal position : 1.0/8 or more
3. Stop the vehicle. K
With GST
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and cool the engine. L
2. Start the engine and wait for at least 4 minutes.
3. Drive the vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 minutes or more.
M
Selector lever : “D” position
N
5. Check the DTC.
Is “P0710” detected? O
P


CVT unit
Condition Resistance
Connector Terminal
F209 17 – 19 CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°F) Approx. 2.25 – 2.10 kΩ
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.
2. CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR) (PART 1)
1. Disconnect the TCM connector.
2. Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals and CVT unit harness connector terminals.
TCM CVT unit

Continuity
13 17
F81 F51 Existed
25 19
YES >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR) (PART 2)
TCM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
13
25
4.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY (PART 1)
1. Remove terminal cord assembly. Refer to TM-330, "Exploded View".
2. Check continuity between CVT unit harness connector terminals and control valve harness connector ter-
minals.
CVT unit Control valve

Continuity
17 22
F209 F208 Existed
19 21
YES >> GO TO 5.
Check terminal cord assembly harness cladding for damage.
YES >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK DTC (TCM) A

With CONSULT
1. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. Refer to TM-244, "DTC Logic".
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. B
YES-1 (“P0710” only)>>There is a malfunction of the CVT fluid temperature sensor. Replace the control
valve. Refer to TM-330, "Removal and Installation". C
YES-2 (“P0710” and other DTC)>>Replace the transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-347, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-45, "Intermittent Incident".
TM

P0715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• Primary speed signal is not input to TCM
Input/Turbine Speed Sensor A • Primary pulley speed sensor value is less
P0715 (Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Circuit than 150 rpm while secondary pulley speed
• Primary speed sensor
is 500 rpm or more

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
3. Select “SEC SPEED” and “VEHICLE SPEED”.
5. Maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
SEC SPEED : 500 rpm or more

VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
With GST
1. CHECK PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect primary speed sensor connector.
4. Check voltage between primary speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
+
Primary speed sensor − Voltage
Connector Terminal
F55 3 Ground 10 V – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.

2. CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNAL A

2. Connect primary speed sensor connector.
3. Lift up the vehicle.
B
5. Check frequency of primary speed sensor.
TCM
C
+ − Condition Frequency (Approx.)

Connector
Terminal TM
720 Hz
E
F81 33 25 • Selector lever: “M1” position
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)
F
JPDIA0819ZZ

YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-45, "Intermittent Incident". G
NO >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR (PART 1) H
2. Disconnect TCM connector and primary speed sensor connector.
3. Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals and primary speed sensor harness connec-
tor terminals. I
TCM Primary speed sensor

Continuity J
25 1
F81 F55 Existed
33 2 K
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. L
4. CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR (PART 2)
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals and ground. M
TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal N
25
33
O
YES >> Replace primary speed sensor. Refer to TM-337, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. P
5. CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR AND IPDM E/R
3. Check continuity between primary speed sensor harness connector terminal and IPDM E/R harness con-
nector terminal.

Primary speed sensor IPDM E/R

Continuity
F55 3 E15 57 Existed
YES >> GO TO 6.
• Short circuit in harness between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal 57 and primary speed sensor har-
ness connector terminal 3.
• 10A fuse (No.55, located in IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-82, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• IPDM E/R

P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
A

• Secondary speed sensor signal is not input C
to TCM. • Harness or connectors
P0720 Output Speed Sensor Circuit • Secondary pulley speed sensor value is (Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
less than 150 rpm while primary pulley • Output speed sensor
speed is 1,000 rpm or more. TM

CAUTION: E
If another “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at F
>> GO TO 2. G

With CONSULT H
3. Select “PRI SPEED” and “VEHICLE SPEED”. I
PRI SPEED : 1,000 rpm or more J

7. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. K
With GST
Is “P0720” detected? L
M
1. CHECK SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT N

2. Disconnect secondary speed sensor connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. O
4. Check voltage between secondary speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
+
P
Secondary speed sensor − Voltage
Connector Terminal
F19 3 Ground 10 V – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.

2. CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNAL

2. Connect secondary speed sensor connector.
5. Check frequency of secondary speed sensor.
TCM
+ − Condition Frequency (Approx.)
Connector
Terminal
480 Hz
F81 34 25 • Selector lever: “M1” position

JPDIA0901ZZ

NO >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR (PART 1)
2. Disconnect TCM connector and secondary speed sensor connector.
3. Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals and secondary speed sensor harness con-
nector terminals.
TCM Secondary speed sensor

Continuity
25 1
F81 F19 Existed
34 2
YES >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR (PART 2)
TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
25
34
YES >> Replace secondary speed sensor. Refer to TM-337, "Removal and Installation".
5. CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR AND IPDM E/R
3. Check continuity between secondary speed sensor harness connector terminal and IPDM E/R harness
connector terminal.

Secondary speed sensor IPDM E/R A

Continuity
F19 3 E15 57 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. C
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-43, "Wiring Dia- TM
• Short circuit in harness between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal 57 and secondary speed sensor har-
ness connector terminal 3. E
• 10A fuse (No.55, located in IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-82, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• IPDM E/R
F
G

P0725 ENGINE SPEED
P0725 ENGINE SPEED
The engine speed signal is transmitted from ECM to TCM by CAN communication line.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• TCM detects a malfunction of CAN commu-
nication between ECM.
(The ECM to the TCM circuit is open or
P0725 Engine Speed Input Circuit • A DTC is set if the engine speed (CAN com-
shorted.)
munication) is less than 450 rpm when the
• ECM
primary pulley speed is 1,000 rpm or more.

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
3. Select “PRI SPEED”.
PRI SPEED : 1,000 rpm or more

7. Select “Self Diagnostic Results in “TRANSMISSION”.
1. CHECK DTC (ECM)

With CONSULT
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”.
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-115, "DTC Index".

P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
A

• TCM monitor voltage value for torque con- C
verter clutch solenoid valve is less than
70% of target voltage value for torque con-
verter clutch solenoid valve. • Harness or connectors
Torque Converter Clutch Cir- TM
P0740 • There is a large difference between TCM (Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
cuit/Open
monitor current command value for torque • Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
converter clutch solenoid valve and current
monitor value for torque converter clutch
E
solenoid valve.

CAUTION: F
G
H
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT I
3. Select “ATF TEMP SEN”. J
Is the value of “ATF TEMP SEN” 2.17 V or less?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> 1. Warm the transaxle. K
2. GO TO 3.
L
With CONSULT
3. Select “VEHICLE SPEED”. M
N
7. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. O
With GST
Is “P0740” detected? P
1.CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE


3. Check continuity between CVT unit harness connector terminal and ground.
CVT unit
Ground Condition Resistance
Connector Terminal
CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°F) Approx. 5.60 – 6.60 Ω
F209 12 Ground CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°F) Approx. 6.76 – 6.87 Ω
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.
2. CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE) (PART 1)
1. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
2. Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and CVT unit harness connector terminal.
TCM CVT unit

Continuity
F81 38 F51 12 Existed
YES >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE) (PART 2)
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and ground.
TCM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
F81 38 Ground Not existed
minals.

Continuity
F209 12 F208 10 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK DTC (TCM) A

With CONSULT
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. B
YES-1 (Only “P0740” is detected)>>There is a malfunction of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve.
Replace the control valve. Refer to TM-330, "Removal and Installation". C
YES-2 (“P0740” and other than “P0740” are detected)>>Replace the transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-347,
TM

This malfunction is detected when the torque converter clutch does not lock-up as instructed by the TCM. This
is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted), but also by mechanical malfunction such
as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Torque converter slip speed is more than a • Hydraulic control circuit
Torque Converter Clutch Cir-
P0744 certain value (40 rpm + Vehicle speed × 0.8) • Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
cuit Intermittent
while TCM is in lock-up command state • Lock-up select solenoid valve

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
3. Select “RANGE”, “ATF TEMP SEN”, “ACC PEDAL OPEN” and “VEHICLE SPEED”.
RANGE : D position
ATF TEMP SEN : 2.03 V or less
ACC PEDAL OPEN : 0.0/8 – 1.0/8
VEHICLE SPEED : 40 km/h (25 MPH)
With GST
1.CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Perform line pressure test. Refer to TM-228, "Inspection and Judgment".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-228, "Inspection and Judgment".
2.CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Refer to TM-255, "DTC Logic".

YES >> GO TO 3. A
NO >> GO TO 6.
3.CHECK LOCK-UP SELECT SOLENOID VALVE
B
Check lock-up select solenoid valve. Refer to TM-291, "DTC Logic".
YES >> GO TO 4. C
4.CHECK PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR SYSTEM
Check primary speed sensor system. Refer to TM-248, "DTC Logic". TM
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR SYSTEM

Check secondary speed sensor system. Refer to TM-251, "DTC Logic". F
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. G
6.CHECK DTC (TCM)
With CONSULT H
I
YES-1 (Only “P0744” is detected)>>There is a malfunction of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve.
Replace the control valve. Refer to TM-330, "Removal and Installation".
"Removal and Installation". J

P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• TCM monitor voltage value for torque con-
verter clutch solenoid valve is less than 70%
of target voltage value for torque converter
clutch solenoid valve.
P0745 Pressure Control Solenoid A (Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
• There is a large difference between TCM
• Line pressure solenoid valve
current monitor command value for line
pressure solenoid valve and current monitor
value for line pressure solenoid valve.

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Drive the vehicle for 10 seconds or more.
With GST
1.CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

3. Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminal and ground.
CVT unit
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.
2. CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE (PART 1)
TCM CVT unit A

Continuity
B
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. C
3. CHECKCIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE (PART 2)
TM
TCM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
E
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-45, "Intermittent Incident". F
G
2. Check continuity between CVT unit harness connector terminal and control valve harness connector ter-
minal.
H

Continuity
I
YES >> GO TO 5. J
K
YES >> Replace the transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-347, "Removal and Installation". L

The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in
response to a signal sent from the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• Line pressure solenoid fluid circuit
Pressure Control Solenoid A TCM detects a state that gear ratio is more • Line pressure solenoid valve
P0746
Performance/Stuck Off than 2.7 • Primary speed sensor
• Secondary speed sensor

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
3. Select “ENG SPEED SIG”,“PRI SPEED” and “VEHICLE SPEED”.
5. Maintain the following condition for 1 second or more.
ENG SPEED SIG : 600 rpm or more

PRI SPEED : 500 rpm or more
With GST

YES >> GO TO 2.
Check line pressure solenoid valve. Refer to TM-260, "DTC Logic".

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A
Check primary speed sensor system. Refer to TM-248, "DTC Logic".
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Check secondary speed sensor system. Refer to TM-251, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal? TM
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT E

Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-347, "Removal and Installation".
G

P0776 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
The secondary pressure solenoid valve regulates the secondary pressure to suit the driving condition in
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• Secondary pressure solenoid valve
Difference of secondary pressure target value • Secondary pressure sensor
Pressure Control Solenoid B
P0776 of TCM and secondary pressure actual value • Secondary pressure solenoid valve oil
Performance/Stuck Off
is more than 1.2 MPa circuit
• Line pressure solenoid valve oil circuit

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
3. Select “RANGE”, “VIGN SEN”, “ATF TEMP SEN”, “ACC PEDAL OPEN” and “VEHICLE SPEED”.
RANGE : “D” position

VING SEN : 10 V or more
ATF TEMP SEN : 2.03 – 0.16 V
ACC PEDAL OPEN : 1.0/8 or more
With GST

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SECONDARY PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Check secondary pressure solenoid valve. Refer to TM-266, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal? A
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SECONDARY PRESSURE SENSOR SYSTEM B
Check secondary pressure sensor system. Refer to TM-274, "DTC Logic".

YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENTE TM
E
YES >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-347, "Removal and Installation"

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• TCM monitor voltage value for torque sec-
ondary pressure solenoid valve is less than
70% of target voltage value for secondary
pressure solenoid valve. • Harness or connectors
Pressure Control Solenoid B
P0778 • There is a large difference between TCM (Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Electrical
current monitor command value for second- • Secondary pressure solenoid valve
ary pressure solenoid valve and current
monitor value for secondary pressure sole-
noid valve.

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
With GST

CVT unit
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.
2.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (SECONDARY PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE) (PART
1)

2. Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and CVT unit harness connector terminal. A
TCM CVT unit

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (SECONDARY PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE) (PART TM
2)
E
TCM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
F
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-45, "Intermittent Incident". G
H
minal.
I
Continuity
J
YES >> GO TO 5. K
L
YES >> Replace the transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-347, "Removal and Installation". M

P0826 UP AND DOWN SHIFT SW
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• Manual mode select switch
• Manual mode position select switch
• Combination meter
• When an impossible pattern of switch sig-
- (Manual mode switch circuit are open
Up and Down Shift Switch Cir- nals is detected, a malfunction is detected.
P0826 or shorted.)
cuit • When shift up/down signal of paddle shifter
- (Paddle shifter switch circuit are open
continuously remains ON for 60 seconds.
or shorted.)
- (CAN communication line is open or
shorted.)
• Paddle shifter

>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Shift the selector lever to “D” position and wait for 60 seconds or more.
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT
1. Shift the selector lever to manual shift gate and wait for 1 second or more.
NO >> GO TO 4.
With CONSULT
1. Shift the selector lever to “UP side (+ side)” and wait for 1 second or more.
NO >> GO TO 5.
With CONSULT
1. Shift the selector lever to “DOWN side (− side)” and wait for 1 second or more.

A
1.CHECK DTC (COMBINATION METER) B

With CONSULT
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “METER/M&A”.
C
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to MWI-33, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2. TM
2.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH SIGNALS
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. E
3. Check the On/Off operations of each monitor item.
F
Item name Monitor item Condition Status
Manual shift gate position On
MMODE G
Manual shift gate position Off
NONMMODE
Other than the above On H
Manual mode switch
Selector lever: UP (+ side) On
UPLVR
Selector lever: DOWN (− side) On I
DOWNLVR
Pressed paddle shifter (shift-down) On
STRDWNSW J
Released paddle shifter Off
Paddle shifter
Pressed paddle shifter (shift-up) On
STRUPSW
Released paddle shifter Off K
Without CONSULT
Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and confirm that the actual gear position and the meter's indication of the
position mutually coincide when the selector lever and paddle shifter* are shifted to the “+ (up)” or “− (down)” L
side [1st ⇔ 8th gear].
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-45, "Intermittent Incident". M
NO-1 (Manual mode switch is abnormal)>>GO TO 3.
NO-2 (Paddle shifter is abnormal)>>GO TO 8.
3.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT N

2. Disconnect CVT shift selector connector.
O
4. Check voltage between CVT shift selector harness connector terminal and ground.

+
Voltage
CVT shift selector − Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Ignition switch: ON 12 V
7
Ignition switch: OFF 0V
8
M57 Ground
9
11
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 5.
4.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH
2. Check manual mode switch. Refer to TM-272, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 7.
5.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN CVT SHIFT SELECTOR AND COMBINATION METER (PART 1)
2. Disconnect combination meter connector.
3. Check continuity between CVT shift selector harness connector terminals and combination meter harness
connector terminals.
CVT shift selector Combination meter

Continuity
7 36
8 16
M57 M34 Existed
9 14
11 37
YES >> GO TO 6.
Check continuity between CVT shift selector harness connector terminals and ground.
CVT shift selector

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
7
8
M57 Ground Not existed
9
11

7.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT A
Check continuity between CVT shift selector harness connector terminal and ground.
B
CVT shift selector
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M57 10 Ground Existed C
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. TM
8.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. E
2. Disconnect paddle shifter connector.
4. Check voltage between paddle shifter side harness connector terminals.
F
Paddle shifter
Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal G
M96 3 1
Battery voltage
M97 3 1
H
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 11.
I
Check paddle shifter. Refer to TM-273, "Component Inspection (Paddle Shifter)".
Is the inspection result normal? J
YES >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT K
Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
L
Paddle shifter
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
M96 1 M
Existed
M97 1
N
YES >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT O
Check voltage between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Paddle shifter P
Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Ground
M96 3
0V
M97 3
YES >> GO TO 12.

12.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN PADDLE SHIFTER AND COMBINATION METER (PART 1)
2. Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and combination meter
vehicle side harness connector terminals.
Paddle shifter Combination meter

Continuity
M96 3 26
M34 Existed
M97 3 5
YES >> GO TO 13.
Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
Paddle shifter
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
M96 3
Not existed
M97 3
YES >> GO TO 14.
14.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS
Check TCM connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
YES >> Replace TCM. Refer to TM-328, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch) INFOID:0000000012200963
MANUAL MODE SWITCH

1.MANUAL MODE SWITCH
Check continuity between CVT shift selector connector terminals.
CVT shift selector

Terminal
Manual shift gate position (neutral) Existed
7 – 10
Selector lever: DOWN (− side) Existed
8 – 10
Selector lever: UP (+ side) Existed
9 – 10
Manual shift gate position Not existed
11 – 10
Other than the above Existed

NO >> There is a malfunction of the manual mode switch. Replace the CVT shift selector assembly.
Refer to TM-316, "Removal and Installation". A
Component Inspection (Paddle Shifter) INFOID:0000000012200964
1.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER B
Check continuity between paddle shifter connector terminals.

C
Paddle shifter
Terminal
Pressed paddle shifter (shift-up) Existed TM
1 3
Released paddle shifter Not existed
Pressed paddle shifter (shift-down) Existed
1 3 E
YES >> INSPECTION END F

P0840 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SEN/SW A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• Secondary pressure sensor voltage that • Harness or connectors
Transmission Fluid Pressure TCM receives is more than 4.7 V (Secondary pressure sensor circuit is
P0840
Sensor/Switch A Circuit • Secondary pressure sensor voltage that open or shorted.)
TCM receives is less than 0.9 V • Secondary pressure sensor

>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
3. Select “ATF TEMP SEN”.
ATF TEMP SEN : 2.41 V or less

With GST
1.CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNAL

2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals.
TCM
Voltage
+ − Condition
Connector (Approx.)
Terminal
• Selector lever : “N” position
F81 15 25 1.0 V
• At idle
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SENSOR POWER AND SENSOR GROUND
Check voltage between TCM connector terminals.

TCM A
Voltage
+ − Condition
Connector (Approx.)
Terminal
B
Ignition switch: ON 5.0 V
F81 26 25
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Go to TM-281, "Diagnosis Procedure".
3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (SECONDARY PRESSURE SENSOR) (PART 1) TM

2. Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector.
E
TCM CVT unit

Continuity F
15 23
F81 25 F51 19 Existed G
26 20
H
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (SECONDARY PRESSURE SENSOR) (PART 2) I
TCM J
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
15
K
26
Is the inspection result normal? L
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY (PART 1) M

N
minals.

Continuity O
19 21
F209 20 F208 19 Existed P
23 20
YES >> GO TO 6.
YES >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK DTC (TCM)
With CONSULT
YES-1 (Only “P0840” is detected)>>There is a malfunction of the secondary pressure sensor. Replace the
control valve. Refer to TM-330, "Removal and Installation".

A
Using the engine load (throttle position), the primary pulley revolution speed, and the secondary pulley revolu- B
tion speed as input signal, TCM changes the operating pressure of the primary pulley and the secondary pul-
ley and changes the groove width of the pulley to control the gear ratio.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000012200968 C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TM
Transmission Fluid Pressure • Harness or connectors
Secondary pressure sensor value exceeds
P0841 Sensor/Switch A Circuit (Sensor circuit is open or shorted.) E
line pressure value
Range/Performance • Secondary pressure sensor

CAUTION: F
G
H
>> GO TO 2.
I
With CONSULT
3. Select “VEHICLE SPEED”. J
K
7. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. L
NO >> INSPECTION END M
1.CHECK LINE PRESSURE N

O
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SECONDARY PRESSURE SENSOR SYSTEM P
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK STEP MOTOR SYSTEM
Check step motor system. Refer to TM-293, "DTC Logic".
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
YES >> Replace the transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-347, "Removal and Installation".

P0868 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
A
The secondary pressure solenoid valve regulates the secondary pressure to suit the driving condition in B
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detection condition Possible causes TM

(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Secondary pressure is abnormally low com-
Transmission Fluid Pressure • Line pressure control system E
P0868 pared with the target secondary pressure dur-
Low • Secondary pressure solenoid valve
ing ordinary driving.
system
• Secondary pressure sensor
F
CAUTION:
G
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test. H
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION I
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine. J
3. Select “RANGE”, “ATF TEMP SEN”, “ACC PEDAL OPEN”, “BRAKE SW” and “VEHICLE SPEED”.
5. Maintain the following condition for 30 seconds or more. K

ATF TEMP SEN : 2.41 V or less L
ACC PEDAL OPEN : 0.5/8 – 1.0/8
BRAKE SW : Off
VEHICLE SPEED : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more M
Is “P0868” detected? N
O
1.CHECK LINE PRESSURE P

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SECONDARY PRESSURE SENSOR SYSTEM
YES >> GO TO 5.

P1701 TCM
P1701 TCM
A
When the power supply to the TCM is cut OFF, for example because the battery is removed, and the self-diag- B
nosis memory function stops, malfunction is detected.
CAUTION:
initialization is complete), self-diagnosis result of “P1701” may be displayed. In this case, erase self- C
diagnosis result using CONSULT. After erasing self-diagnosis result, perform DTC P1701 reproduction
procedure and check that malfunction is not detected.
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

E
Power supply (backup) of TCM is not supplied F
P1701 Power Supply Circuit (TCM power supply circuit is open or
and learning function stops
shorted.)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G

CAUTION:
1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK H
I
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION J
With CONSULT
2. Run engine for 10 seconds or more at idle speed. K
6. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 2 seconds or more. L
Is “P1701” detected? M
N
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (PART 1)

O
4. Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminals and ground. P

P1701 TCM
+
TCM − Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
Ignition switch: ON 10 V – 16 V
46
F81 Ground
Ignition switch: ON 10 V – 16 V
48
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (PART 2)
2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminal and ground.
+
TCM − Voltage
Connector Terminal
F81 47 Ground 10 V – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND IPDM E/R
3. Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals and IPDM E/R harness connector terminal.
TCM IPDM E/R

Continuity
46
F81 E15 57 Existed
48
YES >> GO TO 4.
Check the following:
• Short circuit in harness between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal 57 and TCM harness connector ter-
minal 46, and 48.
• 10A fuse (No. 55, located in IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-82, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• IPDM E/R
• Ignition switch
Check the following:

P1701 TCM
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between battery and TCM harness connector terminal 47. Refer to
PG-12, "Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY -". A
• 10A fuse (No. 33, located in fuse and fusible link block). Refer to PG-81, "Fuse and Fusible Link Arrange-
ment".
Is the inspection result normal? B
6.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND GROUND C
TM
TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
5 E
F81 Ground Existed
42
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-45, "Intermittent Incident". F

P1705 TP SENSOR
P1705 TP SENSOR
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, accelerator pedal position sensor, throttle
position sensor etc. The actuator sends a signal to the ECM, and ECM sends the signal to TCM with CAN
communication.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

(CAN communication line is open or
TCM detects that difference between the 2 ac-
Accelerator Pedal Position shorted.)
P1705 celerator pedal position signals (CAN commu-
Sensor Signal Circuit (Accelerator pedal position sensor cir-
nication) from ECM is 1/8 or more
cuit is open or shorted.)
• ECM

>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Depress the accelerator pedal gradually.
4. Release your foot from the accelerator pedal.
1.CHECK DTC (ECM)

With CONSULT
2. Select “Self Diagnostic results” in “ENGINE”.

P1709 INCOMPLETED DATA WRITING
A
When TCM does not store calibration data (individual characteristic value) of each solenoid valve that is B
stored in the ROM assembly (in the control valve), a malfunction is detected.
CAUTION:
initialization is complete), self-diagnosis result of “P1709” may be displayed. In this case, erase self- C
diagnosis result using CONSULT. After erasing self-diagnosis result, perform DTC P1701 reproduction
procedure and check that malfunction is not detected.
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

E
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
When TCM does not store calibration data F
(ROM assembly circuit is open or short-
(individual characteristic value) of each sole-
P1709 Incompleted Data Writing ed.)
noid valve that is stored in the ROM assem-
• TCM
bly (in the control valve).
• ROM assembly (in the control valve)
G
NOTE:
Immediately after performing any “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”, always turn ignition switch OFF. H
Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
I
With CONSULT
2. Wait for at least 10 consecutive seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. J
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
YES >> Go to TM-285, "Diagnosis Procedure". K
L
1.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT HARNESS CONNECTOR (ROM ASSEMBLY) (PART
1)
M
3. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and CVT unit vehicle side har-
ness connector terminals. N
TCM CVT unit

Continuity O
8 11
9 1 P
25 19
26 20
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT HARNESS CONNECTOR (ROM ASSEMBLY) (PART
2)
Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
8
9
25
26
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
2. Check continuity between CVT unit harness terminals and control valve harness connector terminals.

Continuity
1 2
11 3
19 5
20 1
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-281, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE TCM
1. Replace TCM. Refer to TM-328, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-347, "Removal and Installation".

P1722 VEHICLE SPEED
P1722 VEHICLE SPEED
A
The vehicle speed signal is transmitted from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) to TCM by CAN com- B
munication line.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detection condition Possible causes TM

• TCM detects malfunction in CAN communi-
cation with ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit). E
• When vehicle speed that TCM detects is 10
shorted.)
km/h (7 MPH) or more, vehicle speed signal
P1722 Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit (Vehicle speed signal circuit is open or
(CAN communication) that is received from
shorted.)
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) F
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control
is 2 km/h (2 MPH) or less.
unit)
• Change of vehicle speed signal (CAN com-
munication) that TCM receives is large
G
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. H
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test. I
>> GO TO 2.
J
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine. K
3. Select “VSP SENSOR”.
4. Drive the vehicle. L
VSP SENSOR : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more

M
N
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012200984 O
1.CHECK DTC [ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)]

With CONSULT P
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ABS”.
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to BRC-50, "DTC Index"

P1723 SPEED SENSOR
P1723 SPEED SENSOR
The secondary speed sensor detects the revolution of parking gear and generates a pulse signal. The pulse
signal is sent to the TCM, which converts it into vehicle speed.
The primary speed sensor detects the primary pulley revolution speed and sends a signal to the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CAUTION:
One of the “P0715”, or the “P0720” is displayed with the DTC at the same time.

TCM detects that high frequency components
(Primary speed sensor circuit is open
that are extracted from primary pulley speed
P1723 Speed Sensor Circuit or shorted.)
and secondary pulley speed exceed a certain
(Secondary speed sensor circuit is
value
open or shorted.)

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
3. Select “RANGE” and “VEHICLE SPEED”.


YES >> GO TO 2.

P1723 SPEED SENSOR
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A
TM

P1726 THROTTLE CONTROL SIGNAL
P1726 THROTTLE CONTROL SIGNAL
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, accelerator pedal position sensor, throttle
position sensor etc. The actuator sends a signal to the ECM, and ECM sends the signal to TCM with CAN
communication.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Harness or connectors
TCM receives a malfunction signal of engine
P1726 Throttle Control Signal Circuit (Electronically controlled throttle sensor
system from ECM
signal circuit is open or shorted.)

>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
1.CHECK DTC (ECM)

With CONSULT
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”.

P1740 SELECT SOLENOID
A

• Monitor value for lock-up select solenoid C
valve is OFF when TCM command value for • Harness or connectors
Lock-up Select Solenoid lock-up select solenoid valve is ON. (Lock-up select solenoid circuit is open
P1740
Valve Circuit • Monitor value for lock-up select solenoid or shorted.)
valve is ON when TCM command value for • Lock-up select solenoid valve TM
lock-up select solenoid valve is OFF.

CAUTION:
1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK F
G
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION (PART 1) H
With CONSULT
2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. I
3. Select “RANGE”.
RANGE : “P” or “N” position J

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”. K
NO >> GO TO 3. L

With CONSULT M
3. Maintain the following condition for 1 second or more. N
RANGE : “R” or “D” position
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. O
With GST
P
1.CHECK LOCK-UP SELECT SOLENOID VALVE


CVT unit
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.
2.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (LOCK-UP SELECT SOLENOID VALVE) (PART 1)
TCM CVT unit

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (LOCK-UP SELECT SOLENOID VALVE) (PART 2)
TCM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
1. Remove terminal cord assembly. Refer to TM-330, "Removal and Installation".
minal.

Continuity
F209 13 F208 11 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.

P1777 STEP MOTOR
P1777 STEP MOTOR
A

• Step motor monitor value is OFF when step C
motor command value of TCM is ON
P1777 Step Motor Circuit (Step motor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Step motor monitor value is ON when step
• Step motor
motor command value of TCM is OFF
TM
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. E
>> GO TO 2.
G
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine. H
3. Select “RANGE” and “VEHICLE SPEED”.
4. Drive the vehicle. I

J
K
With GST
L
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012200994 M
1.CHECK STEP MOTOR CIRCUIT (PART 1)

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. N
3. Check resistance between TCM harness connector terminals.
O
TCM
Resistance
Connector Terminal
27 – 28
P
F81 Approx. 30.0 Ω
29 – 30
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK STEP MOTOR CIRCUIT (PART 2)
P1777 STEP MOTOR
Check resistance between TCM harness connector terminals and ground.
TCM
Ground Resistance
Connector Terminal
27
28
F81 Ground Approx. 15.0 Ω
29
30
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK STEP MOTOR
CVT unit
Resistance
Connector Terminal
6–7
F209 Approx. 30.0 Ω
8–9
3. Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminals and ground.
CVT unit
Ground Resistance
Connector Terminal
6
7
F209 Ground Approx. 15.0 Ω
8
9
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 6.
4.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (STEP MOTOR) (PART 1)
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals and CVT unit harness connector terminals.
TCM CVT unit

Continuity
27 9
28 8
F81 F51 Existed
29 7
30 6
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (STEP MOTOR) (PART 2)

P1777 STEP MOTOR
TCM A
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
27
B
28
29
30 C
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. TM
1. Remove terminal cord assembly. Refer to TM-330, "Exploded View". E
minals.
F
Continuity
6 14 G
7 15
F209 F208 Existed
8 16
H
9 17
YES >> GO TO 7. I
J
YES >> GO TO 8.
K
8. CHECK DTC (TCM)
With CONSULT L
Is “P1777” detected? M
YES-1 (Only “P1777” is detected)>>There is a malfunction of the step motor. Replace the control valve.
Refer to TM-330, "Removal and Installation".
YES-2 (“P1777” and “P0725”/“P1777” and “U1000”/“P1777”, “P0725” and “U1000” are detected)>>Replace N
the control valve. Refer to TM-330, "Removal and Installation".
YES-3 (Other than YES-1 and YES-2)>>Replace the transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-347, "Removal and
Installation".
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-45, "Intermittent Incident". O

P1778 STEP MOTOR
P1778 STEP MOTOR
• The step motor's 4 aspects of ON/OFF change according to the signal from TCM. As a result, the flow of line
pressure to primary pulley is changed and pulley ratio is controlled.
• This diagnosis item is detected when electrical system is OK, but mechanical system is NG.
• This diagnosis item is detected when the state of the changing the speed mechanism in unit does not oper-
ate normally.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

There is a large difference between the prima-
ry pulley speed sensor value and the and the
primary pulley speed estimated from the sec-
P1778 Step Motor Circuit Intermittent Step motor
ondary speed sensor value, or there is a large
difference between the target pulley ratio and
actual pulley ratio.

CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”, confirm “Hi” or “Mid” or “Low” fixation by
“PRI SPEED” and “VEHICLE SPEED” on “DATA MONITOR MODE”.
• If hi-geared fixation occurred, go to TM-297, "Diagnosis Procedure".
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
3. Select “RANGE”, “ATF TEMP SEN”, “ACC PEDAL OPEN”, “PRI SPEED” and “VEHICLE SPEED”.

ATF TEMP SEN : 2.03 – 0.16 V
ACC PEDAL OPEN : 1.0/8 or more
PRI SPEED : 1,000 rpm or more
With GST

P1778 STEP MOTOR
A
1.CHECK STEP MOTOR SYSTEM
Check step motor system. Refer to TM-293, "DTC Logic".
B
YES >> GO TO 2.
C
Is the inspection result normal? TM
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR SYSTEM E

Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G
H

SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT
• TCM sends position indicator signals to combination meter by CAN communication line.
• Manual mode switch position is indicated on shift position indicator.
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000012200999
1.CHECK SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR

CAUTION:
1. Start engine.
2. Check if correct selector lever position (“P”, “N”, “R” or “D”) is displayed as selector lever is moved into
each position.
3. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and confirm that the actual gear position and the meter's indication of
the position mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (− side)”
side (1st ⇔ 8th gear).
1.CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Check if correct selector lever position (“P”, “N”, “R” or “D”) is displayed as selector lever is moved into
each position.
3. Select “RENGE” on “DATA MONITOR” and read out the value.
4. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and confirm that the actual gear position and the meter's indication of
the position mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (− side)”
side (1st ⇔ 8th gear).
NO - 1 >> The actual gear position does not change, or shifting into the manual mode is not possible (no
gear shifting in the manual mode possible). Or the shift position indicator is not indicated.
• Check manual mode switch. Refer to TM-272, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)".
• Check CVT main system (Fail-safe function actuated).
- Perform “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-190, "CONSULT
Function".
NO - 2 >> The actual gear position changes, but the shift position indicator is not indicated.
• Perform “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-190, "CONSULT
Function".
NO - 3 >> The actual gear position and the indication on the shift position indicator do not coincide.
• Perform “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-190, "CONSULT
Function".
NO - 4 >> Only a specific position or positions is/are not indicated on the shift position indicator.
• Check the combination meter. Refer to MWI-46, "Work flow".

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A
1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 1) B

2. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.
3. Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other than position with the brake pedal released. C
Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position?
NO >> GO TO 2. TM
2.CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 2)
Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other than position with the brake pedal depressed. E
NO >> Go to TM-299, "Diagnosis Procedure". F
1.CHECK POWER SOURCE G

2. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector
3. Turn ignition switch ON. H
4. Check the voltage between the stop lamp switch harness connector terminal and ground.
+ I
Connector Terminal
J
YES >> GO TO 2. K
NO >> GO TO 9.
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1)
L
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-302, "Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 3. M
NO >> GO TO 10.
3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND CVT SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 1)
1. Disconnect CVT shift selector connector N
2. Check the continuity between the stop lamp switch harness connector terminal and the CVT shift selector
harness connector terminal.
O
Stop lamp switch CVT shift selector
Continuity
E102 4 M57 3 Existed P

YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND CVT SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 2)
Check the continuity between the stop lamp switch harness connector terminal and ground.

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Stop lamp switch

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
E102 4 Ground Not existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHCK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the continuity between the CVT shift selector harness connector terminal and ground.
CVT shift selector

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M57 4 Ground Existed
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK PART POSITION SWITCH
1. Disconnect park position switch connector.
2. Check park position switch. Refer to TM-301, "Component Inspection (Park Position Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
1. Disconnect shift lock solenoid connector.
2. Check shift lock solenoid. Refer to TM-301, "Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid)".
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK CVT SHIFT SELECTOR HARNESS
Check CVT shift selector harness. Refer to TM-301, "Component Inspection (CVT Shift Selector Harness)".
• Open or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and stop lamp switch connector terminal 3. Refer to
PG-43, "Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -".
• Ignition switch
• 10A fuse [No.3, fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-80, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
Adjust stop lamp switch position. Refer to BR-9, "Inspection and Adjustment".
>> GO TO 11.

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
YES >> INSPECTION END A
Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid) INFOID:0000000012201003
B
Apply voltage to terminals of shift lock solenoid connector and check that shift lock solenoid is activated. C
CAUTION:
• Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage.
• Never cause shorting between terminals.
TM
Shift lock solenoid
+ (fuse) − Condition Status
E
Terminal
Apply battery voltage be-
1 2 Shift lock solenoid operates
tween terminals 1 and 2. F
NO >> Replace the shift lock unit. Refer to TM-317, "Disassembly and Assembly". G
Component Inspection (Park Position Switch) INFOID:0000000012201004
1.CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH H
Check the continuity between park position switch connector terminals.

CAUTION:
I
J
Park position switch
Terminal
Shift the selector lever to “P” position. Existed K
1–2
Other than above Not existed
YES >> INSPECTION END L
NO >> Replace the park position switch. Refer to TM-317, "Disassembly and Assembly".
Component Inspection (CVT Shift Selector Harness) INFOID:0000000012201005
M
1.CHECK CVT SHIFT SELECTOR HARNESS (PART 1)
Check the continuity between the CVT shift selector harness connector terminal and the shift lock solenoid N
CVT shift selector Shift lock solenoid O

Continuity
M324 3 M326 1 Existed
P
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace the CVT shift selector harness. Refer to TM-317, "Disassembly and Assembly".
Check the continuity between the shift lock solenoid harness connector terminal and the park position switch

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Shift lock solenoid Park position switch

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 3.
Check the continuity between the park switch harness connector terminal and the CVT shift selector harness
connector terminal.
Park switch CVT shift selector

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
Check harness cladding CVT shift selector harness for damage.

Check the continuity between the stop lamp switch connector terminals.
Stop lamp switch

Terminal
Depressed brake pedal Existed
3–4
Released brake pedal Not existed
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-20, "Exploded View".

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [CVT: RE0F10B]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000012201007
B
The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspect in order from item 1.
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference C

1. Engine idle speed EC-153
2. Engine speed signal TM-254
TM
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-284
4. CVT position TM-233
5. CVT fluid temperature sensor TM-244 E
6. CAN communication line TM-236
Large shock. (“N”→ ON vehicle
1 Shift Shock 7. CVT fluid level and state TM-314
“D” position) F
8. Line pressure test TM-228
9. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-255
10. Lock-up select solenoid valve TM-291 G
11. Transmission range switch TM-241
12. Control valve TM-330
H
OFF vehicle 13. Forward clutch TM-347
1. Engine idle speed EC-153
2. Engine speed signal TM-254 I
5. CVT fluid temperature sensor TM-244
J

Large shock. (“N”→ ON vehicle
2 Shift Shock 7. CVT fluid level and state TM-314
“R” position) K
10. Lock-up select solenoid valve TM-291 L
M
OFF vehicle 13. Reverse brake TM-347
2. Engine speed signal TM-254 N
Shock is too large for ON vehicle 3. CAN communication line TM-236
3 Shift Shock
lock-up. 4. CVT fluid level and state TM-314
O
OFF vehicle 6. Torque converter TM-351

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference
1. CVT fluid level and state TM-314
5. Stall test TM-226
6. Step motor TM-293
ON vehicle
7. Primary speed sensor TM-248
Vehicle cannot be 8. Secondary speed sensor TM-251
4
started from “D” posi-
tion. 9. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-284
11. Secondary pressure sensor TM-274
12. Power supply TM-281
14. Oil pump assembly
Slips/Will 16. Parking components

Not Engage 1. CVT fluid level and state TM-314
ON vehicle
Vehicle cannot be 8. Secondary speed sensor TM-251
5
started from “R” posi-
tion. 9. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-284
OFF vehicle
15. Reverse brake TM-347
16. Parking components

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
A
3. Engine speed signal TM-254 B
6. CAN communication line TM-236 C
ON vehicle 7. Stall test TM-226

6 Does not lock-up. TM
10. Lock-up select solenoid valve TM-291
11. CVT fluid temperature sensor TM-244 E
12. Secondary speed sensor TM-251
F
15. Torque converter TM-351
OFF vehicle
Slips/Will 16. Oil pump assembly TM-347 G
Not Engage 1. CVT fluid level and state TM-314
H
5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-255 I
ON vehicle 7. Stall test TM-226

J
Does not hold lock-up
7
condition. 9. Transmission range switch TM-241
K
13. Secondary pressure sensor TM-274 L
OFF vehicle M
16. Oil pump assembly TM-347

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
ON vehicle
Lock-up is not re- 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-255
8
leased. 6. CAN communication line TM-236
OFF vehicle
10. Oil pump assembly TM-347
Slips/Will 4. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-284

Not Engage 5. CAN communication line TM-236
ON vehicle 8. Step motor TM-293
With selector lever in 9. Primary speed sensor TM-248
9 “D” position, accelera-
tion is extremely poor. 10. Secondary speed sensor TM-251
OFF vehicle 17. Oil pump assembly
TM-347
18. Forward clutch

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
A
3. Stall test TM-226 B
6. Transmission range switch TM-241 C
TM
With selector lever in 9. Primary speed sensor TM-248
“R” position, accelera-
10 10. Secondary speed sensor TM-251
tion is extremely poor.
11. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-284 E
F
16. Torque converter TM-351 G
Slips/Will OFF vehicle 17. Oil pump assembly
TM-347
Not Engage 18. Reverse brake
H
3. Engine speed signal TM-254 I
J

ON vehicle
11 Slips at lock-up. K
11. CVT fluid temperature sensor TM-244 L
M
OFF vehicle
16. Oil pump assembly TM-347 N

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
12 No creep at all.
OFF vehicle 18. Gear system
TM-347
19. Forward clutch
Other 20. Reverse brake
ON vehicle 7. Primary speed sensor TM-248
Vehicle cannot run in
13 10. CVT fluid temperature sensor TM-244
all positions.
16. Gear system
OFF vehicle
17. Forward clutch TM-347
18. Reverse brake

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
A
3. Transmission range switch TM-241 B
6. Step motor TM-293 C
TM
With selector lever in 9. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-284
14 “D” position, driving is
not possible. 10. CVT fluid temperature sensor TM-244
11. Secondary pressure sensor TM-274 E
F
OFF vehicle 16. Gear system G
TM-347
17. Forward clutch
Other H
3. Transmission range switch TM-241 I
J

K
With selector lever in 9. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-284
15 “R” position, driving is
not possible. 10. CVT fluid temperature sensor TM-244
11. Secondary pressure sensor TM-274 L
M
15 Oil pump assembly
OFF vehicle 16. Gear system N
TM-347
17. Reverse brake
O

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Judder occurs during ON vehicle
16 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-284
lock-up.
ON vehicle
Strange noise in “D”
17 5. Torque converter TM-351
position.
OFF vehicle 7. Gear system
TM-347
Other 8. Forward clutch
9. Bearing
ON vehicle
Strange noise in “R” 4. Control valve TM-330

18
position. 5. Torque converter TM-351
OFF vehicle
7. Gear system TM-347
8. Reverse brake
ON vehicle
Strange noise in “N”
19 4. Control valve TM-330
position.
OFF vehicle 6. Oil pump assembly
TM-347
7. Gear system

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
A
3. CAN communication line TM-236 B
Vehicle does not de- 5. Primary speed sensor TM-248
20 celerate by engine ON vehicle
6. Secondary speed sensor TM-251 C
brake.
TM
1. CVT fluid level and state TM-314 E
F
ON vehicle 6. Step motor TM-293 G
21 Maximum speed low. 8. Secondary speed sensor TM-251
Other
H
11. Control valve TM-330 I
OFF vehicle J
14. Gear system TM-347
15. Forward clutch
With selector lever in 1. Transmission range switch TM-241
ON vehicle K
“P” position, vehicle
does not enter park-
ing condition or, with
22
selector lever in an- L
other position, park- OFF vehicle 3. Parking components TM-347
ing condition is not
cancelled.
M
ON vehicle
Vehicle runs with CVT 3. CVT position TM-233 N
23
in “P” position. 4. Control valve TM-330
OFF vehicle TM-347
6. Gear system O

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
ON vehicle
Vehicle runs with CVT
24 4. Control valve TM-330
in “N” position.
5. Gear system
7. Reverse brake
ON vehicle
25 Engine stall. 5. CAN communication line TM-236
Other 8. Control valve TM-330
Engine stalls when ON vehicle 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-255
26 selector lever shifted
“N”→“D”or “R”. 5. CAN communication line TM-236
Engine speed does
27 ON vehicle 3. Secondary speed sensor TM-251
not return to idle.

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
A
3. Line pressure test TM-228 B
ON vehicle
28 CVT does not shift 6. CAN communication line TM-236 C
TM
OFF vehicle 11. Oil pump assembly TM-347 E
PG-43,
1. Ignition switch and starter
STR-26
Engine does not start
29 ON vehicle F
in “N” or “P” position. 2. CVT position TM-233
PG-43,
Engine starts in posi-
1. Ignition switch and starter
STR-26
G
30 Other tions other than “N” or ON vehicle
“P”.
3. Transmission range switch TM-241 H
When brake pedal is 1. Stop lamp switch
depressed with igni-
2. Shift lock solenoid
tion switch ON, selec-
31 ON vehicle TM-299 I
tor lever cannot be
shifted from “P” posi- 3. CVT shift selector
tion to other position.
When brake pedal is 1. Stop lamp switch J
not depressed with ig-
2. Shift lock solenoid
nition switch ON, se-
32 ON vehicle TM-299
lector lever can be
shifted from “P” posi- 3. CVT shift selector K
tion to other position.
1. Manual mode switch TM-268
33
Cannot be changed to
ON vehicle 2. CAN communication line TM-236
L
manual mode.
3. Combination meters MWI-53
M
CVT indicator lamp
34 ON vehicle 2. Combination meters MWI-53
does not come on.
3. TCM power supply and ground TM-281
N

CVT FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [CVT: RE0F10B]
CVT FLUID
CHECKING CVT FLUID

The fluid level should be checked with the fluid warmed up to 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). The fluid level check
procedure is as follows:
1. Check for fluid leakage.
When ambient temperature is 20°C (68°F), it takes about 10
minutes for the CVT fluid to warm up to 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F).
3. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
4. Apply parking brake firmly.
5. With engine at idle, while depressing brake pedal, move shift
selector throughout the entire shift range.
SMA146B
6. Pull out the CVT fluid level gauge from the CVT fluid charging
pipe after pressing the tab on the CVT fluid level gauge to
release the lock.
SCIA1933E
7. Wipe fluid off the CVT fluid level gauge. Insert the CVT fluid
level gauge rotating 180° from the originally installed position,
then securely push the CVT fluid level gauge until it meets the
top end of the CVT fluid charging pipe.
CAUTION:
When wiping away the CVT fluid level gauge, always use
lint-free paper, not a cloth rag.
SCIA1931E
8. Place the selector lever in “P” or “N” and check that the fluid
level is within the specified range.
CAUTION:
When reinstalling CVT fluid level gauge, insert it into the
CVT fluid charging pipe and rotate it to the original installa-
tion position until securely locked.
SCIA1932E
CVT FLUID CONDITION

CVT FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [CVT: RE0F10B]
Check CVT fluid condition.
• If CVT fluid is very dark or smells burned, check operation of CVT. A
Flush cooling system after repair of CVT.
• If CVT fluid contains frictional material (clutches, brakes, etc.),
replace radiator and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent and
B
compressed air after repair of CVT. Refer to TM-223, "Cleaning".
Fluid status Conceivable cause Required operation

C
Replace the CVT fluid and check the
CVT fluid become
Varnished (viscous CVT main unit and the vehicle for
degraded due to
varnish state) malfunctions (wire harnesses, cool- ATA0022D
high temperatures. TM
er pipes, etc.)
Milky white or Replace the CVT fluid and check for
Water in the fluid
cloudy places where water is getting in.
Large amount of Unusual wear of E
Replace the CVT fluid and check for
metal powder mixed sliding parts within
improper operation of the CVT.
in CVT
F

CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [CVT: RE0F10B]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
JSDIA2341GB
1. Selector lever knob 2. Lock pin 3. Knob cover

4 Position indication panel 5. CVT shift selector assembly 6. Shift lock unit
7. Key interlock rod* 8. Position indicator bulb
:N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
*: Without push engine starter
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Always apply the parking brake before performing removal and installation.
2. Shift the selector lever to “N” position.
3. Remove the center console. Refer to IP-24, "Removal and Installation".
4. Disconnect the CVT shift selector connector.
6. Remove the key interlock cable from the CVT shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-324, "Removal and
Installation" (Without push starter system).
7. Remove the control cable from the CVT shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-319, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
8. Remove the CVT shift selector assembly.
INSTALLATION

CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
• When connecting the control cable (1) to the CVT shift selector
assembly (2), face the grooved surface of the rib (A) up and insert A
the control cable until it stops.
JSDIA1624ZZ
TM
DISASSEMBLY E
1. Slide the selector lever knob cover (1) down.

CAUTION:
Never damage the knob cover. F
2. Pull out the lock pin (2).
3. Pull the selector lever knob (3) and knob cover upwards to
remove them. G
4. Remove the position lamp.
H
JSDIA2401ZZ
5. Disengage the hooks (A) (4 locations), and lift up the position I

indication panel (1) to separate it from the CVT shift selector
assembly (2).
CAUTION: J
Never damage the CVT shift selector assembly.
6. Remove the shift lock unit from the CVT shift selector assembly.
7. Disconnect the park position switch connector, detent switch K
connector, and shift lock solenoid connector from the shift lock
unit.
L
JSDIA1802ZZ
ASSEMBLY
Note the following, and assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. M
• Follow the procedure below and place the selector knob onto the CVT shift selector.
1. Install the lock pin (2) onto the selector lever knob (3).
2. Install the knob cover (1) onto the selector lever knob.
3. Press the selector lever knob onto the selector lever until it N
clicks.
CAUTION:
• When pressing the selector lever knob onto the selector O
lever, never press the selector lever knob button.
• Never strike the selector lever knob to press it into place.
P
JSDIA2401ZZ

• Check the CVT position. If a malfunction is found, adjust the CVT position. Refer to TM-233, "Inspection and
Adjustment".
CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
• The key can be removed only when the selector lever is in the “P” position. (With key interlock)
• It must not be possible to turn the ignition switch to LOCK when the selector lever is not in the “P” position.
(With key interlock)

CONTROL CABLE
CONTROL CABLE
A
TM
I
JSDIA2353GB
1. Lock plate 2. Bracket A 3. Transaxle assembly J

4. Control cable 5. Bracket B 6. CVT shift selector assembly
A: Manual lever B: Grommet
L
REMOVAL
M
CAUTION:
1. Remove the battery. Refer to PG-105, "Removal and Installation".
N
2. Remove the control cable from the CVT shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-316, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
3. Disengage the pawls (B) of the grommet (A), and pull down-
wards to remove. O
4. Remove the control cable installation nut from the manual lever.
P
JSDIA1809ZZ

CONTROL CABLE
5. Remove the lock plate (1).
6. Remove center muffler from the mounting rubber and lower the
center muffler downward. Refer to EX-10, "Removal and Instal-
lation".
7. Lift up the heat plate.
JSDIA2643ZZ
8. Remove the control cable (1) from the bracket (2).
:Vehicle front
9. Remove the control cable from the vehicle.

10. Remove bracket.
JPDIA0107ZZ
INSTALLATION
• From below the vehicle, press the grommet (A) into place until the
pawls (B) make a click sound.
CAUTION:
• Place the grommet on the floor, then fasten it in place from
below the vehicle.
• Check that pulling down on the grommet does not discon-
nect it.
JSDIA1809ZZ
• Pay attention to the following when connecting the control cable to the CVT shift selector.
1. When connecting the control cable (1) to the CVT shift selector
assembly (2), face the grooved surface of the rib (A) up and
insert the control cable until it stops.
JSDIA1624ZZ

CONTROL CABLE
2. Install the socket (A) onto the CVT shift selector.
CAUTION: A
• Place the socket onto the CVT shift lever, then fasten it in
place from above.
• Check that the pulling on the socket does not disconnect
B
it.
JSDIA1810ZZ
TM
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION E

Check the CVT position. If a malfunction is found, adjust the CVT position. Refer to TM-233, "Inspection and
Adjustment".

PADDLE SHIFTER
PADDLE SHIFTER
AWDIA0557GB
1. Steering column assembly 2. Paddle shifter (shift-down switch) 3. Paddle shifter (shift-up switch)
REMOVAL
2. Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to SR-12, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the steering wheel. Refer to ST-9, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove the column cover. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".

PADDLE SHIFTER
5. Remove the paddle shifter connector (C) and (D) from paddle
shifter. A
A : Side of paddle shifter (shift-down switch)

B : Side of paddle shifter (shift-up switch) B
6. Remove the paddle shifter mounting bolts (E) and nuts (F).
7. Remove the paddle shifter from the steering column assembly.
C
TM
G
AWDIA0563ZZ
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. H

KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
JSDIA2448ZZ
1. CVT shift selector assembly 2. Key interlock cable

A: Key cylinder B: Clip C: Clip
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
1. Shift the selector lever to the “N” position.
2. Remove the selector lever knob. Refer to TM-317, "Disassembly and Assembly".
3. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position.
5. Press the pawls (B) of the key interlock cable slider (A) while
sliding it in the direction of the casing cap (C), and separate the
adjusting holder (D) and slider.
E :Key interlock rod

6. Remove the key interlock cable from the CVT shift selector.
7. Remove the steering column lower cover and driver instrument
lower panel. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
JSDIA1797ZZ

KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
8. Lift clip (A) in the direction of the arrow ( C) and remove in the
direction of the arrow ( D). A
1 :Key interlock cable

B :Key cylinder B
9. Disconnect the key interlock cable from the key cylinder.
10. Disengage the clip and disconnect the key interlock cable from
C
the vehicle.
JSDIA1798ZZ
TM
INSTALLATION
• Install the adjusting holder (A) onto the key interlock rod (B), then
install the casing cap (C) onto the CVT shift selector cable bracket E
(D).
CAUTION:
• When installing the key interlock cable, never bend or twist F
the cable forcefully.
• After connecting the key interlock cable to the CVT shift
selector cable bracket, be sure to check that the casing cap
is completely fastened to the cable bracket. If the casing cap G
is easily displaced, replace the key interlock cable.
JSDIA1799ZZ
H
• While pressing the detent rod (B) down, slide the key interlock
cable slider (A) toward the key interlock rod (D) side, and install the
adjusting holder (C) and key interlock rod. I
CAUTION:
• Never squeeze the pawls on the key interlock cable slider
when holding the slider. J
• Never apply force in a perpendicular direction to the key
interlock rod when sliding the slider.
K
JSDIA1800ZZ O
P
• Check the CVT position. If a malfunction is found, adjust the CVT position. Refer to TM-233, "Inspection and
Adjustment".
• The key can be removed only when the selector lever is in the “P” position.
• It must not be possible to turn the ignition switch to LOCK when the selector lever is not in the “P” position.

TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
JSDIA2397GB
1. Transmission range switch 2. Transaxle assembly

REMOVAL
2. Remove transmission range switch connector.
3. Remove control cable. Refer to TM-319, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove transmission range switch from transaxle assembly.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
ADJUSTMENT OF TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH

1. Move selector lever to “N” position.
2. Remove control cable from manual lever.

3. Loosen mounting bolts ( ) of transmission range switch. Insert
a pin (φ4 mm) into the adjusting holes (A) on both transmission A
range switch and manual lever for adjusting the position.
4. Tighten mounting bolts of transmission range switch.
5. Connect control cable on manual lever. Refer to TM-233, B
"Inspection and Adjustment".
JSDIA2398ZZ
TM
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust the CVT positions after installing the CVT shift selector. Refer to TM-233, "Inspection and Adjustment".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLAION E
Check the CVT positions after adjusting the CVT positions. Refer to TM-233, "Inspection and Adjustment".

TCM
TCM
JSDIA7186GB
1. Bracket 2. TCM
:Vehicle front
CAUTION:
• Never impact on TCM when removing or installing TCM.
• When replacing TCM, note the “CVTF DETERIORATION DATE” value displayed on CONSULT “CON-
FORM CVTF DETERIORTN” in MAINTENANCE BOOKLET, before start the operation.
• When replacing TCM and transaxle assembly simultaneously, replace transaxle assembly first and
then replace TCM. Refer to TM-347, "Removal and Installation".
• Before replacing TCM, perform “ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCM”. Refer to TM-219,
"Work Procedure".
REMOVAL
2. Remove air duct (inlet) and air cleaner case. Refer to EM-27, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove the TCM.
5. Remove the bracket.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Perform "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCM". Refer to TM-219, "Work Procedure".

AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
A
REMOVAL B
2. Remove clip (A) from bracket.
C
3. Remove air breather hose (1) from transaxle assembly.
TM
JSDIA2454ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
G
• Never bend the air breather hose to prevent damage to the hose.
• Install air breather hose (1) to transaxle tube (A) all the way to
the curve of the tube.
• Install air breather hose to transaxle tube so that the paint H
mark (B) is facing upward.
J
JSDIA2399ZZ
K
• Securely install the clip (A) to the bracket.
N
JSDIA2458ZZ

CONTROL VALVE
CONTROL VALVE
JSDIA2656GB
1. Transaxle assembly 2. Control valve 3. Bracket

4. O-ring 5. Oil strainer assembly 6. Magnet
7. Drain plug gasket 8. Drain plug 9. Oil pan mounting bolt
10. Oil pan 11. Oil pan gasket 12. Lock nut
13. Washer 14. Manual plate 15. Collar
16. Lip seal 17. Snap ring 18. Terminal cord assembly
: Apply CVT fluid
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery cable from negative terminal. Refer to PG-105, "Exploded View".

CONTROL VALVE
2. Remove drain plug from oil pan and then drain the CVT fluid.
3. Remove drain plug gasket. A
4. Disconnect the CVT unit connector. Refer to TM-150, "Removal and Installation Procedure for CVT Unit
Connector".
5. Remove the snap ring (1) from the CVT unit connector (A). B
TM
JPDIA0654ZZ
E
6. Press the CVT unit connector (A) into the transaxle case.
CAUTION: F
Never damage the CVT unit connector.
NOTE:
Clean around the connector to prevent foreign materials from
entering into the transaxle case. G
JPDIA0720ZZ
I
7. Remove the oil pan mounting bolts, and then remove the oil pan and oil pan gasket.
8. Remove the magnets from the oil pan.
9. Remove the lock nut (1) and washer (2), and then remove the J
manual plate (3).
: Vehicle front K
10. Remove the collar (4) from the manual shaft (A).
CAUTION:
Never drop the collar. L
JPDIA0655ZZ M
11. Disconnect the control valve connectors (A) and (B).

N
: Clip
: Vehicle front
O
JPDIA0656ZZ

CONTROL VALVE
12. Remove the oil strainer assembly mounting bolts (A) and (B),
and then remove the oil strainer assembly (1).
: Vehicle front
13. Remove O-ring from oil strainer assembly.
JPDIA0657ZZ
14. Remove the bracket (1).
: Bolt
: Vehicle front
JPDIA0658ZZ
15. Remove the control valve mounting bolts (A) and (B), and then
remove the control valve from the transaxle case.
: Vehicle front
CAUTION:
Never drop the control valve, ratio control valve and manual
shaft.
JPDIA0659ZZ
16. Remove terminal cord assembly (1) from the transaxle case
inside.
JSDIA2634ZZ
17. Remove the lip seal (1) from the transaxle case.
: Vehicle front
JPDIA0661ZZ

CONTROL VALVE
INSTALLATION
1. Install the lip seal (1) to the transaxle case. A
: Vehicle front
B
TM
JPDIA0661ZZ
2. Install terminal cord assembly (1) to the transaxle case.

CAUTION: E
Connect the CVT unit connector with the stopper facing up,
and then press in until it clicks.
JSDIA2634ZZ
H
3. Press in the ratio control valve (B) in the ( ) direction, and then
fix the linkage in the position shown in the figure with the linkage
fixing pin (A) from the back of control valve through the hole for
fixing. I
4. Check that one end of linkage engages with the step motor end
(C) and that the linkage is in the direction shown in the figure.
J
5. Install the control valve to the transaxle case.
CAUTION:
• Never drop the linkage fixing pin. If it is dropped, repeat
the installation procedure from step 3. K
• Never pinch the harness into between the control valve
and the transaxle case.
• Never drop the control valve, ratio control valve and man- L
ual shaft.
JPDIA0663ZZ

CONTROL VALVE
6. Fix the control valve using the control valve mounting bolts (A)
and (B).
: Vehicle front
Bolt Bolt length (mm) Number of bolts

A 54 10
B 44 1
JPDIA0659ZZ
7. Pull the linkage fixing pin out.

8. Connect the control valve connectors (A) and (B).
: Clip
: Vehicle front
CAUTION:
• Never pinch the harness into between the control valve
and the transaxle case.
• Securely insert the connector until it clicks and locks.
JPDIA0656ZZ
9. Install the bracket (1).
: Bolt
: Vehicle front
10. Install O-ring to oil strainer assembly.

CAUTION:
• Apply CVT fluid to O-ring.
JPDIA0658ZZ
11. Install the oil strainer assembly (1) using the oil strainer assem-
bly mounting bolts (A) and (B).
: Vehicle front
Bolt Bolt length (mm) Number of bolts

A 12 2
B 44 1
NOTE:
Remove the bracket and adjust the position again if the bolt hole JPDIA0657ZZ
positions are not aligned.

12. Install the collar to the manual shaft.
CAUTION:
Never drop the collar.

CONTROL VALVE
13. Install the manual plate (1) while aligning with the groove (A) of
the manual valve. A
CAUTION:
Assemble the manual plate while aligning its end with the
cutout ( ) of the manual valve. B
: Vehicle front
14. Install the washer (2) and the lock-nut (3), and then tighten to C
JPDIA0962ZZ
TM
15. Install the snap ring (1) to the CVT unit connector (A).
16. Connect the CVT unit connector. Refer to TM-150, "Removal
and Installation Procedure for CVT Unit Connector". E
17. Install the magnet while aligning it with the convex side of oil
pan.
CAUTION:
F
Completely eliminate the iron powder from the magnet
mounting area of oil pan and the magnet.
18. Install the oil pan to the transaxle case with the following proce-
dure. G
1. Install the oil pan gasket to the oil pan. JPDIA0654ZZ
CAUTION:
• Completely wipe out any moisture, oil, and old gasket from the oil pan gasket mounting sur- H
face and bolt mounting hole of oil pan and transaxle case.
• Never reuse oil pan gasket.
2. Install the oil pan assembly to the transaxle case, and then temporarily tighten the oil pan mounting
I
bolt.
3. Tighten the oil pan mounting bolts in the order shown in the
figure to the specified torque.
4. Tighten the oil pan mounting bolts again clockwise from (1) J
shown in the figure to the specified torque.
19. Install drain plug gasket to drain plug.
CAUTION: K
Never reuse drain plug gasket.
20. Install drain plug to oil pan.
21. Fill CVT fluid from CVT fluid charging pipe to the specified level. L
CVT fluid : Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubri-

JPDIA0664ZZ
Fluid capacity cants". M

CAUTION:
• Use only Genuine CVT fluid. Never mix with other fluid.
• Using CVT fluid other than Genuine CVT fluid will deteriorate in driveability and CVT durability, N
and may damage the CVT, which is not covered by the warranty.
• When filling CVT fluid, take care not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust.
• Sufficiently shake the container of CVT fluid before using.
O
• Delete CVT fluid deterioration date with CONSULT after changing CVT fluid. Refer to TM-190,
"CONSULT Function".
NOTE: P
When ambient temperature is 20°C (68°F), it takes about 10 minutes for the CVT fluid to warm up to 50
to80°C (122 to 176°F).
23. Check CVT fluid level and condition. Refer to TM-314, "Inspection".
24. Connect battery cable to negative terminal. Refer to PG-105, "Exploded View".

CONTROL VALVE
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

Check oil pan for foreign material.
• If a large amount of worn material is found, clutch plate may be worn.
• If iron powder is found, bearings, gears, or clutch plates may be worn.
• If aluminum powder is found, bushing may be worn, or chips or burrs of aluminum casting parts may enter.
Check points where wear is found in all cases.
Check the CVT fluid level and leakage. Refer to TM-314, "Inspection".
Perform “ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL VALVE OR TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY”.
Refer to TM-221, "Description".

PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR
A
TM
G
SCIA7901J
1. Transaxle assembly 2. O-ring 3. Primary speed sensor

H
: Apply CVT fluid I
J
REMOVAL
K
2. Remove ECM and bracket as a set.
3. Remove primary speed sensor connector.
4. Remove primary speed sensor. L
5. Remove O-ring from primary speed sensor.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. M
CAUTION:
• Apply CVT fluid to O-ring. N
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION O

Check for CVT fluid leakage and CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-314, "Inspection".

SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR
JPDIA0352GB
1. Transaxle assembly 2. Shim 3. O-ring

4. Secondary speed sensor
: Apply CVT fluid
REMOVAL
2. Remove secondary speed sensor connector.
3. Remove secondary speed sensor (1) and shims (2).
4. Remove O-ring (3) from secondary speed sensor.
JPDIA0353ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Install two pieces of shims.

A
TM

DIFFERENTIAL SIDE OIL SEAL
SCIA7594J
1. Transaxle assembly 2. Differential side oil seal (Converter 3. Differential side oil seal (Transaxle
housing side) case side)
: Genuine CVT fluid
REMOVAL
Differential Side Oil Seal (Left Side)
1. Remove front drive shaft (left side). Refer to FAX-45, "AWD : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove differential side oil seal (1) using an oil seal remover
(commercial service tool) (A).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch transaxle case and converter
housing.
JPDIA0118ZZ
Differential Side Oil Seal (Right Side)

1. Remove transfer assembly. Refer to FAX-45, "AWD : Removal and Installation".

(commercial service tool) (A). A
CAUTION:
housing.
B
JPDIA0118ZZ
TM
INSTALLATION
Note the followings and installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Differential Side Oil Seal (Transaxle Case Side) E
CAUTION:
When inserting the drive shaft, be sure to use protector (SST: KV38107900).
1. Measure height (A) of seal lip. Calculate protrusion (C) of oil F
seal lip according to measured height (A) of seal lip and refer-
ence value (B) of side oil insertion.
(1) : Differential side oil seal G

(2) : Transaxle case
Lip protrusion (C) : C=A–B H

Differential side oil seal insertion : 1.8 mm (0.071 in)
reference value (B) JSDIA4816ZZ
I
CAUTION:
• Never reuse differential side oil seal.
• Put a mark on the measurement area and measure height of seal lip at four points diagonally
using suitable tool. J
NOTICE:
Since seal lips have a tolerance of ± 0.3 mm (± 0.012 in) at maximum due to manufacturing tolerances or
packing conditions, it is necessary to measure the seal lip height beforehand to clarify the tolerance. K
2. As an indicator of the parallelism and insertion depth, cut a
masking tape (1) to specified width [add 1 mm (0.04 in) to the
value calculated from the tip of differential side oil seal lip] and L
affix to the differential side oil seal.
3. Install the differential side oil seal using a drift [outer diameter:
53 mm (2.09 in), inner diameter: 50 mm (1.97 in)] according to
M
the guide of the masking tape.
CAUTION:
• If differential side oil seal is inserted deeper than the ref-
erence value, use a new differential side oil seal and per- N
form the steps again. JSDIA4817ZZ
• Apply ATF to the differential side oil seal lip and around
the oil seal. O
NOTE:
A hub cap (Part No. 43234 1HA0A) can be used as a substitute for drift. To use a hub cap, be sure to pre-
pare a new one specifically for patting seal.
4. Remove masking tape. P
5. Adjust as instructed below to optimize the protrusion size and parallelism.
CAUTION:
If differential side oil seal is inserted deeper than the reference value, use a new differential side
oil seal and perform the steps again.

• Protrusion size (A)
CAUTION:
Protrusion must fall within ± 0.5mm (0.020 in) of calcu-
lated size.
JSDIA4815ZZ
• Parallelism at four diagonal points ( )

CAUTION:
The difference among four diagonal points must be within
0.3 mm (0.012 in).
NOTE:
If differential side oil seal is uneven while installing, tilt suitable
tool.
6. Check that the protrusion size and parallelism are adequate.
JSDIA4814ZZ
Differential Side Oil Seal (Converter housing Side)

CAUTION:
• Apply ATF to the differential side oil seal lip and around the oil seal.
Install differential side oil seal evenly using a drift [outer diameter: 60
mm (2.36 in)] so that differential side oil seal protrudes by the dimen-
sion (A) respectfully.
Dimension (A) : Height difference from case end sur-

face is within 1.0 ± 0.5 mm (0.039 ±
0.020 in).
NOTE:
The reference is the installation direction of the differential side oil
seal.
JSDIA6885ZZ


OIL PUMP FITTING BOLT
OIL PUMP FITTING BOLT
A
Replace the oil pump fitting bolt and the O-ring if oil leakage or exudes from the oil pump fitting bolt. B
TM
JPDIA0829GB
H
1. Oil pump fitting bolt 2. O-ring 3. Transaxle assembly
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) I
: Apply CVT fluid

J
REMOVAL
K
1. Remove Oil pump fitting bolt (1) from transaxle assembly.
2. Remove O-ring from oil pump fitting bolt.
L
N
JPDIA0077ZZ
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. O
CAUTION:
P


WATER HOSE
WATER HOSE
JSDIA2776GB
1. Heater thermostat assembly 2. Hose clamp 3. Water hose

A. Water outlet B. CVT oil warmer C. To thermostat housing
D. To oil cooler
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure
coolant escaping from the radiator.
CAUTION:
Perform these steps after the coolant temperature has cooled sufficiently.
2. Remove the ECM and bracket as a set.
3. Remove the water hose.
4. Remove the heater thermostat.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal.
• Refer to the following when installing water hoses.
Water hose (1) Installation side tube (2) Direction of paint mark Hose insertion depth “L”
A: 27 mm (1.06 in) [End reach-
Water outlet Upward
Water hose es the 2-stage bulge.]
CVT oil warmer Leftward B: 27 mm (1.06 in) [End reach-
Heater thermostat assembly CVT oil warmer Leftward es the tube bend R position).]

WATER HOSE
C
JSDIA2407ZZ
• Refer to the followings when installing hose clamp. TM

CAUTION:
Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge of fluid cooler tube.
E
Hose clamp (3)
Water hose (1) Installation side tube (2)
Direction of tab Clamping position
Water outlet Backward F
A: 5 – 7 mm (0.20 – 0.28 in) (L)
Water hose
CVT oil warmer Upward from hose end
B: Align with the end of paint

Heater thermostat assembly CVT oil warmer Upward G
mark (C)
J
JSDIA2499ZZ
K
Heater Thermostat L
• Fully immerse the heater thermostat (1) in a container (A) filled
with water. Continue heating the water while stirring.
• Continue heating the heater thermostat for 5 minutes or more after
M
bringing the water to a boil.
• Quickly take the heater thermostat out of the hot water, measure
the heater thermostat within 10 seconds.
N
O
JPBIA0318ZZ

WATER HOSE
• Place dial indicator (A) on the pellet (B) and measure the elonga-
tion from the initial state.
Standard : Refer to TM-353, "Heater Thermostat".

• If out of standard, replace heater thermostat.
JPBIA0319ZZ

Start the engine, and check the joints for coolant leakage. Refer to TM-314, "Inspection".

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [CVT: RE0F10B]
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
B
TM
JSDIA2400GB K
1. Transaxle assembly 2. O-ring 3. CVT fluid charging pipe

4. CVT fluid level gauge L
A. For tightening torque, refer to TM-347, "Removal and Installation".
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) M
: Apply petroleum jelly N
O
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Never remove the reservoir tank cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high P
pressure engine coolant escaping from the reservoir tank.
CAUTION:
• Perform this step engine is cold.
then replace TCM. Refer to TM-221, "Description".
NOTE:
Cap or cover any transaxle openings to prevent transaxle fluid from spilling.

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
2. Drain engine coolant. Refer to CO-10, "Draining".
3. Remove the air duct and air cleaner case. Refer to EM-27, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove the ECM and bracket as a set.
6. Remove CVT fluid level gauge.
7. Remove CVT fluid charging pipe from transaxle assembly.
8. Remove O-ring from CVT fluid charging pipe.
9. Disconnect following harness connector and wire harness.
• CVT unit harness connector (A).
• Primary speed sensor harness connector (B).
• Secondary speed sensor harness connector (C).
• Transmission range switch connector (D).
10. Remove harness and clip from the transaxle assembly.
11. Remove water hose. Refer to TM-344, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
12. Remove control cable from transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-
319, "Removal and Installation".
JPDIA0113ZZ
13. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-28, "MR16DDT : Removal
and Installation".
14. Turn crankshaft, and remove the four tightening nuts ( ) for
drive plate and torque converter.
CAUTION:
When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from
the front of the engine.
15. Remove exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
16. Separate the propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-124, "Removal and
Installation".
17. Remove front drive shafts. Refer to FAX-45, "AWD : Removal
and Installation".
JPDIA0114ZZ
18. Remove front suspension member from vehicle. Refer to FSU-
19. Remove transfer assembly from transaxle assembly with power tool. Refer to DLN-94, "Removal and
Installation".
20. Support transaxle assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION:
When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to collide against the drain plug.
21. Support engine assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION:
22. Remove engine mounting insulator (LH). Refer to EM-68, "AWD : Exploded View".
23. Remove bolts fixing transaxle assembly to engine assembly.
24. Remove transaxle assembly from vehicle.
CAUTION:
• Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
• Secure transaxle assembly to a transmission jack.
25. Remove heater thermostat. Refer to TM-344, "Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
Note following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
• Check fitting of dowel pin ( ) when installing transaxle
assembly to engine assembly. A
JPDIA0116ZZ
TM
• When installing transaxle assembly to the engine assembly, attach the fixing bolts in accordance with the fol-
lowing.
1. Rotate torque converter to align a torque converter stud bolt with the mounting position of starter motor. E
2. Rotate drive plate to align a torque converter stud bolt insertion hole of drive plate with service hole.
3. Install transaxle to engine.
CAUTION: F
Be careful not to strike the drive plate when inserting torque converter stud bolts to drive plate
holes.
4. Tighten the fixing bolts in accordance with the following. G
Bolt position A B
Insertion direction Transaxle to engine Engine to transaxle H
Number of bolts 2 6
Bolt length mm (in) 55 (2.17) 50 (1.97)
I
Tightening torque N·m
62 (6.3, 46)
(kg-m, ft-lb)
JSDIA2425ZZ J
5. After tighten the torque converter nuts ( ) temporarily, tighten

the torque converter nuts to the specified torque.
K
CAUTION:
• When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from
the crankshaft pulley side.
• When tightening the torque converter nuts after fixing the L
crankshaft pulley bolts, confirm the tightening torque of
the crankshaft pulley mounting bolts. Refer to EM-76,
"Exploded View". M
• Rotate crankshaft several turns and check that transaxle
rotates freely without binding after converter is installed JPDIA0114ZZ
to drive plate.
N
INSPECTION BEFORE INSTALLATION O

After inserting a torque converter to the CVT, check dimension (A)
with in the reference value limit.
B : Scale P
C : Straightedge
Dimension (A) : Refer to TM-353, "Torque Converter".
JPDIA0115ZZ

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
• Check for CVT fluid leakage and check CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-314, "Inspection".
• Check CVT position. Refer to TM-233, "Inspection and Adjustment".
• Start and warm up the engine. Visually check that there is no leakage of engine coolant and CVT fluid.
Perform “ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACE CONTROL VALVE OR TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY”. Refer
to TM-221, "Description".

TORQUE CONVERTER AND CONVERTER HOUSING OIL SEAL
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [CVT: RE0F10B]
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY A

B
TM
SCIA7904J
H
1. Transaxle assembly 2. Converter housing oil seal 3. Torque converter
: Apply CVT fluid I
J
1. Remove transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-347, "Removal and Installation".

2. Remove torque converter from transaxle assembly. K
CAUTION:
Never damage bush on the inside of torque converter sleeve when removing torque converter.
3. Remove converter housing oil seal using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
L
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch converter housing.
M
• Drive converter housing oil seal (1) evenly using a drift (A) (commercial service tool) so that converter hous-
ing oil seal protrudes by the dimension (B) respectively. N
Unit: mm (in)
Outer diameter: 65 (2.56)
Commercial service tool: A
Inner diameter: 60 (2.36) O
2 : Transaxle assembly
P
SCIA7908J

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [CVT: RE0F10B]
Unit: mm (in)
Dimension B 1.0 ± 0.5 (0.039 ± 0.020)
NOTE:
Converter housing oil seal pulling direction is used as the refer-
ence.
• After completing installation, check for CVT fluid leakage and CVT
fluid level. Refer to TM-314, "Inspection".
SCIA7909J
• Attach the pawl (A) of the torque converter to the drive sprocket
hole (B) on the transaxle assembly side.
CAUTION:
• Rotate the torque converter for installing torque converter.
• Never damage the bushing inside the torque converter
sleeve when installing the converter housing oil seal.
SCIA7907J

• After inserting a torque converter to the CVT, check dimension (A)
B : Scale
C : Straightedge
JPDIA0115ZZ

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [CVT: RE0F10B]

B
Engine MR16DDT
Applied model C
Axle AWD
Transaxle model RE0F10B
D range 2.349 – 0.394 TM
Transmission gear ratio Reverse 1.750
Final drive 5.798
E
Recommended fluid and fluid capacity Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
Shift Characteristics INFOID:0000000012201055
F
Numerical value data are reference values.
Unit: rpm
CVT input speed G
Throttle position Shift pattern
At 40 km/h (25 MPH) At 60 km/h (37 MPH)
“D” position 1,500 – 3,100 1,600 – 3,400
2/8 H
ECO mode* 1,500 – 2,400 1,600 – 2,500
“D” position 3,300 – 4,200 4,300 – 5,200
8/8
ECO mode* 3,300 – 4,200 4,300 – 5,200
I
*: With Integrated Control System
NOTE:
Lock-up clutch is engaged when vehicle speed is approximately 18 km/h (11 MPH) to 90 km/h (56 MPH). J
Stall Speed INFOID:0000000012201056
K
Stall speed 3,000 – 3,500 rpm
Line Pressure INFOID:0000000012201057 L
Unit: kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)

Line pressure
Engine speed M
“R” and “D” positions
At idle 750 (7.50, 7.65, 108.8)
At stall 5,700 (57.00, 58.14, 826.5)*
N
*: Reference values
Torque Converter INFOID:0000000012201058

O
Dimension between end of converter housing and torque converter 14.4 mm (0.567 in) P
Heater Thermostat INFOID:0000000012201059
Standard
Valve opening temperature 69 – 73°C (156 –163°F)

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [CVT: RE0F10B]
Maximum valve lift 5.0 mm/85°C (0.197 in/185°F)
Valve closing temperature 65°C (149°F)

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [CVT: RE0F10D]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Service Manual.
WARNING: E
F
connectors. H
WARNING:
serious injury.
K
L
windshield.
PIIB3706J
O
Precaution for TCM and Transaxle Assembly Replacement INFOID:0000000012201063
CAUTION: P
• To replace TCM, refer to TM-429, "Description".
• To replace transaxle assembly, refer to TM-431, "Description".
When disconnecting the battery terminal, pay attention to the following.


PRECAUTIONS

SEF289H
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
General Precautions INFOID:0000000012201064
• Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable

from the negative terminal before connecting or disconnect-
ing the CVT assembly harness connector. Because battery
voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned
OFF.
SEF289H
• When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from TCM, do not damage pin terminals (bend or break).
Check that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM pin ter-
minal, when connecting pin connectors.
AAT470A

PRECAUTIONS
• Perform TCM input/output signal inspection and check
whether TCM functions normally or not before replacing TCM. A
Refer to TM-402, "Reference Value".
MEF040DA
TM
• Perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE”.
If the repair is completed DTC should not be displayed in the E
“DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
G
JSBIA1315ZZ
• Always use the specified brand of CVT fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". H
• Use lint-free paper not cloth rags during work.
• Dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance, etc. after replacing the CVT fluid.
I
On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of CVT and Engine INFOID:0000000012201065
The TCM and ECM have an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to
warn the driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. J
CAUTION:
• Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal
before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid K
valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
• Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.) L
• Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit.
• Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube M
may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc.
• Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.
N
Removal and Installation Procedure for CVT Unit Connector INFOID:0000000012201066
REMOVAL O

PRECAUTIONS
• Rotate bayonet ring (1) counterclockwise. Pull out CVT unit har-
ness connector (2) upward and remove it.
SCIA6685J
INSTALLATION
1. Align marking (A) on CVT unit harness connector terminal with
marking (B) on bayonet ring. Insert CVT unit harness connector.
2. Rotate bayonet ring clockwise.
JPDIA0294ZZ
3. Rotate bayonet ring clockwise until marking (A) on CVT unit har-
ness connector terminal body is aligned with the slit (B) on bayo-
net ring as shown in the figure (correctly fitting condition).
JPDIA0295ZZ
CAUTION:
• Securely align marking (A) on CVT unit harness connec-
tor terminal body with bayonet ring slit (B). Then, be care-
ful not to make a half fit condition as shown in the figure.
• Never mistake the slit of bayonet ring for other dent por-
tion.
JPDIA0296ZZ

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [CVT: RE0F10D]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000012201067
B
The actual shape of the tools may differ from those illustrated here.
Tool number
Tool name
1. KV311039S0 CVT fluid changing and adjustment
( — ) TM
Charging pipe set
2. KV31103920*
( — )
O-ring E
JSDIA1844ZZ
KV38107900 Installing drive shaft F

( — )
Protector
a: 32 mm (1.26 in) dia.
G
PDIA1183J
H
*: The O-ring as a unit part is set as a SST.

Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000012201068 I
Tool number J
Description
Tool name
Power tool Loosening nuts and bolts
PBIC0190E
Oil seal remover Removing each oil seal M
JSDIA4998ZZ O
Drift Installing differential side oil seal [tran-
a: 53 mm (2.09 in) dia. saxle case side, and converter housing
b: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia. side (2WD models)]
P
NT115

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [CVT: RE0F10D]
Tool number
Description
Tool name
Drift Installing differential side oil seal [con-
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. verter housing side (AWD models)]
SCIA5338E
Drift Installing converter housing oil seal

a: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia.
b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
NT115

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CVT: RE0F10D]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
COMPONENT PARTS
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
B
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000012201069
TM
M
JSDIA7184GB
1. Multi display unit (MDU) 2. ABS actuator and electric unit (control 3. ECM N
Refer to DMS-4, "Component Parts unit) Refer to EC-600, "ENGINE CONTROL
Location". Refer to BRC-9, "Component Parts Lo- SYSTEM :
cation". Component Parts Location".
4. IPDM E/R 5. BCM 6. Combination meter O
Refer to PCS-5, "Component Parts Lo- Refer to BCS-5, "BODY CONTROL
cation". SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca-
tion".
P
7. Manual mode indicator 8. Shift position indicator 9. CVT indicator
(On the combination meter) (On the combination meter) (On the combination meter)
10. Paddle shifter (shift-down switch) 11. Paddle shifter (shift-up switch) 12. Transmission range sensor
13. Input speed sensor 14. Control valve 15. CVT unit connector
16. Primary speed sensor 17. Output speed sensor 18. TCM
19. Manual mode switch
A. Transaxle assembly B. Engine room C. CVT shift selector assembly

COMPONENT PARTS
NOTE:
• The following components are included in control valve assembly.
- CVT fluid temperature sensor
- Primary pressure sensor
- Secondary pressure sensor
- Line pressure solenoid valve
- Primary pressure solenoid valve
- Secondary pressure solenoid valve
- Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
- Select solenoid valve
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Description INFOID:0000000012201070
Name Function
TCM TM-363, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM"
Transmission range switch TM-363, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch"
Primary speed sensor TM-363, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Speed Sensor"
Output speed sensor TM-364, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor"
Input speed sensor TM-365, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor"
CVT fluid temperature sensor TM-365, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor"
Primary pressure sensor TM-366, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Pressure Sensor"
Secondary pressure sensor TM-366, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure Sensor"
Primary pressure solenoid valve TM-366, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Pressure Solenoid Valve"
Secondary pressure solenoid valve TM-367, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure Solenoid Valve"
Select solenoid valve TM-367, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Select Solenoid Valve"
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-367, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve"
Line pressure solenoid valve TM-368, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve"
Manual mode switch TM-368, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch"
Shift position indicator TM-368, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Shift Position Indicator"
Manual mode indicator TM-369, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Indicator"
Paddle shifter TM-369, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Paddle Shifter"
Mainly transmits the following signal to TCM via CAN communication.
• Engine and CVT integrated control signal
NOTE:
General term for the communication (torque-down permission, torque-down request,
etc.) exchanged between the ECM and TCM.
ECM • Engine speed signal
• Engine coolant temperature signal
• Accelerator pedal position signal
• Closed throttle position signal
Mainly receives the following signal from TCM via CAN communication.
• Malfunctioning indicator lamp signal
BCM
• Stop lamp switch signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to TCM via CAN communication.
• ABS operation signal
• TCS operation signal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• VDC operation signal
• ABS malfunction signal
• Vehicle speed signal

COMPONENT PARTS
Name Function
A
• Manual mode signal
• Non-manual mode signal
• Manual mode shift up signal B
• Manual mode shift down signal
Combination meter
Mainly receives the following signals from TCM via CAN communication.
• CVT indicator signal
• Shift position signal C
• Manual mode indicator signal
• Manual mode shift refusal signal
Mainly transmits the following signal to MDU via CAN communication. TM
• NORMAL mode signal
MDU
• ECO mode signal
• SPORT mode signal
E
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM INFOID:0000000012201071
• The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. F
• The vehicle driving status is judged based on the signals from the
sensors, switches, and other control units, and the optimal tran-
saxle control is performed. G
• For TCM control items, refer to TM-379, "CVT CONTROL SYS-
TEM : System Description".
H
JSDIA4183ZZ
I
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch INFOID:0000000012201072
• The transmission range switch is installed to upper part of tran- J

saxle case.
• The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position.
JSDIA4184ZZ
M
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000012201073
• The primary speed sensor is installed to side cover of transaxle. N

• The primary speed sensor detects primary pulley speed.
JSDIA3073ZZ

COMPONENT PARTS
• The primary speed sensor generates an ON-OFF pulse signal according to the rotating body speed. TCM
judges the rotating body speed from the pulse signal.
JSDIA1824GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000012201074
• The output speed sensor is installed to back side of transaxle.

• The output speed sensor detects final gear speed.
JSDIA3073ZZ
• The output speed sensor generates an ON-OFF pulse signal according to the rotating body speed. TCM
JSDIA1824GB

COMPONENT PARTS
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000012201075
A
• The input speed sensor is installed to the front side of transaxle
case.
• The input speed sensor detects input shaft speed. B
TM
JSDIA3074ZZ
• The input speed sensor generates an ON-OFF pulse signal according to the rotating body speed. TCM E
JSDIA1824GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000012201076

K
• The CVT fluid temperature sensor is installed to control valve.

• The CVT fluid temperature sensor detects CVT fluid temperature in oil pan. L
• The fluid temperature sensor uses a thermistor, and changes the signal voltage by converting changes in the
CVT fluid temperature to a resistance value. TCM evaluates the CVT fluid temperature from the signal volt-
age value.
M
JSDIA1825GB

COMPONENT PARTS
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Pressure Sensor INFOID:0000000012201077
• The primary pressure sensor is installed to control valve.

• The primary pressure sensor detects the pressure applied to the primary pulley.
• When pressure is applied to the ceramic device in the primary pressure sensor, the ceramic device is
deformed, resulting in voltage change. TCM evaluates the primary pressure from its voltage change. Voltage
is increased along with pressure increase.
JSDIA1831GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure Sensor INFOID:0000000012201078
• The secondary pressure sensor is installed to control valve.

• The secondary pressure sensor detects the pressure applied to the secondary pulley.
• When pressure is applied to the metal diaphragm in the secondary pressure sensor, the metal diaphragm is
deformed, resulting in voltage change. TCM evaluates the secondary pressure from its voltage change. Volt-
age is increased along with pressure increase.
JSDIA1831GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Pressure Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000012201079
• The primary pressure solenoid valve is installed to control valve.

• The primary pressure solenoid valve controls the primary reducing valve. For information about the primary
reducing valve, refer to TM-376, "TRANSAXLE : Component Description".

COMPONENT PARTS
• The primary pressure solenoid valve uses the linear solenoid valve
[N/H (normal high) type]. A
NOTE:
• The principle of the linear solenoid valve utilizes the fact that the
force pressing on the valve spool installed inside the coil
B
increases nearly in proportion to the current. This allows it to pro-
duce a fluid pressure that is proportional to this pressing force.
• The N/H (normal high) produces hydraulic control when the coil
is not energized. C
JSDIA3647GB
TM
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000012201080
• The secondary pressure solenoid valve is installed to control valve.

• The secondary pressure solenoid valve controls the secondary reducing valve. For information about the E
secondary reducing valve, refer to TM-376, "TRANSAXLE : Component Description".
• The secondary pressure solenoid valve uses the linear solenoid
valve [N/H (normal high) type]. F
NOTE:
increases nearly in proportion to the current. This allows it to pro- G
is not energized. H
JSDIA3647GB
I
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Select Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000012201081
• The select solenoid valve is installed to control valve.

• The select solenoid valve adjusts the forward clutch engaging pressure and the reverse brake engaging J
pressure. For information about the forward clutch and reverse brake, refer to TM-376, "TRANSAXLE :
Component Description".
• The select solenoid valve uses the linear solenoid valve [N/H (nor-
K
mal high) type].
NOTE:
force pressing on the valve spool installed inside the coil L
• The N/H (normal high) type produces hydraulic control when the M
coil is not energized.
JSDIA3647GB
N
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000012201082
• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is installed to control valve. O

• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve controls the torque converter clutch control valve. For information
about the torque converter clutch control valve, refer to TM-376, "TRANSAXLE : Component Description".
P

COMPONENT PARTS
• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve utilizes a linear sole-
noid valve [N/L (normal low) type].
NOTE:
• The N/L (normal low) type does not produce hydraulic control
when the coil is not energized.
JSDIA3648GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000012201083
• The line pressure solenoid valve is installed to control valve.

• The line pressure solenoid valve controls the pressure regulator valve. For information about the pressure
regulator valve, refer to TM-376, "TRANSAXLE : Component Description".
• The line pressure solenoid valve uses the linear solenoid valve [N/
H (normal high) type].
NOTE:
is not energized.
JSDIA3647GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch INFOID:0000000012201084
• The manual mode switch [mode select switch and position select switch (shift-up/shift-down)] is installed in
the CVT shift selector assembly.
• The mode select switch detects the position (the main shift gate side or manual shift gate side) of the selec-
tor lever and transmits a manual mode signal or a not manual mode signal to the combination meter. Then,
the TCM receives a manual mode signal or non-manual mode signal from the combination meter.
• The position select switch (shift-up) detects that the selector lever is shifted to the shift-up side of the manual
shift gate and transmits a manual mode shift up signal to the combination meter. Then, the TCM receives a
manual mode shift up signal from the combination meter.
• The position select switch (shift-down) detects that the selector lever is shifted to the shift-down side of the
manual shift gate and transmits a manual mode shift down signal to the combination meter. Then, the TCM
receives a manual mode shift down signal from the combination meter.
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : CVT Indicator lamp INFOID:0000000012201085
• CVT indicator lamp is positioned on the combination meter.

• CVT indicator lamp turns on for a certain period of time when the ignition switch turns ON, and then turns
OFF.
Condition (status) CVT indicator lamp

Ignition switch OFF. OFF
Ignition switch ON. ON
Approx. 2 seconds after ignition switch ON OFF
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Shift Position Indicator INFOID:0000000012201086
TCM transmits shift position signal to combination meter via CAN communication. The actual shift position is
displayed on combination meter according to the signal.

COMPONENT PARTS
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Indicator INFOID:0000000012201087
A
• Manual mode indicator (A) is positioned on the combination meter.
• The manual mode indicator illuminates when the selector lever is
operated to the manual shift gate side. It also displays the gear B
position (M1⇔M7) when the selector lever is operated to the +
side or – side. (Operates only during driving.)
• The manual mode indicator turns off when the selector lever is
operated to the main shift gate side. C
Condition (status) Manual mode indicator

TM
Selector lever is operated to the manual shift gate
Display
side. JSDIA2386ZZ
Selector lever is operated to the + side or – side. M1⇔M7

E
Selector lever is operated to the main shift gate side. Nothing displayed.
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Paddle Shifter INFOID:0000000012201088

F
• The paddle shifter is installed to the steering column.
• The paddle shifter transmits shift up and shift down signals to com-
bination meter. Then TCM receives signals from the combination G
meter via CAN communication.
I
JSDIA4188ZZ
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

J

COMPONENT PARTS
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000012201089
JSDIA2337ZZ
1. Shift lock release button cover* 2. Shift lock solenoid 3. Park position switch
4. Stop lamp switch
A: CVT shift selector assembly B: Brake pedal, upper
*: Shift lock release button becomes operative by removing shift lock cover.
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Description INFOID:0000000012201090
Component Function
Shift lock solenoid It operates according to the signal from the stop lamp switch and moves the lock lever.
• Rotates according to shift lock solenoid activation and releases the shift lock.
Lock lever • If shift lock solenoid does not activate, lock lever can be rotated when shift lock release but-
ton is pressed and shift lock is released.
Detent rod It links with the selector button and restricts the selector lever movement.
Park position switch It detects that the selector lever is in “P” position.
Shift lock release button Forcibly releases the shift lock when pressed.
• The stop lamp switch turns ON when the brake pedal is depressed.
Stop lamp switch
• When the stop lamp switch turns ON, the shift lock solenoid is energized.

A
TRANSAXLE
TRANSAXLE : Cross-Sectional View INFOID:0000000012201091
B
TM
JSDIA5169ZZ
N
1. Converter housing 2. Oil pump 3. Planetary gear

4. Control valve 5. Oil pan 6. Steel belt O
7. Primary pulley 8. Secondary pulley 9. Side cover
10. Transaxle case 11. Differential case 12. Final gear
13. Reduction gear 14. Idler gear 15. Output gear P
16. Drive sprocket 17. Torque converter 18. Driven sprocket
19. Oil pump chain
A. 2WD models B. 4WD models

TRANSAXLE : Operation Status INFOID:0000000012201092
×: Engaged or applied.
Selector lever Parking mech- Forward Secondary
Reverse brake Primary pulley Steel belt Final drive
position anism clutch pulley
P ×
R × × × × ×
N
D × × × × ×
TRANSAXLE : Transaxle Mechanism INFOID:0000000012201093
TORQUE CONVERTER (WITH LOCK-UP FUNCTION)

In the same way as a conventional A/T, the torque converter is a system that increases the engine torque and
transmits the torque to the transaxle. A symmetrical 3-element, 1-stage, 2-phase type is used here.
OIL PUMP
Utilizes a vane-type oil pump that is driven by the engine through the oil pump drive chain in order to increase
efficiency of pump discharge volume in low-speed zone and optimize pump discharge volume in high-speed
zone. Discharged oil from oil pump is transmitted to control valve. It is used as the oil of primary and second-
ary pulley operation, the oil of clutch operation, and the lubricant for each part.
PLANETARY GEAR
• A planetary gear type of forward/reverse selector mechanism is installed between the torque converter and
primary pulley.
• The power from the torque converter is input via the input shaft, operating a wet multi-plate clutch by means
of hydraulic pressure to switch between forward and reverse driving.
Operation of Planetary gear
JSDIA2426GB
BELT & PULLEY

It is composed of a pair of pulleys (the groove width is changed freely in the axial direction) and the steel belt
(the steel plates are placed continuously and the belt is guided with the multilayer steel rings on both sides).

The groove width changes according to wrapping radius of steel belt and pulley from low status to overdrive
status continuously with non-step. It is controlled with the oil pressures of primary pulley and secondary pulley. A
TM
K
JSDIA2428GB
Steel Belt
L
It is composed of multiple steel plates (A) and two steel rings (B)
stacked to a several number. The feature of this steel belt transmits
power with compression of the steel plate in contrast with transmis-
sion of power in pulling with a rubber belt. Friction force is required M
with the pulley slope to transmit power from the steel plate. The force
is generated with the following mechanism:
Oil pressure applies to the secondary pulley to nip the plate. ⇒The N
plate is pushed and extended outward. ⇒The steel ring shows with-
stands. ⇒Pulling force is generated on the steel ring. ⇒The plate of
the primary pulley is nipped between the pulley. ⇒Friction force is
generated between the steel belt and the pulley. O
Therefore, responsibilities are divided by the steel plate that trans-
JSDIA2431ZZ
mits the power with compression and the steel ring that maintains necessary friction force. In this way, the
tension of the steel ring is distributed on the entire surface and stress variation is limited, resulting in good P
durability.
Pulley
The primary pulley (input shaft side) and the secondary pulley (output shaft side) have the shaft with slope
(fixed cone surface), movable sheave (movable cone surface that can move in the axial direction) and oil pres-
sure chamber at the back of the movable sheave.

The movable sheave slides on the shaft to change the groove width of the pulley. Input signals of engine load
(accelerator pedal opening), primary pulley speed and secondary pulley speed change the operation pres-
sures of the primary pulley and the secondary pulley, and controls the pulley groove width.
JSDIA2429GB
FINAL DRIVE AND DIFFERENTIAL

The deceleration gears are composed of 2 stages: primary deceleration (output gear, idler gear pair) and sec-
ondary deceleration (reduction gear, final gear pair). All of these gears are helical gears.

The lubrication oil is the same as the CVT fluid which lubricates the entire transaxle.
A
TM
JSDIA2427GB F
TRANSAXLE : Oil Pressure System INFOID:0000000012201094
Oil pressure required for operation of the transaxle transmission mechanism is generated by oil pump, oil G
pressure control valve, solenoid valve, etc.
JSDIA3786GB
P

TRANSAXLE : Component Description INFOID:0000000012201095
Part name Function

Torque converter Increases engine torque and transmits it to the transaxle.
Utilizes a vane-type oil pump that is driven by the engine through the oil pump drive chain in order to
increase efficiency of pump discharge volume in low-speed zone and optimize pump discharge volume
Oil pump
in high-speed zone. Discharged oil from oil pump is transmitted to control valve. It is used as the oil of
primary and secondary pulley operation, the oil of clutch operation, and the lubricant for each part.
The forward clutch is wet and multiple plate type clutch that consists of clutch drum, piston, drive plate,
Forward clutch and driven plate. It is a clutch to move the vehicle forward by activating piston hydraulically, engaging
plates, and directly connecting sun gear and input shaft.
The reverse brake is a wet multiple-plate type brake that consists of transaxle case, piston, drive plate,
Reverse brake and driven plate. It is a brake to move the vehicle in reverse by activating piston hydraulically, engaging
plates, and fixing planetary gear.
The internal gear is directly connected to forward clutch drum. It is a gear that moves the outer edge of
Internal gear pinion planet of planet carrier. It transmits power to move the vehicle in reverse when the planet carrier
is fixed.
Composed of a carrier, pinion planet, and pinion shaft. This gear fixes and releases the planet carrier in
Planet carrier
order to switch between forward and reverse driving.
Sun gear is a set part with planet carrier and internal gear. It transmits transmitted force to primary fixed
Sun gear sheave. It rotates in forward or reverse direction according to activation of either forward clutch or re-
verse brake.
The input shaft is directly connected to forward clutch drum and transmits traction force from torque con-
Input shaft verter. In shaft center, there are holes for hydraulic distribution to primary pulley and hydraulic distribution
for lockup ON/OFF.
Primary pulley It is composed of a pair of pulleys (the groove width is changed freely in the axial direction) and the steel
belt. The groove width changes according to wrapping radius of steel belt and pulley from low status to
Secondary pulley
overdrive status continuously with non-step. It is controlled with the oil pressures of primary pulley and
Steel belt secondary pulley.
Manual shaft
Parking rod When the manual shaft is in the P position, the parking rod that is linked to the manual shaft rotates the
parking pole. When the parking pole rotates, it engages with the parking gear, fixing the parking gear. As
Parking pawl a result, the secondary pulley that is integrated with the parking gear is fixed.
Parking gear
Output gear
Idler gear The deceleration gears are composed of 2 stages: primary deceleration (output gear, idler gear pair) and
Reduction gear secondary deceleration (reduction gear, final gear pair). All of these gears are helical gears.
Differential
Torque converter regulator Adjusts the feed pressure to the torque converter to the optimum pressure corresponding to the driving
valve condition.
Adjusts the discharge pressure from the oil pump to the optimum pressure (line pressure) corresponding
Pressure regulator valve
to the driving condition.
Torque converter clutch
Adjusts the torque converter engage and disengage pressures.
control valve
Manual valve Distributes the clutch operation pressure to each circuit according to the selector lever position.
Secondary reducing valve Reduces line pressure and adjusts secondary pressure.
Primary reducing valve Reduces line pressure and adjusts primary pressure.
Reduces line pressure and adjusts pilot pressure to the solenoid valves listed below.
• Primary pressure solenoid valve
Pilot valve A • Secondary pressure solenoid valve
• Select solenoid valve
Pilot valve B Reduces pilot pressure and adjusts pilot pressure to the torque converter clutch solenoid valve.
FLUID COOLER & FLUID WARMER SYSTEM

FLUID COOLER & FLUID WARMER SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000012201096
A
CVT FLUID COOLER SCHEMATIC
TM
JSDIA7183GB
G
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
CVT Oil Warmer
• The CVT oil warmer (1) is installed on the front part of transaxle H
assembly.
• When engine is started while engine and CVT are cold, engine
coolant temperature rises more quickly than CVT fluid tempera-
ture. CVT oil warmer is provided with two circuits for CVT and I
engine coolant respectively so that warmed engine coolant warms
CVT quickly. This helps shorten CVT warming up time, improving
fuel economy. J
• A cooling effect is obtained when CVT fluid temperature is high.
JSDIA6381ZZ K
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000012201097
L
• The shift lock is the mechanism provided to prevent quick start of a vehicle by incorrect operation of a drive
when the selector lever is in P position.
• Selector lever can be shifted from the P position to another position when the following conditions are satis- M
fied.
- Ignition switch is ON.
- Stop lamp switch ON (brake pedal is depressed) N
- Press the selector button.
SHIFT LOCK OPERATION AT P POSITION
When brake pedal is not depressed (no selector operation allowed) O

When the brake pedal is not depressed with the ignition switch ON,
the shift lock solenoid (A) is OFF (not energized) and the solenoid
rod (B) is extended with spring.
The connecting lock lever (C) is located at the position shown in the
figure when the solenoid rod is extended. It prevents the movement
of the detent rod (D). The selector lever cannot be shifted from the P
position for this reason.
JSDIA2338ZZ
When brake pedal is depressed (selector lever operation allowed)

The shift lock solenoid (A) is turned ON (energized) when the brake
pedal is depressed with the ignition switch ON. The solenoid rod (B)
is compressed with the electromagnetic force. The connecting lock
lever (C) rotates when the solenoid rod is compressed. Therefore,
the detent rod (D) can be moved. The selector lever can be shifted to
other positions for this reason.
JSDIA2339ZZ
P POSITION HOLD MECHANISM (IGNITION SWITCH LOCK)

The shift lock solenoid (A) is not energized when the ignition switch
is in any position other than ON. The shift mechanism is locked and
P position is held. The operation cannot be performed from P posi-
tion if the brake pedal is depressed with the ignition switch ON when
the operation system of shift lock solenoid is malfunctioning. How-
ever, the lock lever (B) is forcibly rotated and the shift lock is
released when the shift lock release rod (C) is pressed from above.
The selector operation from P position can be performed.
D : Detent rod
CAUTION: JSDIA2340ZZ
Use the shift lock release button only when the selector lever
cannot be operated even if the brake pedal is depressed with the ignition switch ON.

SYSTEM
SYSTEM
A
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000012201098
B
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
C
TM
N
JSDIA7185GB
MAIN CONTROL CONTENTS OF TCM

O
Controls Reference
Line pressure control TM-384, "LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Description"
Shift control TM-386, "SHIFT CONTROL : System Description" P
Select control TM-389, "SELECT CONTROL : System Description"
Lock-up control TM-390, "LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Description"
TM-391, "INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM : System Descrip-
Integrated Control System
tion"
Fail-safe TM-409, "Fail-safe"

SYSTEM
Self-diagnosis function TM-397, "CONSULT Function"
Communication function with CONSULT TM-397, "CONSULT Function"
LIST OF CONTROL ITEMS AND INPUT/OUTPUT
Line pressure Lock-up con- Fail-safe func-

Control Item Shift control Select control
control trol tion*
Engine torque signal
× × × × ×
(CAN communication)
Engine speed signal
× × × × ×
(CAN communication)
Accelerator pedal position signal
× × × ×
(CAN communication)
Closed throttle position signal
× × ×
(CAN communication)
Stop lamp switch signal
× × × ×
(CAN communication)
Primary pressure sensor ×
Secondary pressure sensor × × ×
Input CVT fluid temperature sensor × × × × ×
Primary speed sensor × × × × ×
Output speed sensor × × × ×
Input speed sensor × × × × ×
Transmission range switch × × × × ×
Manual mode switch signal
(Manual mode signal, non-manual
mode signal, manual mode shift up
× × ×
signal, manual mode shift down sig-
nal)
(CAN communication)
Paddle shift up signal, Paddle shift
down signal × × ×
(CAN communication)
Line pressure solenoid valve × × × ×
Primary pressure solenoid valve × × ×
Torque converter clutch solenoid
× ×
valve
Output
Secondary pressure solenoid valve × × ×
Select solenoid valve × ×
Shift position indicator
×
(CAN communication)
*: If these input/output signals show errors, TCM activates the fail-safe function.
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe INFOID:0000000012201099
TCM has a fail-safe mode. The mode functions so that operation can be continued even if the signal circuit of
the main electronically controlled input/output parts is damaged.
If the vehicle shows following behaviors including “poor acceleration”, a malfunction of the applicable system
is detected by TCM and the vehicle may be in a fail-safe mode. At this time, check the DTC code and perform
inspection and repair according to the malfunction diagnosis procedures.
Fail-safe function

SYSTEM
DTC Vehicle behavior Conditions of vehicle A

P062F Not changed from normal driving —
• Shift position indicator on combination meter is not dis-
played B
P0705 —
• Start is slow
• Lock-up is not performed C
played
P0706
— TM
• Start is slow
E
• Start is slow Engine coolant temperature when engine start:
• Acceleration is slow Temp. ≥ 10°C (50°F)
Engine coolant temperature when engine start: F
• Start is slow
P0711 −35°C (−31°F) ≤ Temp. < 10°C (50°F)
Engine coolant temperature when engine star:
• Start is slow
Temp. < −35°C (−31°F)
G
• Acceleration is slow Temp. ≥ 10°C (50°F) H
Engine coolant temperature when engine start:
• Start is slow
P0712 −35°C (−31°F) ≤ Temp. < 10°C (50°F)
I
• Start is slow
Temp. < −35°C (−31°F)
J
Engine coolant temperature when engine start: K
• Start is slow
P0713 −35°C (−31°F) ≤ Temp. < 10°C (50°F)
• Start is slow
Temp. < −35°C (−31°F)
L
• Start is slow
P0715 — M
• Start is slow
P0717 • Acceleration is slow — N
• Start is slow
P0740 • Acceleration is slow — O
• Start is slow
P0743 • Acceleration is slow —
P
• Start is slow

SYSTEM
DTC Vehicle behavior Conditions of vehicle
• Start is slow
P0746 —
• Start is slow
• Acceleration is slow When a malfunction occurs on the low oil pressure side
P0776 • Vehicle speed is not increased
• Start is slow
When a malfunction occurs on the high oil pressure side
• Start is slow
P0778 —
• Start is slow
P0779
P0826 Manual mode is not activated
P0841 Not changed from normal driving
P0847 Not changed from normal driving —
P084C Not changed from normal driving
P084D Not changed from normal driving
• Start is slow
P0863 —
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
P0962 —
• Start is slow
P0963 —
• Start is slow
When a malfunction occurs on the low oil pressure side
P0965 • Lock-up is not performed
• Start is slow
P0966 —

SYSTEM
A
• Start is slow
P0967 —
• Lock-up is not performed B
P17F0 Not changed from normal driving —
P17F2 Not changed from normal driving — C
• Start is slow
P2765 —
• Lock-up is not performed TM
• Start is slow E
Selector shock is large When a malfunction occurs on the high oil pressure side
F
P2814 Selector shock is large —
• Selector shock is large G
• Start is slow
U0073 —
H
• Start is slow
U0100 —
• Lock-up is not performed I
U0102 Not changed from normal driving —
J
U0164 Not changed from normal driving — K
• Start is slow
U0300 —
L
U1117 Not changed from normal driving — M
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Protection Control INFOID:0000000012201100
The TCM becomes the protection control status temporarily to protect the safety when the safety of TCM and N
transmission is lost. It automatically returns to the normal status if the safety is secured.
The TCM has the following protection control.
CONTROL FOR WHEEL SPIN O
When a wheel spin is detected, the engine output and gear ratio are limited and the line pressure is increased.
Control
Limits engine output when a wheel spin occurs in any of right and left drive wheels. P
Vehicle behavior in If the accelerator is kept depressing during wheel spin, the engine revolution and vehicle speed are limited to
control a certain degree.
Normal return condi-
Wheel spin convergence returns the control to the normal control.
tion
TORQUE IS REDUCED WHEN DRIVING WITH THE REVERSE GEAR

SYSTEM
Control Engine output is controlled according to a vehicle speed while reversing the vehicle.
Vehicle behavior in
Power performance may be lowered while reversing the vehicle.
control
Torque returns to normal by positioning the selector lever in a range other than “R” position.
tion
CONTROL WHEN FLUID TEMPERATURE IS HIGH
When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the gear shift permission maximum revolution and the maximum
Control
torque are reduced than usual to prevent increase of the oil temperature.
Vehicle behavior in
Power performance may be lowered, compared to normal control.
control
The control returns to the normal control when CVT fluid temperature is lowered.
tion
REVERSE PROHIBIT CONTROL
The reverse brake is controlled to avoid becoming engaged when the selector lever is set in “R” position while
Control
driving in forward direction at more than the specified speed.
Vehicle behavior in If the selector lever is put at “R” position when driving with the forward gear, the gear becomes neutral, not
control reverse.
Normal return condi- The control returns to normal control when the vehicle is driven at low speeds. (The reverse brake becomes
tion engaged.)
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL

LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000012201101
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JSDIA5312GB

SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
Highly accurate line pressure control and secondary pressure control reduces friction for improvement of fuel A
economy.
Normal Oil Pressure Control
Appropriate line pressure and secondary pressure suitable for driving condition are determined based on the B
accelerator pedal position, engine speed, primary pulley (input) speed, secondary pulley (output) speed, vehi-
cle speed, input torque, stop lamp switch signal, transmission range switch signal, lock-up signal, power volt-
age, target shift ratio, oil temperature, oil pressure, and manual mode switch signal. C
Secondary Pressure Feedback Control
In normal oil pressure control and oil pressure control in shifting, highly accurate secondary pressure is deter-
mined by detecting the secondary pressure using an oil pressure sensor and by feedback control. TM
SHIFT CONTROL
E

SYSTEM
SHIFT CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000012201102
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JSDIA5313GB
DESCRIPTION
To select the gear ratio that can give the driving force to meet driver's intent or vehicle situation, the vehicle
driving condition such as vehicle speed or accelerator pedal position is detected and the most appropriate
gear ratio is selected and the shifting method before reaching the speed is determined. The information is out-
put to the primary pressure solenoid valve and secondary pressure solenoid valve to control the line pressure
input/output to the pulley, to determine the pulley (movable pulley) position and to control the gear position.
Shift Position Function
• D Position (Normal)

SYSTEM
Gear shifting is performed in all shifting ranges from the lowest to
the highest gear ratio. A
SCIA1953E
TM
• M Position (Manual Mode)
When the selector lever is put in the manual shift gate side, the
fixed changing gear line is set. By moving the selector lever to + E
side or - side, the manual mode switch is changed over, and shift
change like M/T becomes possible following the changing gear set
line step by step.
F
JSDIA4104GB
H
- Manual Mode Information
The TCM transmits the manual mode shift refusal signal to the combination meter if the TCM refuses the
transmission from the driving status of vehicle when the selector lever shifts to UP side (+ side) or DOWN I
side (−side). The combination meter blinks shift indicator on the combination meter and sounds the buzzer to
indicate the driver that the shifting is not performed when receiving this signal. However, the TCM does not
transmit the manual mode shift refusal signal in the conditions as per the following.
J
• When the selector lever shifts to DOWN side (− side) while driving in M1.
• When the selector lever shifts to UP (+ side) side while driving in M7.
Blipping Control
K
Using engine torque, the blipping control enables a faster and more responsive gear shifting by compensating
inertia torque generated from the rotational change during gear shifting in real time.
Operation L
• The blipping control is activated when shifting up/down in manual mode or when shifting up/down in “Ds”
position.
NOTE:
The blipping control is not activated when the vehicle is in the following conditions: M
• When CAN communication is abnormal.
• During the retard inhibit signal transmission from ECM within the engine-CVT integrated control.
• Engine coolant temperature is less than 20°C (68°F). N
• CVT fluid temperature is more than 120°C (248°F).
• Vehicle speed is less than 20 km/h (13 MPH).
• When ABS, TCS or VDC is active.
• During wheel spin. O
• ECM selects blipping control or normal shift control according to the gear position, the selector lever posi-
tion, etc.
• The blipping control is activated when ECM judges it controllable after receiving a control permit signal from P
TCM.

SYSTEM
• ECM controls engine torque, based on generated inertia torque.
JSDIA2841GB
Hill Climbing And Descending Control

If a downhill is detected with the accelerator pedal is released, the system performs downshift to increase the
engine brake force so that vehicle may not be accelerated more than necessary. If a climbing hill is detected,
the system improves the acceleration performance in re-acceleration by limiting the gear shift range on the
high side.
NOTE:
For engine brake control on a downhill, the control can be stopped with CONSULT.
JSDIA2060GB
Control In Acceleration
Control In Acceleration
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed 4/8 or more in D position, CVT performs step shifting to allow the
vehicle speed and engine speed to increase simultaneously. This improves the feel of acceleration and
enables the fuel economy by preventing unnecessary rise in engine speed, compared to the conventional
shifting.

SYSTEM
TM
E
JSDIA5273GB
SELECT CONTROL
F
SELECT CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000012201103
SYSTEM DIAGRAM G
JSDIA3711GB
O
DESCRIPTION
Based on accelerator pedal angle, engine speed, primary pulley speed, and the input speed, the optimum
operating pressure is set to reduce impact of a selector lever operation while shifting from “N” (“P”) to “D” (“R”)
position. P
LOCK-UP CONTROL

SYSTEM
LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000012201104
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JSDIA5314GB
DESCRIPTION
• Controls for improvement of the transmission efficiency by engaging the torque converter clutch in the
torque converter and eliminating slip of the converter. Achieves comfortable driving with slip control of the
torque converter clutch.
• The oil pressure feed circuit for the torque converter clutch piston chamber is connected to the torque con-
verter clutch control valve. The torque converter clutch control valve is switched by the torque converter
clutch solenoid valve with the signal from TCM. This controls the oil pressure circuit, which is supplied to the
torque converter clutch piston chamber, to the release side or engagement side.
• If the CVT fluid temperature is low or the vehicle is in fail-safe mode due to malfunction, lock-up control is
prohibited.
Lock-up engagement
In lock-up engagement, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve makes the torque converter clutch control
valve locked up to generate the lock-up apply pressure. This pushes the torque converter clutch piston for
engagement.
Lock-up release condition
In lock-up release, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve makes the torque converter clutch control valve
non-locked up to drain the lock-up apply pressure. This does not engage the torque converter clutch piston.
INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM

SYSTEM
INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000012201105
TM
N
JSDIA7197GB
O
INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000012201106
• TCM receives the NORMAL mode signal, ECO mode signal or SPORT mode signal from the multi display
unit through CAN communication. P
• TCM sends the recognized control mode to ECM through CAN communication (drive mode select signal).
• With operation on the multi display unit, the mode is changed on the display, but the mode is actually not
changed due to CAN communication malfunction.
• When the selector lever is in any position other than D position, the gear shift line is not changed according
to changes in the control mode.
CONTROL DESCRIPTION

SYSTEM
Control mode Control

Driving mode that automatically selects the shift schedule considering the balance of fuel economy and
NORMAL mode
driving performance based on the driving condition and driving trend.
Keeps high engine speed and provides direct feel and acceleration performance suitable for driving on
winding road.
Sport mode performs the following control:
• High gear ratio limit
SPORT mode
• Step shift
• Braking down shift
• Acceleration off ratio hold
• Cornering ratio hold
Driving mode that selects the shift schedule with priority on fuel economy which gives low engine revo-
ECO mode
lution.
Sport Mode Function
High Gear Ratio Limit

• Engine speed is kept higher than at D position driving, which helps to operate a “sporty” driving.
JSDIA2893GB
Step Shift
• Pressing down the accelerator pedal allows to drive the vehicle
with a feeling of A/T-like gear shifting.
JSDIA3708GB
Braking Down Shift

SYSTEM
• At a moderate braking operation before corner etc., the engine speed increases according to the decelera-
tion and the transaxle shifts down automatically, in order to optimize the response at reacceleration while A
providing an adequate engine braking.
TM
JSDIA2894GB
Acceleration Off Ratio Hold G

• When the vehicle is decelerated by quickly releasing the foot from accelerator pedal, transmission does not
shift up automatically to keep a constant gear ratio, holding the high engine speed.
When the vehicle is decelerated (by accelerator pedal OFF) in upper area of double line in below chart, the H
engine speed shows a characteristic like “A”.
On the other hand, when the vehicle is decelerated (by accelerator pedal OFF) in lower area of double line in
below chart, the engine speed shows a characteristic like “B”.
I
JSDIA5404GB N
Cornering Ratio Hold

• Transaxle holds gear ratio in order to keep a smooth vehicle speed during the curve and to give an adequate
driving force at the curve end. O
FAIL-SAFE
If CAN communication malfunction occurs between TCM and the multi display unit, the mode when the mal-
P
function occurs is maintained for approximately 30 seconds and the mode is changed to NORMAL mode
when the accelerator pedal is released.

This system is an on board diagnostic system that records exhaust emission-related diagnostic information
and detects a sensors/actuator-related malfunction. A malfunction is indicated by the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) and stored in ECU memory as a DTC. The diagnostic information can be obtained with the diag-
nostic tool (GST: Generic Scan Tool).
GST (Generic Scan Tool) INFOID:0000000012201108
When GST is connected with a data link connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the
control module equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. Refer to GI-53,
"Description".
NOTE:
Service $0A is not applied for regions where it is not mandated.

A
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : 1 Trip Detection Diagnosis and 2 Trip Detection Diagno-
B
sis INFOID:0000000012201109
NOTE:
“Start the engine and turn OFF the ignition switch after warm-up.” This is defined as 1 trip. C
1 TRIP DETECTION DIAGNOSIS
When initial malfunction is detected, TCM memorizes DTC. In these diagnoses, some illuminate MIL and
some do not. Refer to TM-414, "DTC Index". TM
2 TRIP DETECTION DIAGNOSIS

When initial malfunction is detected, TCM memorizes DTC of the 1st trip. MIL does not light at this stage. <1 E
trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again in next driving, TCM memorizes DTC. When DTC is memorized, MIL
lights. <2 trip>
“Trip” of the “2 trip detection diagnosis” indicates the driving mode that executes self-diagnosis during driving. F
×: Check possible —: Check not possible
DTC at the 1st trip DTC MIL

Item Display at the Display at the Display at the Display at the Illumination at Illumination at
G
1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip 2nd trip the 1st trip the 2nd trip
1 trip detection diagnosis
— — × — × — H
(Refer to TM-414, "DTC Index")
2 trip detection diagnosis
× — — × — ×
(Refer to TM-414, "DTC Index")
I
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : DTC and DTC of 1st Trip INFOID:0000000012201110
2 TRIP DETECTION DIAGNOSIS THAT ILLUMINATES MIL J

• The DTC number of the 1st trip is the same as the DTC number.
• When a malfunction is detected at the 1st trip, TCM memorizes DTC of the 1st trip. MIL does not light at this
stage. If the same malfunction is not detected at the 2nd trip (conforming to necessary driving conditions),
DTC at the 1st trip is erased from TCM. If the same malfunction is detected at the 2nd trip, TCM memorizes K
DTC and MIL lights at the same time.
• The DTC of the 1st trip is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5. Since detection of DTC at the
1st trip does not illuminate MIL, warning for a problem is not given to a driver. L
• For procedure to delete DTC and 1st trip DTC from TCM, refer to TM-397, "CONSULT Function".
• If DTC of the 1st trip is detected, it is necessary to check the cause according to the “Diagnosis flow”. Refer
to TM-426, "Work Flow".
M
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) INFOID:0000000012201111
• TCM not only detects DTC, but also sends the MIL signal to ECM through CAN communication. ECM sends N
the MIL signal to the combination meter through CAN communication according to the signal, and illumi-
nates MIL.
• For malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) description, refer to EC-666, "DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Malfunc-
tion Indicator Lamp (MIL)". O
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Counter System INFOID:0000000012201112
P
RELATION BETWEEN DTC AT 1ST TRIP/DTC/MIL AND DRIVING CONDITIONS (FOR 2 TRIP DE-
TECTION DIAGNOSIS THAT ILLUMINATES MIL)
• When initial malfunction is detected, TCM memorizes DTC of the 1st trip. MIL does not light at this stage.
• If the same malfunction is detected at the 2nd trip, TCM memorizes DTC and MIL lights at the same time.
• Then, MIL goes after driving the vehicle for 3 trips under “Driving condition B” without malfunction.
• DTC is displayed until 40 trips of “Driving condition A” are satisfied without detecting the same malfunction.
DTC is erased when 40 trips are satisfied.

• When the self-diagnosis result is acceptable at the 2nd trip (conforming to driving condition B), DTC of the
1st trip is erased.
COUNTER SYSTEM LIST
Item Driving condition Trip

MIL (OFF) B 3
DTC (clear) A 40
DTC at 1st trip (clear) B 1
DRIVING CONDITION
Driving condition A
Driving condition A is the driving condition that provides warm-up.
In specific, count-up is performed when all of the following conditions are satisfied.
• Engine speed is 400 rpm or more.
• After start of the engine, the water temperature increased by 20°C (36°F) or more.
• Water temperature was 70°C (158°F) or more.
• The ignition switch was changed from ON to OFF.
NOTE:
• If the same malfunction is detected regardless of the driving condition, reset the A counter.
• When the above is satisfied without detecting the same malfunction, count up the A counter.
• When MIL goes off due to the malfunction and the A counter reaches 40, the DTC is erased.
Driving condition B
Driving condition B is the driving condition that performs all diagnoses once.
In specific, count-up is performed when all of the following conditions are satisfied.
• Engine speed is 400 rpm or more.
• Water temperature was 70°C (158°F) or more.
• In closed loop control, vehicle speed of 70 – 120 km/h (43 – 75 MPH) continued for 60 seconds or more.
• In closed loop control, vehicle speed of 30 – 60 km/h (19 – 37 MPH) continued for 10 seconds or more.
• In closed loop control, vehicle speed of 4 km/h (2 MPH) or less and idle determination ON continued for 12
seconds or more.
• After start of the engine, 22 minutes or more have passed.
• The condition that the vehicle speed is 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more continued for 10 seconds or more in total.
• The ignition switch was changed from ON to OFF.
NOTE:
• If the same malfunction is detected regardless of the driving condition, reset the B counter.
• When the above is satisfied without detecting the same malfunction, count up the B counter.
• When the B counter reaches 3 without malfunction, MIL goes off.
• When the B counter is counted once without detecting the same malfunction after TCM memorizes DTC of
the 1st trip, DTC of the 1st trip is erased.

TIME CHART
A
TM
N
JSDIA1868GB
CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000012201113

O
APPLICABLE ITEM
P
Conditions Function
Work Support The settings for ECU functions can be changed.
Self Diagnostic Results The ECU self diagnostic results are displayed.
Data Monitor The ECU input/output data is displayed in real time.
ECU Identification The ECU part number is displayed.
CALIB DATA The calibration data status of TCM can be checked.

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Refer to TM-414, "DTC Index".
DTC at 1st trip and method to read DTC
• DTC (P0705, P0712, P0715, etc.) is specified by SAE J2012/ISO 15031-6.
• DTC and DTC at 1st trip are displayed on “Self Diagnostic results” of CONSULT.
When DTC is currently detected, “CRNT” is displayed. If “PAST” is displayed, it shows a malfunction
occurred in the past. The trip number of drive without malfunction of concerned DTC can be confirmed with
“IGN counter” inside “FFD”.
• When the DTC at the 1st trip is detected, “1t” is displayed.
DTC deletion method
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is left ON after repair, turn OFF the ignition switch and wait for 10 seconds or more. Then,
turn the ignition ON again. (Engine stop)
1. Touch “TRANSMISSION” of CONSULT.
2. Touch “Self Diagnostic Result”.
3. Touch “Erase”. (DTC memorized in TCM is erased.)
IGN counter
The ignition counter is displayed in “FFD” and the number of times of satisfied “Driving condition A” is dis-
played after normal recovery of DTC. Refer to TM-395, "DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Counter System".
• If malfunction (DTC) is currently detected, “0” is displayed.
• After normal recovery, every time “Driving condition A” is satisfied, the display value increases from 1 → 2 →
3...38 → 39.
• When MIL turns OFF due to the malfunction and the counter reaches 40, the DTC is erased.
NOTE:
The counter display of “40” cannot be checked.
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
Monitored item (Unit) Remarks

VSP SENSOR (km/h or mph) Displays the vehicle speed calculated from the CVT output shaft speed.
ESTM VSP SIG (km/h or mph) Displays the vehicle speed signal (ABS) received through CAN communication.
INPUT SPEED SENSOR (rpm) Displays the input speed calculated from the pulse signal of the input speed sensor.
Displays the primary pulley speed calculated from the pulse signal of the primary
PRI SPEED SEN (rpm)
speed sensor.
Displays the secondary pulley speed calculated from the pulse signal of the output
SEC REV SENSOR (rpm)
speed sensor.
ENG SPEED SIG (rpm) Displays the engine speed received through CAN communication.
SEC PRESSURE SEN (V) Displays the signal voltage of the secondary pressure sensor.
PRI PRESSURE SEN (V) Displays the signal voltage of the primary pressure sensor.
ATF TEMP SEN (V) Displays the signal voltage of the CVT fluid temperature sensor.
G SENSOR* (G) Displays the decel G signal received through CAN communication.
VIGN SEN (V) Displays the battery voltage applied to TCM.
PVING VOLT (V) Displays the backup voltage of TCM.
VEHICLE SPEED (km/h or mph) Displays the vehicle speed recognized by TCM.
INPUT REV (rpm) Displays the input shaft speed of CVT recognized by TCM.
PRI SPEED (rpm) Displays the primary pulley speed recognized by TCM.
SEC SPEED (rpm) Displays the secondary pulley speed recognized by TCM.
ENG SPEED (rpm) Displays the engine speed recognized by TCM.
Displays the speed difference between the input shaft speed of CVT and the engine
SLIP REV (rpm)
speed.

A
Displays the pulley gear ratio calculated from primary pulley speed/secondary pulley
PULLEY GEAR RATIO
speed.
Displays the acceleration and deceleration speed of the vehicle calculated from ve-
G SPEED (G) B
hicle speed change.
ACCEL POSI SEN 1 (deg) Displays the estimated throttle position received through CAN communication.
VENG TRQ (Nm) Display the engine torque recognized by TCM.
C
PRI TRQ (Nm) Display the input shaft torque of CVT.
TRQ RTO Display the torque ratio of torque converter.
Displays the secondary pressure calculated from the signal voltage of the secondary TM
SEC PRESSURE (MPa)
pressure sensor.
Displays the primary pressure calculated from the signal voltage of the primary pres-
PRI PRESSURE (MPa)
sure sensor. E
Displays the CVT fluid temperature calculated from the signal voltage of the CVT flu-
FLUID TEMP (°C or °F)
id temperature sensor.
Displays the target primary pulley speed calculated from processing of gear shift F
DSR REV (rpm)
control.
TGT PLLY GR RATIO Displays the target gear ratio of the pulley from processing of gear shift control.
Displays the target oil pressure of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve calcu- G
LU PRS (MPa)
lated from oil pressure processing of gear shift control.
Displays the target oil pressure of the line pressure solenoid valve calculated from
LINE PRS (MPa)
oil pressure processing of gear shift control. H
Displays the target oil pressure of the primary pressure solenoid valve calculated
TRGT PRI PRESSURE (MPa)
from oil pressure processing of gear shift control.
TRGT SELECT PRESSURE (MPa)

Displays the target oil pressure of the select solenoid valve calculated from oil pres- I
sure processing of gear shift control.
Displays the target oil pressure of the secondary pressure solenoid valve calculated
TRGT SEC PRESSURE (MPa)
from oil pressure processing of gear shift control. J
Displays the command current from TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid
ISOLT1 (A)
valve.
ISOLT2 (A) Displays the command current from TCM to the line pressure solenoid valve. K
PRI SOLENOID (A) Displays the command current from TCM to the primary pressure solenoid valve.
SEC SOLENOID CURRENT (A) Displays the command current from TCM to the secondary pressure solenoid valve.
SELECT SOLENOID CUR-
L
(A) Displays the command current from TCM to the select solenoid valve.
RENT
Monitors the command current from TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid
SOLMON1 (A) M
valve and displays the monitored value.
Monitors the command current from TCM to the line pressure solenoid valve and
SOLMON2 (A)
displays the monitored value.
Monitors the command current from TCM to the primary pressure solenoid valve N
PRI SOL MON (A)
and displays the monitored value.
Monitors the command current from TCM to the secondary pressure solenoid valve
SEC SOL MON CURRENT (A)
and displays the monitored value. O
Monitors the command current from TCM to the select solenoid valve and displays
SELECT SOL MON CURRENT (A)
the monitored value.
D POSITION SW (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the transmission range switch (D position). P
N POSITION SW (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the transmission range switch (N position).
R POSITION SW (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the transmission range switch (R position).
P POSITION SW (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the transmission range switch (P position).
L POSITION SW* (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the transmission range switch (L position).
DS RANGE SW* (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the transmission range switch (Ds position).

Displays the reception status of the stop lamp switch signal received through CAN
BRAKESW (On/Off)
communication.
Displays the reception status of the closed throttle position signal received through
IDLE SW (On/Off)
CAN communication.
Displays the reception status of the sport mode switch signal received through CAN
SPORT MODE SW* (On/Off)
communication.
Displays the reception status of the ECO mode switch signal received through CAN
ECO MODE SW (On/Off)
communication.
STRDWNSW (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the paddle shifter (down switch).
STRUPSW (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the paddle shifter (up switch).
DOWNLVR (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the selector lever (down switch).
UPLVR (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the selector lever (up switch).
NONMMODE (On/Off) Displays if the selector lever position is not at the manual shift gate.
MMODE (On/Off) Displays if the selector lever position is at the manual shift gate.
Displays the reception status of the TOW mode switch signal received through CAN
TOW MODE SW* (On/Off)
communication.
Displays the transaxle value of shift position signal transmitted via CAN communi-
SHIFT IND SIGNAL
cation.
Displays the transaxle status of the CVT warning lamp signal transmitted through
CVT LAMP* (On/Off)
CAN communication.
Displays the transaxle status of the SPORT indicator lamp signal transmitted
SPORT MODE IND* (On/Off)
through CAN communication.
Displays the transaxle status of the manual mode signal transmitted through CAN
MANU MODE SIGNAL (On/Off)
communication.
Displays the shift position signal status from transmission range switch (Ds posi-
DS RANGE SIGNAL* (On/Off)
tion).
Displays the transaxle status of the ECO mode signal transmitted through CAN
ECO MODE SIGNAL (On/Off)
communication.
Displays the reception status of the VDC operation signal received through CAN
VDC ON (On/Off)
communication.
Displays the reception status of the TCS operation signal received through CAN
TCS ON (On/Off)
communication.
Displays the reception status of the ABS malfunction signal received through CAN
ABS FAIL SIGNAL (On/Off)
communication.
Displays the reception status of the ABS operation signal received through CAN
ABS ON (On/Off)
communication.
RANGE Displays the gear position recognized by TCM.
M GEAR POS Display the target gear of manual mode
G SEN SLOPE* (%) Displays the gradient angle calculated from the G sensor signal voltage.
G SEN CALIBRATION* (YET/DONE) Displays the status of “G SENSOR CALIBRATION” in “Work Support”.
N IDLE STATUS* (On/Off) Displays idle neutral status.
ENGBRKLVL (On/Off) Displays the setting of “ENGINE BRAKE ADJ” in “Work Support”.
DRIVE MODE STATS* Displays the drive mode status recognized by TCM.
SNOW MODE* (On/Off) Displays whether it is the SNOW mode.
ECO MODE* (On/Off) Displays whether it is the ECO mode.
NORMAL MODE* (On/Off) Displays whether it is the NORMAL mode.
SPORT MODE* (On/Off) Displays whether it is the SPORT mode.
(INCOMP/
AIR BLDING STATE* Displays the status of “ELECTRIC O.P. AIR BLEEDING” in “Work Support”.
COMP)

A
Displays the command signal value (duty) of the electric oil pump transmitted from
ELECTRIC OP DUTY* (%)
TCM.
Monitors the status signal value (duty) transmitted from the electric oil pump and dis-
E-OP DUTY MON* (%) B
plays the monitored value.
ELECTRIC OP RELAY* (On/Off) Displays the command status from TCM to the electric oil pump relay.
Monitors the command status from TCM to the oil pump relay and displays the mon-
E-OP RELAY MON* (On/Off) C
itored value.
• Displays CVT fluid temperature count.
CVT-B
• This monitor item does not use.
TM
• Displays CVT fluid temperature count.
CVT-A
• This monitor item does not use.
G SENSOR* (V) Displays the signal voltage of the G sensor.
E
*: Not applicable but displayed.
WORK SUPPORT
F
Item name Description
CONFORM CVTF DETERIORTN Checks the degradation level of the CVT fluid under severe conditions.
G SENSOR CALIBRATION* Compensates the G sensor. G
ERASE LEARNING VALUE Erases learning value memorized by TCM.
Although there is no malfunction on the transaxle and the CVT system, if a cus- H
tomer make a complaint like “I do not feel comfortable with automatic operation of
ENGINE BRAKE ADJ.
the engine brake on downhill”, the engine brake may be cancelled with “engine
brake adjustment”.
WRITE IP CHARA - REPLACEMENT AT/CVT Writes IP characteristics when transaxle assembly is replaced. I
READ IP CHARA - REPLACEMENT TCM Reads IP characteristics when TCM is replaced.
WRITE IP CHARA - REPLACEMENT TCM Writes IP characteristics when TCM is replaced.
J
*: This item does not use.
Engine brake adjustment
K
ENGINE BRAKE LEVEL
ON : Turn ON the engine brake control.
OFF : Turn OFF the engine brake control. L
Check the degradation level of the CVT fluid.
CVTF degradation level data M

210,000 or more : Replacement of the CVT fluid is required.
Less than 210,000 : Replacement of the CVT fluid is not required.
N

TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [CVT: RE0F10D]
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

TCM
Reference Value INFOID:0000000012201114
CONSULT DATA MONITOR STANDARD VALUE

• In CONSULT, electric shift timing or lock-up timing, i.e. operation timing of each solenoid valve, is displayed.
Therefore, if there is an obvious difference between the shift timing estimated from a shift shock (or engine
speed variations) and that shown on the CONSULT, the mechanism parts (including the hydraulic circuit)
excluding the solenoids and sensors may be malfunctioning. In this case, check the mechanical parts follow-
ing the appropriate diagnosis procedure.
• Shift point (gear position) displayed on CONSULT slightly differs from shift pattern described in Service Man-
ual. This is due to the following reasons.
- Actual shift pattern may vary slightly within specified tolerances.
- While shift pattern described in Service Manual indicates start of each shift, CONSULT shows gear position
at end of shift.
- The solenoid display (ON/OFF) on CONSULT is changed at the start of gear shifting. In contrast, the gear
position display is changed at the time when gear shifting calculated in the control unit is completed.
NOTE:
Monitor item Condition Value/Status (Approx.)

VSP SENSOR While driving Almost same as the speedometer display.
ESTM VSP SIG While driving Almost same as the speedometer display.
INPUT SPEED SENSOR In driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed.
PRI SPEED SEN In driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed.
SEC REV SENSOR While driving VSP SENSOR × 45
ENG SPEED SIG Engine running Almost same reading as tachometer
SEC PRESSURE SEN • Selector lever: “N” position 1.2 – 1.3 V
• At idle
PRI PRESSURE SEN • Selector lever: “N” position 0.7 – 0.9 V
• At idle
ATF TEMP SEN CVT fluid: Approx. 50°C (122°F) 1.4 – 1.5 V
G SENSOR Always 0G
VIGN SEN Ignition switch: ON 10 – 16 V
PVIGN VOLT Ignition switch: ON 10 – 16 V
VEHICLE SPEED While driving Almost same as the speedometer display.
INPUT REV In driving (lock-up ON) Almost same as the engine speed.
PRI SPEED In driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed.
SEC SPEED While driving VSP SENSOR × 45
ENG SPEED Engine running Almost same reading as tachometer
SLIP REV While driving Engine speed − Input speed
In driving (forward) 2.6310 − 0.3780
PULLEY GEAR RATIO
In driving (reverse) 2.6310

TCM
A
Vehicle stopped 0.00 G
During acceleration
G SPEED along with acceleration.
B
During deceleration
Accelerator pedal released 0.00 deg
ACCEL POSI SEN 1 C
Accelerator pedal fully depressed 80.00 deg
The value changes along with acceleration/
VENG TRQ While driving
deceleration.
TM
The value changes along with acceleration/
PRI TRQ While driving
deceleration.
The value changes along with acceleration/ E
TRQ RTO While driving
deceleration.
SEC PRESSURE • Selector lever: “N” position 1.1 MPa
• At idle F
PRI PRESSURE • Selector lever: “N” position 0.4 – 0.45 MPa
• At idle G
FLUID TEMP Ignition switch ON. Displays the CVT fluid temperature.
DSR REV While driving It varies along with the driving condition.
H
In driving (forward) 2.6310 − 0.3780
TGT PLLY GR RATIO
In driving (reverse) 2.6310
• Engine started
−0.50 MPa I
• Vehicle is stopped.
LU PRS • Selector lever: “D” position

• Accelerator pedal position: 1/8 or less J
0.45 MPa
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH) or
more
LINE PRS • Selector lever: “N” position 1.1 MPa K
• At idle
TRGT PRI PRESSURE • Selector lever: “N” position 0.4 – 0.5 MPa L
• At idle
• Selector lever: “N” position 0 MPa M
TARGET SELECT PRESSURE • At idle
• Selector lever: “D” position
0.3 – 0.5 MPa
• At idle
N
TARGET SEC PRESSURE • Selector lever: “N” position 1.1 MPa
• At idle
O
ISOLT1* — —
ISOLT2 * — —
PRI SOLENOID* — — P
SEC SOLENOID CURRENT* — —
SELECT SOLENOID CURRENT* — —
SOLMON1* — —
SOLMON2* — —
PRI SOL MON* — —

TCM
SEC SOL MON CURRENT* — —
SELECT SOL MON CURRENT* — —
Selector lever: “D” position On
D POSITION SW
Selector lever: “N” position On
N POSITION SW
Selector lever: “R” position On
R POSITION SW
Selector lever: “P” position On
P POSITION SW
L POSITION SW Always Off
DS RANGE SW Always Off
Brake pedal is depressed On
BRAKESW
Brake pedal is released Off
Accelerator pedal is released On
IDLE SW
Accelerator pedal is fully depressed Off
SPORT MODE SW Always Off
ECO MODE SW Always Off
Paddle shifter (Down) is pulled On
STRDWNSW
Paddle shifter (Up) is pulled On
STRUPSW
Selector lever: −side On
DOWNLVR
Selector lever: +side On
UPLVR
Manual shift gate position (neutral, +side, −
Off
NONMMODE side)
Manual shift gate position (neutral, +side, −
On
MMODE side)
TOW MODE SW Always Off

TCM
A
When the selector lever is positioned in be-
OFF
tween each position.
Selector lever: “P” position P
B
Selector lever: “R” position R
Selector lever: “N” position N
Selector lever: “D” position D C
SHIFT IND SIGNAL Manual mode: 1st M1
Manual mode: 2nd M2
TM
Manual mode: 3rd M3
Manual mode: 4th M4
Manual mode: 5th M5 E
Manual mode: 6th M6
Manual mode: 7th M7
Approx. 2 seconds after ignition switch ON On F
CVT LAMP
SPORT MODE IND Always Off
G
Driving with manual mode On
MANU MODE SIGNAL
DS RANGE SIGNAL Always Off H
ECO MODE SIGNAL Always Off
When VDC malfunction signal is received On
VDC ON I
When TCS malfunction signal is received On
TCS ON
Other than the above Off J
When ABS malfunction signal is received On
ABS FAIL SIGNAL
K
ABS is activated On
ABS ON
Selector lever: “P” and “N” positions N/P L
Selector lever: “R position R
RANGE
Selector lever: “D” position
D M
Selector lever: “M” position
M GEAR POS Manual mode: 1st – 7th 1 to 7
Flat road 0%
N
Uphill gradient along with uphill gradient. (Maximum
G SEN SLOPE 40.45%)
O
The value changes to the negative side
Downhill gradient along with downhill gradient. (Minimum −
40.45%)
When G sensor calibration is completed DONE P
G SEN CALIBRATION
When G sensor calibration is not completed YET
When idle neutral control is operated On
N IDLE STATUS
When idle neutral control is not operated Off

TCM
When the engine brake level of “ENGINE
On
BRAKE ADJ”. in “Work Support” is ON
ENGBRKLVL
When the engine brake level of “ENGINE
Off
BRAKE ADJ”. in “Work Support” is OFF
Integrated Control System: NORMAL
NORMAL
mode
DRIVE MODE STATS
Integrated Control System: ECO mode ECO
Integrated Control System: SPORT mode SPORT
SNOW MODE Always Off
Integrated Control System: ECO mode On
ECO MODE
Integrated Control System: NORMAL
On
NORMAL MODE mode
Integrated Control System: SPORT mode On
SPORT MODE
AIR BLDING STATE Always INCOMP
ELECTRIC OP DUTY Always 0%
E-OP DUTY MON Always 0%
ELECTRIC OP RELAY Always Off
E-OP RELAY MON Always Off
CVT-B* — —
CVT-A* — —
• Vehicle stopped
2.5 V
• Vehicle is level
G SENSOR
During acceleration Positive value
During deceleration Negative value
*: These monitor items do not use.
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JSDIA1968ZZ
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL STANDARD
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color)
Condition Value (Approx.)
Input/
+ － Signal
Output
2*
— — — — —
(BR)

TCM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) A
Input/
+ － Signal
Output
4 Selector lever: “D” position 10 − 16 V B

Ground D range switch Input
(W) Other than the above 0V
5 Selector lever: “N” position 10 − 16 V

Ground N range switch Input C
(LG) Ignition Other than the above 0V
switch
6 ON Selector lever: “R” position 10 − 16 V
Ground R range switch Input
(G) Other than the above 0V TM
7 Selector lever: “P” position 10 − 16 V
Ground P range switch Input
(SB) Other than the above 0V
E
11
Ground Sensor ground — Always 0V
(Y)
CVT fluid: Approx. 20°C
2.01 – 2.05 V F
(68°F)
Ignition
12 CVT fluid tempera- CVT fluid: Approx. 50°C
Ground Input switch 1.45 – 1.50 V
(SB) ture sensor (122°F)
ON
G
CVT fluid: Approx. 80°C
0.90 – 0.94 V
176°F)
16 Secondary pres- H
Ground Input • Selector lever: “N” position 1.2 – 1.3 V
(P) sure sensor
• At idle
17 Primary pressure
(P)
Ground
sensor
Input • Selector lever: “N” position 0.7 – 0.85 V I
• At idle
23 Input/
— CAN-L — —
(P) Output J
880 Hz
K
24 • Shift position: “M1” position
Ground Input speed sensor Input
(V) • Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)
L
JSDIA3769GB
26 Sensor power sup- Ignition switch: ON 5.0 V

Ground Output
(LG) ply Ignition switch: OFF 0V M
N
• After engine warming up
• Selector lever: “N” position
• At idle
O
30 Line pressure sole- JSDIA1897GB

Ground Output
(Y) noid valve
P
• After engine warming up

• Depress the accelerator pedal fully
JSDIA1898GB

TCM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color)
Input/
+ － Signal
Output
33 Input/
— CAN-H — —
(L) Output
200 Hz
34 Output speed sen- • Shift position: “M1” position

Ground Input
(R) sor • Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)
JSDIA1904GB
700 Hz
35 Primary speed sen- • Shift position: “M1” position

Ground Input
(BG) sor • Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)
JSDIA1905GB
• Engine started
37 Select solenoid
Ground Output • Vehicle is stopped
(L) valve
• Selector lever: “N” position
JSDIA1897GB

• Accelerator pedal position: 1/8 or
less
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH) or
more
Torque converter
38 JSDIA1900GB
Ground clutch solenoid Output
(LG)
valve
• Engine started
• Vehicle is stopped
JSDIA1903GB
39 Secondary pres- • Shift position: “M1” position

Ground Output
(G) sure solenoid valve • Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)
JSDIA1897GB

TCM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) A
Input/
+ － Signal
Output
B
40 Primary pressure • Shift position: “M1” position C

Ground Output
(W) solenoid valve • Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)
JSDIA1897GB TM
41
Ground Ground — Always 0V
(B)
42
E
Ground Ground — Always 0V
(B)
Battery power sup-
45
Ground ply (Memory back- Input Always 10 − 16 V F
(V)
up)
Battery power sup-
46
Ground ply (Memory back- Input Always 10 − 16 V G
(GR)
up)
47 Ignition power sup- Ignition switch: ON 10 − 16 V

Ground Input
(LG) ply Ignition switch: OFF 0V H
48 Ignition power sup- Ignition switch: ON 10 − 16 V
Ground Input
(W) ply Ignition switch: OFF 0V
I
*: This harness does not use.
Fail-safe INFOID:0000000012201115
J
TCM has a fail-safe mode. The mode functions so that operation can be continued even if the signal circuit of
the main electronically controlled input/output parts is damaged.
If the vehicle shows following behaviors including “poor acceleration”, a malfunction of the applicable system
is detected by TCM and the vehicle may be in a fail-safe mode. At this time, check the DTC code and perform K
inspection and repair according to the malfunction diagnosis procedures.
Fail-safe function L

P062F Not changed from normal driving —
M
played
P0705 — N
• Start is slow
• Shift position indicator on combination meter is not dis- O
played
P0706 —
• Start is slow
• Acceleration is slow P

TCM
• Start is slow
P0711 −35°C (−31°F) ≤ Temp. < 10°C (50°F)
• Start is slow
Temp. < −35°C (−31°F)
• Start is slow
P0712 −35°C (−31°F) ≤ Temp. < 10°C (50°F)
• Start is slow
Temp. < −35°C (−31°F)
• Start is slow
P0713 −35°C (−31°F) ≤ Temp. < 10°C (50°F)
• Start is slow
Temp. < −35°C (−31°F)
• Start is slow
P0715 —
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
P0746 —
• Start is slow
• Acceleration is slow When a malfunction occurs on the low oil pressure side
P0776 • Vehicle speed is not increased
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
P0778 —

TCM
A
• Start is slow
P0779
• Lock-up is not performed B
P0826 Manual mode is not activated
P0841 Not changed from normal driving
P0847 Not changed from normal driving — C
P084C Not changed from normal driving
TM
P084D Not changed from normal driving
• Start is slow E
P0863 —
• Start is slow F
G
• Start is slow
P0962 —
• Lock-up is not performed H
• Start is slow
P0963 —
• Acceleration is slow I
• Start is slow J
P0965 • Lock-up is not performed
When a malfunction occurs on the high oil pressure side K
• Start is slow
P0966 — L
• Start is slow M
P0967 —
N
• Start is slow O
P2765 —
P
• Start is slow
Selector shock is large When a malfunction occurs on the high oil pressure side

TCM
• Start is slow
U0073 —
• Start is slow
U0100 —
• Start is slow
U0300 —
Protection Control INFOID:0000000012201116
The TCM becomes the protection control status temporarily to protect the safety when the safety of TCM and
transmission is lost. It automatically returns to the normal status if the safety is secured.
The TCM has the following protection control.
CONTROL FOR WHEEL SPIN
When a wheel spin is detected, the engine output and gear ratio are limited and the line pressure is increased.
Control
Limits engine output when a wheel spin occurs in any of right and left drive wheels.
Vehicle behavior in If the accelerator is kept depressing during wheel spin, the engine revolution and vehicle speed are limited to
control a certain degree.
Wheel spin convergence returns the control to the normal control.
tion
TORQUE IS REDUCED WHEN DRIVING WITH THE REVERSE GEAR
Control Engine output is controlled according to a vehicle speed while reversing the vehicle.
Vehicle behavior in
Power performance may be lowered while reversing the vehicle.
control
Torque returns to normal by positioning the selector lever in a range other than “R” position.
tion
CONTROL WHEN FLUID TEMPERATURE IS HIGH
When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the gear shift permission maximum revolution and the maximum
Control
torque are reduced than usual to prevent increase of the oil temperature.
Vehicle behavior in
Power performance may be lowered, compared to normal control.
control
The control returns to the normal control when CVT fluid temperature is lowered.
tion
REVERSE PROHIBIT CONTROL

TCM
The reverse brake is controlled to avoid becoming engaged when the selector lever is set in “R” position while A
Control
driving in forward direction at more than the specified speed.
Vehicle behavior in If the selector lever is put at “R” position when driving with the forward gear, the gear becomes neutral, not
control reverse.
B
Normal return condi- The control returns to normal control when the vehicle is driven at low speeds. (The reverse brake becomes
tion engaged.)
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000012201117 C
If multiple malfunction codes are detected at the same time, check each code according to the DTC check pri-
ority list below. TM
Items
Priority DTC Reference
E
P0863 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) TM-506, "DTC Logic"
U0073 COMM BUS A OFF TM-444, "DTC Logic"
U0100 LOST COMM (ECM A) TM-445, "DTC Logic" F
U0102 LOST COMM (TRANSFER) TM-446, "DTC Logic"
U0140 LOST COMM (BCM) TM-447, "DTC Logic"
1 U0141 LOST COMM (BCM A) TM-448, "DTC Logic"
G
U0155 LOST COMM (IPC) TM-449, "DTC Logic"
U0164 LOST COMM (HVAC) TM-450, "DTC Logic" H
U0300 CAN COMM DATA TM-451, "DTC Logic"
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT TM-452, "DTC Logic"
U1117 LOST COMM (ABS) TM-453, "DTC Logic" I
J
P0962 PC SOLENOID A TM-509, "DTC Logic" K
2
L
P2814 SELECT SOLENOID TM-528, "DTC Logic"
P2815 SELECT SOLENOID TM-530, "DTC Logic" M

TCM
Items
Priority DTC Reference
P062F EEPROM TM-454, "DTC Logic"
P0711 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A TM-463, "DTC Description"
P0712 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A TM-468, "DTC Logic"
P0713 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A TM-470, "DTC Logic"
3
P0826 UP/DOWN SHIFT SWITCH TM-491, "DTC Logic"
P0841 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW A TM-497, "DTC Logic"
P0847 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW B TM-498, "DTC Logic"
P0848 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW B TM-500, "DTC Logic"
P084C FLUID PRESS SEN/SW H TM-502, "DTC Logic"
P084D FLUID PRESS SEN/SW H TM-504, "DTC Logic"
P0890 TCM TM-507, "DTC Logic"
P2765 INPUT SPEED SENSOR B TM-522, "DTC Logic"
4
P17F0 CVT JUDDER (T/M INSPECTION) TM-519, "DTC Description"
P17F1 CVT JUDDER (C/V INSPECTION) TM-520, "DTC Description"
P17F2 CVT JUDDER (T/C INSPECTION) TM-521, "DTC Description"
P2813 SELECT SOLENOID TM-526, "DTC Logic"
DTC Index INFOID:0000000012201118
NOTE:
• If multiple malfunction codes are detected at the same time, check each code according to the “DTC check
priority list”. Refer to TM-413, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart".
• The ignition counter is displayed in “FFD”. Refer to TM-397, "CONSULT Function".
DTC*1, *2 Perma-
Items *3 nent DTC
CONSULT Trip MIL Reference
GST (CONSULT screen terms)
(TRANSMISSION) group*4
P062F P062F EEPROM 1 ON B TM-454

P0705 P0705 T/M RANGE SENSOR A 2 ON B TM-455
P0706 P0706 T/M RANGE SENSOR A 2 ON B TM-460
P0711 P0711 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A 2 ON A TM-463
P0712 P0712 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A 2 ON B TM-468
P0713 P0713 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A 2 ON B TM-470
P0715 P0715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A 2 ON B TM-472
P0717 P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A 2 ON B TM-475
P0740 P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER 2 ON B TM-478

TCM
DTC*1, *2 Perma-
Items nent DTC A
CONSULT (CONSULT screen terms)
Trip MIL*3 Reference
GST group*4
(TRANSMISSION)
P0746 P0746 PC SOLENOID A 2 ON B TM-484
B
P0776 P0776 PC SOLENOID B 2 ON B TM-486
P0779 P0779 PC SOLENOID B 2 ON B TM-489 C
— P0826 UP/DOWN SHIFT SWITCH 1 — — TM-491
P0841 P0841 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW A 2 ON B TM-497
TM
P0847 P0847 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW B 2 ON B TM-498
P0848 P0848 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW B 2 ON B TM-500
P084C P084C FLUID PRESS SEN/SW H 2 ON B TM-502 E
P084D P084D FLUID PRESS SEN/SW H 2 ON B TM-504
P0863 P0863 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) 1 ON B TM-506
F
P0890 P0890 TCM 1 ON B TM-507
P0962 P0962 PC SOLENOID A 2 ON B TM-509
P0963 P0963 PC SOLENOID A 2 ON B TM-511 G
P0967 P0967 PC SOLENOID B 2 ON B TM-517 H
— P17F0 CVT JUDDER (T/M INSPECTION) 1 — — TM-519
— P17F1 CVT JUDDER (C/V INSPECTION) 1 — — TM-520
I
— P17F2 CVT JUDDER (T/C INSPECTION) 1 — — TM-521
P2765 P2765 INPUT SPEED SENSOR B 2 ON B TM-522
P2813 P2813 SELECT SOLENOID 2 ON B TM-526 J
P2814 P2814 SELECT SOLENOID 2 ON B TM-528
P2815 P2815 SELECT SOLENOID 2 ON B TM-530
K
U0073 U0073 COMM BUS A OFF 1 ON B TM-444
U0100 U0100 LOST COMM (ECM A) 1 ON B TM-445
— U0102 LOST COMM (TRANSFER) 1 — — TM-446 L
— U0140 LOST COMM (BCM) 1 — — TM-447
— U0141 LOST COMM (BCM A) 1 — — TM-448
M
— U0155 LOST COMM (IPC) 1 — — TM-449
— U0164 LOST COMM (HVAC) 1 — — TM-450
— U0300 CAN COMM DATA 1 — — TM-451 N
— U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT 1 — — TM-452
— U1117 LOST COMM (ABS) 1 — — TM-453
O
*1: These numbers are specified by SAE J2012/ISO 15031-6.
*2: The DTC number of the 1st trip is the same as the DTC number.
*3: Refer to TM-395, "DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)".
*4: Refer to TM-443, "Description". P

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [CVT: RE0F10D]
WIRING DIAGRAM
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
JRDWC6624GB

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
TM
JRDWC6625GB

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
JRDWC6626GB

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
TM
JRDWC6627GB

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
JRDWC6628GB

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
TM
JRDWC6629GB

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
JRDWC6630GB

A
TM
P
JRDWC6639GB

JRDWC6640GB

TM
JRDWC6641GB

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [CVT: RE0F10D]
BASIC INSPECTION
Work Flow INFOID:0000000012201121
NOTE:
“DTC” includes DTC at the 1st trip.
1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM
Refer to TM-427, "Diagnostic Work Sheet" and interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information
(conditions and environment when the malfunction occurred) as much as possible when the customer brings
in the vehicle.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Before checking the malfunction, check whether any DTC exists.
2. If DTC exists, perform the following operations.
- Records the DTCs. (Print out using CONSULT and affix to the Work Order Sheet.)
- Erase DTCs.
- Check the relation between the cause found by DTC and the malfunction information from customer. TM-
539, "Symptom Table" can be used effectively.
3. Check the relevant information including STI, etc.
Do malfunction information and DTC exists?
Malfunction information and DTC exists.>>GO TO 3.
Malfunction information exists but no DTC.>>GO TO 4.
No malfunction information, but DTC exists.>>GO TO 5.
3.REPRODUCE MALFUCTION SYSTEM
Check the malfunction described by the customer on the vehicle.
Check if the behavior is fail safe or normal operation. Refer to TM-409, "Fail-safe".
Interview sheet can be used effectively when reproduce malfunction conditions. Refer to TM-427, "Diagnostic
Work Sheet".
Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the cus-
tomer occurs.
>> GO TO 5.
4.REPRODUCE MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
Check the malfunction described by the customer on the vehicle.
Check if the behavior is fail safe or normal operation. Refer to TM-409, "Fail-safe".
Interview sheet can be used effectively when reproduce malfunction conditions. Refer to TM-427, "Diagnostic
Work Sheet".
Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the cus-
tomer occurs.
>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” of the appropriate DTC to check if DTC is detected again.
Refer to TM-413, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" when multiple DTCs are detected, and then determine the
order for performing the diagnosis.
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Follow GI-45, "Intermittent Incident" to check.
6.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “DIAGNOSIS CHART BY SYMPTOM”
Use TM-539, "Symptom Table" from the symptom inspection result in step 4. Then identify where to start per-
forming the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms. A
>> GO TO 8.
7.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS B
Repair or replace the detected malfunctioning parts.

Reconnect parts or connector after repairing or replacing, and then erase DTC if necessary.
C
>> GO TO 8.
8.FINAL CHECK TM
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again to make sure that the repair is correctly performed.
Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer,
referring to the symptom inspection result in step 3 or 4. E
Is DTC or malfunction symptom reproduced?
YES-1 (DTC is reproduced.)>>GO TO 5.
YES-2 (Malfunction is reproduced.)>>GO TO 6. F
NO >> Before delivering the vehicle to the customer, make sure that DTC is erased.
Diagnostic Work Sheet INFOID:0000000012201122
G
DESCRIPTION
There are many operating conditions that may cause a malfunction
of the transmission parts. By understanding those conditions prop- H
erly, a quick and exact diagnosis can be achieved.
In general, perception of a problem varies depending on individuals.
Ask the customer about his/her concerns carefully. It is important to I
understand the phenomenon or status. To systemize all the informa-
tion for the diagnosis, prepare the question sheet referring to the
question points.
J
In some cases, multiple conditions that appear simultaneously may
cause a DTC to be detected.
SEF907L
K
Worksheet Sample
Question sheet L
Registration Initial year Year Month
Customer's number registration day
MR/MS
name
Vehicle type Chassis No. M
Year Month
Storage date Engine Mileage km/mile
day
Symptom Vehicle does not start. ( R position D position M position) N
Upshifting does not occur. Downshifting does not occur.
Lock-up malfunction
O
Shift point is too high. Shift point is too low.
Shift shock ( N⇒D Lock-up R, D, and M position)
Slip ( N⇒D Lock-up R, D, and M position) P
Noise Vibration
When selector lever position is shifted, shift pattern does not change.
Other
( )
First occurrence Recently (as from month of year )
Frequency of occurrence Always Under certain conditions Sometimes ( time(s)/day)

Question sheet
Registration Initial year Year Month
Customer's number registration day
MR/MS
name
Vehicle type Chassis No.
Year Month
Storage date Engine Mileage km/mile
day
Climate con-
Irrelevant
ditions
Weather Clear Cloud Rain Snow Others )
Temperature Hot Warm Cool Cold Temperature (Approx. °C/°F)
Relative humidity High Moderate Low
Transaxle condition In cold-start During warm-up (approx. °C/°F) After warm-up
Engine speed: rpm
Urban area Suburb area Highway
Road conditions
Mountainous road (uphill or downhill)
Operating condition, etc. Irrelevant
When engine starts During idling During driving
During acceleration At constant speed driving During deceleration
During cornering (RH curve or LH curve)
Other conditions

A
Always perform the following items when the TCM is replaced. For work procedure, refer to TM-429, "Work B
Procedure".
TCM PROGRAMMING
• Since vehicle specifications are not yet written in a new TCM, it is necessary to write them with CONSULT. C
CAUTION:
When replacing TCM, save TCM data on CONSULT before removing TCM.
SAVING AND WRITING OF TCM DATA TM
• TCM performs accurate control by retrieving data (inherent characteristic value) of each solenoid. For this
reason, it is necessary to save data of current TCM in CONSULT before replacing the TCM. After this, the
saved data must be written in new TCM. E
1.CHECK NEW TCM PART NUMBER F

Check new TCM part number to see whether it is blank TCM or not.
NOTE:
• Part number of blank TCM is 310F6-XXXXX. G
• Check the part number when ordering TCM or with the one included in the label on the container box.
Is the new TCM a blank TCM?
YES >> GO TO 2. H
NO >> GO TO 3.
2.SAVING TCM DATA (VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS)
I
With CONSULT
3. Select “Re/programming, Configuration”. J
4. Select “AT/CVT”.
NOTE:
If “AT/CVT” is not displayed and TCM data cannot be saved on CONSULT, GO TO 3. K
L
>> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE TCM
M
2. Replace TCM. Refer to TM-554, "Removal and Installation".
N
>> GO TO 4.
1. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position. O
NOTE: P
Displayed approximately 4 – 5 seconds after the selector lever is moved to the “P” position.
Does the shift position indicator display “P”?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 7.

YES >> GO TO 6.
sis Procedure".
With CONSULT
>> WORK END

YES >> GO TO 4.

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
A
Perform the following work after the transaxle assembly is replaced. For work procedure, refer to TM-431, B
"Work Procedure".
WRITING TCM DATA
• TCM performs accurate control by retrieving data (inherent characteristic value) of each solenoid. For this C
reason, after replacing transaxle assembly, it is necessary to write new data in TCM.
ERASING OF CVT FLUID DEGRADATION LEVEL DATA
• TCM records the degradation level of the CVT fluid calculated from the vehicle driving status. Therefore, if TM
the transaxle assembly is replaced, it is necessary to erase the CVT fluid degradation level data recorded by
TCM.
E
1.CHECK THE SERIAL NUMBER

F
Write down the serial number of new transaxle assembly.
K
JSDIA6075GB
L
>> GO TO 2.
2.WRITE TCM DATA (IP CHARACTERISTICS VALUE)
NOTE: M
Write data of new solenoid in TCM according to the following instructions:
With CONSULT
CAUTION: N
When the work is interrupted, obtain data again from the supplied CD.
1. Shift the selector lever to the P position.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. O
4. Insert the supplied CD into CONSULT.
5. Select “Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION”.
6. Select “WRITE IP CHARA - REPLACEMENT AT/CVT”. P
7. Check that the serial number displayed on CONSULT screen and those written in the memo agree.
8. Write data in TCM according to the instructions on the CONSULT screen.
NOTE:
When writing is complete, the shift position indicator of the combination meter displays P.
>> GO TO 3.

3.ERASE CVT FLUID DEGRADATION LEVEL DATA

With CONSULT
1. Select “WORK SUPPORT” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Touch “Clear”.
>> WORK END

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCM AND TRANSAXLE ASSEM-
BLY
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCM AND TRANSAXLE AS-
A
SEMBLY
B
When replacing TCM and transaxle assembly as a set, perform the following work. For work procedure, refer
to TM-433, "Work Procedure".
C
TCM PROGRAMMING
• Since vehicle specifications are not yet written in a new TCM, it is necessary to write them with CONSULT.
CAUTION:
When replacing TCM, save TCM data on CONSULT before removing TCM. TM
WRITING TCM DATA

• TCM performs accurate control by retrieving data (inherent characteristic value) of each solenoid. For this
reason, after replacing TCM and transaxle assembly, it is necessary to write new data in TCM. E
1.SAVE TCM DATA (VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS) F
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
4. Select “Re/programming, Configuration”.
5. Select “AT/CVT”. H
NOTE:
If “AT/CVT” is not displayed and TCM data cannot be saved on CONSULT, GO TO 2.
6. Select “Programming”. I
>> GO TO 2. J
2.REPLACE TCM AND TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
K
2. Replace TCM and transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-554, "Removal and Installation" (TCM), TM-577,
"Removal and Installation" (Transaxle assembly).
CAUTION:
Write down the serial number of new transaxle assembly. L
JSDIA6075GB
>> GO TO 3.

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCM AND TRANSAXLE ASSEM-
BLY

NOTE:
Write data saved in CONSULT into a new TCM according to the following instructions:
With CONSULT
>> GO TO 4.
4.WRITE TCM DATA (IP CHARACTERISTICS VALUE)
NOTE:
Write data of new solenoid in TCM according to the following instructions:
With CONSULT
CAUTION:
When the work is interrupted, obtain data again from the supplied CD.
1. Shift the selector lever to the P position.
4. Insert the supplied CD into CONSULT.
5. Select “Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION”.
6. Select “WRITE IP CHARA - REPLACEMENT AT/CVT”.
7. Check that the serial number displayed on CONSULT screen and those written in the memo agree.
8. Write data in TCM according to the instructions on the CONSULT screen.
NOTE:
When writing is complete, the shift position indicator of the combination meter displays P.
>> WORK END

A
Cleaning INFOID:0000000012201129
Whenever an automatic transaxle is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, the CVT fluid cooler mounted in the B
radiator must be inspected and cleaned.
Metal debris and friction material, if present, can be trapped or be deposited in the CVT fluid cooler. This
debris can contaminate the newly serviced CVT or, in severe cases, can block or restrict the flow of CVT fluid.
In either case, malfunction of the newly serviced CVT may occur. C
Debris, if present, may deposit as CVT fluid enters the cooler inlet. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler
through the cooler outlet in order to flush out any built up debris.
CVT FLUID COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE TM
2. Identify the inlet and outlet fluid cooler hoses. E
3. Disconnect the fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the
steel cooler tubes or bypass valve.
NOTE:
Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose F
remains on the tube fitting.
4. Allow any CVT fluid that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into
the oil pan. G
H
SCIA4421E
5. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission I

CAUTION:
Transmission Cooler Cleaner. J
ventilation.
• Avoid contact with eyes and skin. K
sion Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet SCIA4422E L
onds.
M
8. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of the cooler
outlet hose.
9. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 to 9 kg/cm2 (70 to 130 psi) N
through the cooler outlet hose for 10 seconds to force out any
remaining CVT fluid.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times. O
11. Position an oil pan under the banjo bolts that connect the CVT
fluid cooler steel lines to the transaxle.
12. Remove the banjo bolts. SCIA4423E
P
13. Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the tran-
saxle by spraying Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds.
14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 to 9 kg/cm2 (70 to 130 psi) through each steel line from the cooler
side back toward the transaxle for 10 seconds to force out any remaining CVT fluid.
15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines.
16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings.

17. Perform “CVT FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE”.
CVT FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Insufficient cleaning of the cooler inlet hose exterior may lead to inaccurate debris identification.
2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler inlet hose.
3. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission
CAUTION:
Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
ventilation.
• Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
sion Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet SCIA4421E
onds.
5. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the
cooler inlet hose.
SCIA4424E
7. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of cooler outlet
hose.
8. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 to 9 kg/cm2 (70 to 130 psi)
through the cooler outlet hose to force any remaining CVT fluid
into the coffee filter.
9. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler inlet hose.
10. Perform “CVT FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE”.
SCIA4425E
CVT FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1. Inspect the coffee filter for debris.
a. If small metal debris less than 1 mm (0.040 in) in size or metal
powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal
debris is found, the CVT fluid cooler/radiator can be reused and
the procedure is ended.
SCIA2967E

b. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1 mm
(0.040 in) in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in A
the coffee filter, the fluid cooler is not serviceable. The radiator/
fluid cooler must be replaced and the inspection procedure is
ended.
B
SCIA7031E
TM
CVT FLUID COOLER FINAL INSPECTION
After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components.
E

STALL TEST
STALL TEST
INSPECTION
1. Check the engine oil level. Replenish if necessary. Refer to LU-28, "Inspection".
2. Check for leak of the CVT fluid. Refer to TM-545, "Inspection".
3. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the CVT fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F).
4. Be sure to apply the parking brake and block the tires.
5. Start the engine, depress the brake pedal and put the selector lever to the D position.
6. While depressing the brake pedal, depress the accelerator pedal gradually.
7. Read the stall speed quickly. Then, release your foot from the accelerator pedal quickly.
CAUTION:
Do not depress the accelerator pedal for 5 seconds or more during the test.
Stall speed : Refer to TM-584, "Stall Speed".

8. Place the selector lever in the N position.
9. Cool the CVT fluid.
CAUTION:
Run the engine with the idle speed for at least 1 minute.
10. Put the selector lever to the R position and perform Step 6 to Step 9 again.
NARROWING-DOWN MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Selector lever position

Possible cause
D R
H O • Forward clutch
O H • Reverse brake
• Engine
L L
Stall speed • Torque converter one way clutch
• Line pressure is low.
• Primary pulley
H H
• Secondary pulley
• Steel belt
O: Within the stall speed standard value.
H: Stall speed is higher than the standard value.
L: Stall speed is lower than the standard value.

CVT POSITION
CVT POSITION
A
1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop). B
2. Make sure that selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed.
Also make sure that selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed.
3. Move the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle. C
4. Confirm the selector lever stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all
the positions. Check that the actual position of the selector lever matches the position shown by the shift
position indicator and the manual lever on the transaxle. TM
5. The method of operating the selector lever to individual posi-
tions correctly should be as shown.
6. When selector button is pressed in “P”, “R” or “N” position with- E
out applying forward/backward force to selector lever, check but-
ton operation for sticking.
7. Confirm the back-up lamps illuminate only when selector lever is F
placed in the “R” position. Confirm the back-up lamps do not illu-
minate when the selector lever is pushed toward the “R” position
when in the “P” or “N” position.
G
8. Confirm the engine can only be started with the selector lever in
the “P” and “N” positions. JPDIA0344GB
9. Make sure transaxle is locked completely in “P” position.

H
10. When selector lever is set to manual shift gate, make sure that manual mode is displayed on combination
meter.
Shift selector lever to “+” and “–” sides, and check that set shift position changes.
I
1. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position. J

CAUTION:
Rotate the wheels at least a quarter turn and be certain the Park position mechanism is fully
engaged.
2. Loosen nut (A) and set manual lever (1) to the “P” position. K
CAUTION:
Never apply force to the manual lever.
3. Tighten the nut to the specified torque. Refer to TM-549, L
"Exploded View".
CAUTION:
In tightening, fix the manual lever. M
N
JSDIA5177ZZ

CVT FLUID
CVT FLUID
Replacement INFOID:0000000012201133
Recommended fluid and fluid capacity : Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
CAUTION:
• Always use shop paper. Never use shop cloth.
• Replace a drain plug gasket with new ones at the final stage of the operation when installing.
• Use caution when looking into the drain hole as there is a risk of dripping fluid entering the eye.
• After replacement, always perform CVT fluid leakage check.
2. Select “FLUID TEMP” and confirm that the CVT fluid temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less.
3. Check that the selector lever is in the “P” position, then completely engage the parking brake.
5. Remove the drain plug and drain the CVT fluid from the oil pan. Refer to TM-557, "Exploded View".
6. Install the drain plug to oil pan.
CAUTION:
Drain plug gasket use the old one.
7. Remove the overflow plug (1) from converter housing.
: Vehicle front
JSDIA3714ZZ
8. Install the charging pipe set (KV311039S0) (A) into the overflow
plug hole.
CAUTION:
Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
9. Install the ATF changer hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Press the ATF changer hose all the way onto the charging
pipe until it stops.
10. Fill approximately 3 liter (2-5/8 lmp qt) of the CVT fluid.
11. Remove the ATF changer hose and charging pipe, then install
the overflow plug. JSDIA3713ZZ
NOTE:
Perform this work quickly because CVT fluid leaks.
12. Lift down the vehicle.
14. While depressing the brake pedal, shift the selector lever to the entire position from “P” to “D”, and shift it
to the “P” position.
NOTE:
Hold the lever at each position for 5 seconds.
15. Check that the CONSULT “Data Monitor” in “FLUID TEMP” is 35°C (95°F) to 45°C (113°F).
16. Stop the engine.
18. Remove the drain plug, and then drain CVT fluid from oil pan.
19. Repeat steps 6 to 18 (one time).

CVT FLUID
20. Tighten the drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-557, "Exploded View".
21. Remove the overflow plug. A
22. Install the charging pipe set (KV311039S0) into the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION:
Tighten the charging pipe by hand. B
23. Install the ATF changer hose to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Press the ATF changer hose all the way onto the charging pipe until it stops. C
24. Fill approximately 3 liter (2-5/8 lmp qt) of the CVT fluid.
25. Remove the ATF changer hose and charging pipe, then install the overflow plug.
NOTE: TM
Perform this work quickly because CVT fluid leaks.
27. Start the engine. E
NOTE: F
29. Check that the CONSULT “Data Monitor” in “FLUID TEMP” is 35°C (95°F) to 45°C (113°F).
30. Lift up the vehicle. G
31. Remove the overflow plug and confirm that the CVT fluid is drained from the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION:
Perform this work with the vehicle idling. H
NOTE:
If the CVT fluid is not drained, refer to “Adjustment” and refill with the CVT fluid.
32. When the flow of CVT fluid slows to a drip, tighten the overflow plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-
557, "Exploded View". I
CAUTION:
Never reuse O-ring.
33. Lift down the vehicle. J
K
36. Select “Erase”.
Adjustment INFOID:0000000012201134 L
Recommended fluid and fluid capacity : Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". M
CAUTION:
• During adjustment of the CVT fluid level, check CONSULT so that the oil temperature may be main-
tained from 35 to 45°C (95 to 113°F). N
• Maintain specified engine idle speed during CVT fluid level adjustment. Refer to EC-1258, "Idle
Speed".
• Use caution when looking into the drain hole as there is a risk of dripping fluid entering the eye.
O
1. Check that the selector lever is in the “P” position, then completely engage the parking brake.
3. Adjust the CVT fluid temperature to be approximately 40°C (104°F). P
NOTE:
The CVT fluid is largely affected by temperature. Therefore be sure to use CONSULT and check the
“FLUID TEMP” under “TRANSMISSION” in “Data Monitor” while adjusting.
NOTE:

CVT FLUID
6. Check that there is no CVT fluid leakage.
7. Remove the overflow plug (1) from converter housing.
: Vehicle front
JSDIA3714ZZ
8. Install the charging pipe set (KV311039S0) (A) into the overflow
plug hole.
CAUTION:
Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
9. Install the ATF changer hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Press the ATF changer hose all the way onto the charging
pipe until it stops.
10. Fill approximately 0.5 liter (1/2 lmp qt) of the CVT fluid.
11. Remove the ATF changer hose from the charging pipe, and
check that the CVT fluid drains out from the charging pipe. If it JSDIA3713ZZ
does not drain out, perform charging again.

CAUTION:
Perform this work with the vehicle idling.
12. When the flow of CVT fluid slows to a drip, remove the charging pipe from the converter housing.
13. Tighten the overflow plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-557, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Never reuse O-ring.

HOW TO ERASE PERMANENT DTC
HOW TO ERASE PERMANENT DTC
A
Permanent DTC can be erased by driving each driving pattern. B

ECM recognizes each driving pattern; it transmits signals to each control module when the driving is complete.
Each control module erases permanent DTC based on those signals. For details, refer to EC-779, "Descrip-
tion".
C
TM

U0073 COMMUNICATION BUS A OFF
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CVT: RE0F10D]
U0073 COMMUNICATION BUS A OFF
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition Possible causes
(Trouble diagnosis content)
COMM BUS A OFF TCM communication blockage lasts for 2 sec-
Harness or connector
U0073 (Control Module Communica- onds or more when turning ON the ignition
(CAN communication line is error)
tion Bus A Off) switch. (Communication not established.)

>> GO TO 2.
2. Check the DTC.

A

(Trouble diagnosis content) C
When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is un- • ECM
LOST COMM (ECM A)
able to receive the CAN communications • Harness or connector
U0100 (Lost Communication With
signal from ECM continuously for 2 sec- (CAN communication line is open or
ECM/PCM A) TM

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK E
F
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G
2. Check the DTC.
Is “U0100” detected? H
I
J

U0102 LOST COMMUNICATION (TRANSFER)
U0102 LOST COMMUNICATION (TRANSFER)
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

LOST COMM (TRANSFER) When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is unable • 4WD control unit
(Lost Communication With to receive the CAN communications signal • Harness or connector
U0102
Transfer Case Control Mod- from 4WD control unit continuously for 2 sec- (CAN communication line is open or
ule) onds or more. shorted)

>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Check the DTC.

U0140 LOST COMMUNICATION (BCM)
U0140 LOST COMMUNICATION (BCM)
A

• BCM
LOST COMM (BCM) When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is unable
• Harness or connector
U0140 (Lost Communication With to receive the CAN communications signal
Body Control Module) from BCM continuously for 2 seconds or more. TM
shorted)

F
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Check the DTC. H

U0141 LOST COMMUNICATION (BCM A)
U0141 LOST COMMUNICATION (BCM A)
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When the ignition switch is turned ON, TCM • IPDM E/R
LOST COMM (BCM A)
continues no reception of the CAN communi- • Harness or connector
cation signal from IPDM E/R for 2 seconds or (CAN communication line is open or
Body Control Module A)
more. shorted)

>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Check the DTC.

U0155 LOST COMMUNICATION (IPC)
U0155 LOST COMMUNICATION (IPC)
A

[Trouble diagnosis content] C
LOST COMM (IPC) When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is unable • Combination meter
[Lost Communication With In- to receive the CAN communications signal • Harness or connector
U0155
strument Panel Cluster (IPC) from the combination meter continuously for 2 (CAN communication line is open or
Control Module] seconds or more. shorted) TM

F
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Check the DTC. H

U0164 LOST COMMUNICATION (HVAC)
U0164 LOST COMMUNICATION (HVAC)
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is unable • A/C auto amp.
LOST COMM (HVAC)
to receive the CAN communications signal • Harness or connector
from A/C auto amp. continuously for 2 sec- (CAN communication line is open or
HVAC Control Module)

>> GO TO 2.
2. Check the DTC.

U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA
U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA
A

When the ignition switch is ON, the data length
CAN COMM DATA
transmitted from each control unit is shorter
U0300 (Internal Control Module Soft- Control unit other than TCM
than the specified length and the status contin-
ware Incompatibility) TM
ues for 2 seconds or more.

F
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION G
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine and wait for 5 seconds or more.
2. Check the DTC. H
1.CONTROL UNIT CHECK J
Check the number of control units replaced before “U0300” is detected.

Is one control unit replaced? K
YES >> The specification of the control unit replaced may be incorrect. Check the part number and the
specification.
NO >> GO TO 2. L
2.CONTROL UNIT CHECK
With CONSULT
1. Remove one of the control unit replaced. M
2. Assemble the old control unit before replacement.
3. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 2 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. N
Is “U0300”detected?
YES >> Turn OFF the ignition switch and check other control units in the same manner.
NO >> The specification of the control unit removed may be incorrect. Check the part number and the O
specification.

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
with other control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are con-
nected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When the ignition switch is ON, TCM cannot Harness or connector
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1000 send the CAN communication signal continu- (CAN communication line is open or
(CAN Communication Line)
ously for 2 seconds or more. shorted)

>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Check the DTC.

U1117 LOST COMMUNICATION (ABS)
U1117 LOST COMMUNICATION (ABS)
A

• ABS actuator and electric unit (control
When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is unable
LOST COMM (ABS) unit)
to receive the CAN communications signal
U1117 (Lost Communication With • Harness or connector
from ABS actuator and electric unit (control TM
ABS) (CAN communication line is open or
unit) continuously for 2 seconds or more.
shorted)

If another "DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
>> GO TO 2.
G
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine and wait for 5 seconds or more. H
2. Check the DTC.
YES >> Go to TM-453, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
J

P062F EEPROM
P062F EEPROM
TCM compares the calculated value stored in the flash ROM with the value stored in TCM. If the calculated
value does not agree with the stored value, TCM judges this as a malfunction.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• TCM (Flash ROM)
EEPROM
Flash ROM error is detected when turning ON • Harness or connector
P062F (Internal Control Module EE-
the ignition switch. [TCM power supply (back-up) circuit is
PROM Error)
open or shorted]

>> GO TO 2.
2. Check the DTC.
Is “P062F” detected?
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDNT

YES >> Replace the TCM. Refer to TM-554, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

A

When all of the following conditions are satis-
T/M RANGE SENSOR A fied and this state is maintained for 2 seconds:
(Short circuit between transmission
P0705 [Transmission Range Sensor • Two or more range signals simultaneously
range switch and TCM) TM
A Circuit (PRNDL Input)] stay ON continuously
• Transmission range switch
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

>> GO TO 2.
G
2. Shift the selector lever through entire positions from “P” to “D”. (Hold the selector lever at each position for H
5 seconds or more.)
3. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0705” detected? I
J
1.CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNALS

K
With CONSULT
3. Select “D POSITION SW”, “N POSITION SW”, “R POSITION SW”, and “P POSITION SW”. L
4. Shift the selector lever through entire positions from “P” to “D” and check ON/OFF of each monitor item.
Monitor item Condition Condition M

Selector lever: “D” position On
D POSITION SW
N
Selector lever: “N” position On
N POSITION SW
Selector lever: “R” position On O
R POSITION SW
Selector lever: “P” position On
P POSITION SW P
Without CONSULT
4. Shift the selector lever from “P” to “D” and check voltage between TCM harness connector terminals and
ground.

+
Connector Terminal
Selector lever: “D” position 10 – 16 V
4
Other than the above Approx. 0 V
Selector lever: “N” position 10 – 16 V
5
F83 Ground
Selector lever: “R” position 10 – 16 V
6
Selector lever: “P” position 10 – 16 V
7
NO-1 [“D POSITION SW” is “ON” when selector is not in “D” position. (Or connector terminal 4 is at power
voltage.)]>>GO TO 2.
NO-2 [“N POSITION SW” is “ON” when selector is not in “N” position. (Or connector terminal 5 is at power
NO-3 [“R POSITION SW” is “ON” when selector is not in “R” position. (Or connector terminal 6 is at power
NO-4 [“P POSITION SW” is “ON” when selector is not in “P” position. (Or connector terminal 7 is at power
2.CHECK D POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART 1)
3. Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals.
TCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
5
F83 4 Not existed
6
7
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK D POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART 2)
+
Voltage
TCM −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F83 4 Ground 0V
YES >> GO TO 10.
4.CHECK N POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART 1)
2. Disconnect TCM connector. A
TCM B
Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
C
4
F83 5 Not existed
6
7 TM
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. E
5.CHECK N POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART 2)
F
G
+
Voltage
TCM −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal H
F83 5 Ground 0V
YES >> GO TO 10. I
6.CHECK P POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART 1) J
K
TCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal L
2
4
F83 7 Not existed M
5
6
Is the inspection result normal? N
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK P POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART 2) O
3. Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminal and ground. P
+
Voltage
TCM −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F83 7 Ground 0V

YES >> GO TO 10.
8.CHECK R POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART1)
TCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
4
F83 6 Not existed
5
7
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK R POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART 2)
+
Voltage
TCM −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F83 6 Ground 0V
YES >> GO TO 10.
Check transmission range switch. Refer to TM-458, "Component Inspection".
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000012201162


Terminal
Manual lever: “P” and “N” positions Existed
1–2
3–4
Manual lever: “R” position Existed
3–5

Condition Continuity A
Terminal
Manual lever: “N position Existed
3–6
Other than the above Not existed B
3–7
NO >> There is a malfunction of transmission range switch. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-
577, "Removal and Installation". TM

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When all of the following conditions are satis- (Open circuit between ignition switch
T/M RANGE SENSOR A fied and this state is maintained for 30 sec- and transmission range switch/open
P0706 (Transmission Range Sensor onds: circuit between transmission range
A Circuit Range/Performance) • All range signals stay OFF switch and TCM)
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V • Transmission range switch
• Control cable

>> GO TO 2.
2. Shift the selector lever through entire positions from “P” to “D”. (Hold the selector lever at each position for
40 seconds or more.)
1.ADJUSTMENT OF CONTROL CABLE

Adjust control cable. Refer to TM-439, "Adjustment".
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
3. Touch “Erase”.
4. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE". Refer to TM-460, "DTC Logic".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK POWER CIRCUIT
4. Check voltage between transmission range switch harness connector terminal and ground.

+ A
Transmission range switch − Voltage
Connector Terminal
B
F30 3 Ground 10 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 4. C
NO >> GO TO 7.
4.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH AND TCM (PART 1)
TM
3. Check continuity between transmission range switch harness connector terminals and TCM harness con-
nector terminals. E
Transmission range switch TCM

Continuity F
4 7
5 6 G
F30 6 F83 5 Existed
7 4
8 2 H

YES >> GO TO 5.
I
5.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH AND TCM (PART 2)
Check continuity between transmission range switch harness connector terminals and ground. J

— Continuity K
Connector Terminal
4
5 L
7
8 M

YES >> GO TO 6.
N
Check transmission range switch. Refer to TM-462, "Component Inspection". O
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. P
7.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and transmission range switch harness
connector terminal.

IPDM E/R Transmission range switch

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 8.
• Short circuit in harness between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal 57 and transmission range switch
harness connector terminal 3.
• 10A fuse (No. 55, located in the IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-80, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• IPDM E/R
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000012201165


Terminal
Manual lever: “P” and “N” positions Existed
1–2
3–4
Manual lever: “R” position Existed
3–5
Manual lever: “N position Existed
3–6
3–7
NO >> There is a malfunction of transmission range switch. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-

A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012201166

DTC DTC detection condition
When any of 1 or 2 is satisfied:
1. Under the following diagnosis conditions, CVT fluid temperature does
not rise to 10°C (50°F) after driving for a certain period of time with the
TCM-received fluid temperature sensor value between − 40°C (−40°F) TM
and 9°C (48.2°F).
- TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
- CAN communication is normal
E
- Engine speed: 450 rpm or more
- Accelerator pedal position: 3 deg. or more
- Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
- U0100, P0705 and P0706 are not detected. F
FLUID TEMP SENSOR A - Selector lever: “D” position
P0711 (Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor A 2. When the condition of the final judgment is satisfied after satisfying
Circuit Range/Performance) that of the provisional judgment:
- Provisional judgment: All of the following conditions are satisfied within G
2 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON.
• U0073, U0100, P0712 and P0713 are not detected.
• CAN communication is normal.
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V H
• The difference between CVT fluid temperature and engine coolant
temperature is 55°C (131°F) or more, or −27°C (−16°F) or less.
- Final judgment: When all of the following conditions are satisfied and
this state is maintained for 300 seconds: I
• ECM is normal.
• Provisional judgment is satisfied.
J
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CVT fluid temperature sensor
FAIL-SAFE K
• Engine coolant temperature when engine start: Temp. ≥ 10°C (50°F)
- Start is slow
- Acceleration is slow
• Engine coolant temperature when engine start: −35°C (−31°F) ≤ Temp. < 10°C (50°F) L
- Selector shock is large
- Start is slow
- Acceleration is slow M
• Engine coolant temperature when engine start: Temp. < −35°C (−31°F)
- Selector shock is large
- Start is slow
- Acceleration is slow N

CAUTION: O
If another "DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at P
>> GO TO 2.
2.INSPECTION START

Is it necessary to erase permanent DTC?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 7.
3.CHECK DTC (ECM AND TCM)
Check the DTC.
Is any DTC other than “P0711” detected?
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-706, "DTC Index" (ECM), TM-414, "DTC Index" (TCM).
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (PART 1)
TESTING CONDITION:
• While performing the following procedure, do not add fuel.
• Before performing the following procedure, check that fuel level is between 1/4 and 4/4.
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is 11 V or more at idle.
With CONSULT
1. Move the vehicle to a cool place.
NOTE:
Cool the vehicle in an environment of ambient air temperature between −10°C (14°F) and 35°C (95°F).
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle for 12 hours.
CAUTION:
Never turn ignition switch ON during this procedure.
NOTE:
The vehicle must be cooled with the food open.
CAUTION:
5. Select “FLUID TEMP”.
6. Record CVT fluid temperature.
7. Start engine and let it idle for 5 minutes or more.
CAUTION:
Never turn ignition switch OFF during idling.
8. Check 1st trip DTC.
With GST
1. Move the vehicle to a cool place.
NOTE:
Cool the vehicle in an environment of ambient air temperature between −10°C (14°F) and 35°C (95°F).
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle for 12 hours.
CAUTION:
Never turn ignition switch ON during this procedure.
NOTE:
The vehicle must be cooled with the food open.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 minutes or more.
CAUTION:
Never turn ignition switch OFF during idling.
4. Check 1st trip DTC.
NO-1 (With CONSULT)>>GO TO 5.
NO-2 (With GST)>>GO TO 6.
5.CHECK CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT
Is the value of “FLUID TEMP” 10°C (50°F) or more?
NO >> GO TO 6.

6.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (PART 2) A

With CONSULT
1. Drive the vehicle for the total minutes specified in the Driving time column below with the following condi-
tions satisfied. B
C
CVT fluid temperature before engine start Driving time TM

−40°C (−40°F) – −31°C (−23.8°F) 20 minutes or more
E
−10°C (14°F) – −1°C (30.2°F) 10 minutes or more

0°C (32°F) – 9°C (48.2°F) 7 minutes or more
F
With GST G
1. Drive the vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 20 minutes or more.

H
2. Stop the vehicle. I
YES >> Go to TM-466, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-45, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
7.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE K
With CONSULT
2. Turn ignition switch ON. L
CAUTION:
M
5. Record CVT fluid temperature.
7. Drive the vehicle for the total minutes specified in the Driving time column below with the following condi- N
tions satisfied.

O
P
CVT fluid temperature before engine start Driving time
−10°C (14°F) – −1°C (30.2°F) 10 minutes or more

CVT fluid temperature before engine start Driving time
0°C (32°F) – 9°C (48.2°F) 7 minutes or more
— (Go to “8.CHECK CVT FLU-
Other than the above
ID TEMPERATURE SENSOR”)
With GST
3. Drive the vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 20 minutes or more.

CAUTION:
Never turn ignition switch OFF
NO >> GO TO 8.
CVT unit Resistance

Condition
Terminal (Approx.)
CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°F) 6.5 kΩ

12 – 18 CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°F) 2.2 kΩ
YES-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-45, "Intermittent Incident".
YES-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
NO >> There is a malfunction of CVT fluid temperature sensor. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to

CVT unit Resistance

Condition
Connector Terminal (Approx.)

F250 12 – 18 CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°F) 2.2 kΩ
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.

2. CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR) (PART 1) A
B
TCM CVT unit
Continuity
11 18 C
F83 F82 Existed
12 12
TM
YES >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR) (PART 2) E
TCM F
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
11
F83 Ground Not existed G
12
YES >> INSPECTION END H
4. CHECK DTC (TCM)
I
With CONSULT
1. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. Refer to TM-463, "DTC Description".
J
YES >> There is a malfunction of the CVT fluid temperature sensor. Replace the transaxle assembly.
NO >> INSPECTION END K

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

FLUID TEMP SENSOR A fied and this state is maintained for 5 seconds:
(CVT fluid temperature sensor circuit is
P0712 (Transmission Fluid Tempera- • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
shorted to ground)
ture Sensor A Circuit Low) • Fluid temperature sensor detection voltage:
• CVT fluid temperature sensor
0.15 V or less

>> GO TO 2.
1.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT

3. Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and ground.
TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
2.CHECK CVT UNIT TERMINAL CODE ASSEMBLY
Check continuity between CVT unit connector terminal and ground.
CVT unit
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> There is a malfunction of the CVT unit terminal code assembly. Replace the transaxle assembly.
Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminals.
A
CVT unit Resistance
Condition
B
CVT fluid temperature: 80°C (176°F) 0.87 kΩ C
NO >> There is a malfunction of the CVT fluid temperature sensor. Replace the transaxle assembly. TM

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

fied and this state is maintained for 5 seconds: • Harness or connector
FLUID TEMP SENSOR A
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V (CVT fluid temperature sensor circuit is
P0713 (Transmission Fluid Tempera-
• Vehicle speed: More than 10 km/h (7 MPH) open or shorted to power supply)
ture Sensor A Circuit High)
• Fluid temperature sensor detection voltage: • CVT fluid temperature sensor
2.48 V or more

CAUTION:
Be careful of the driving speed.
>> GO TO 2.

1.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (PART 1)

TCM CVT unit

Continuity
11 18
F83 F82 Existed
12 12
YES >> GO TO 2.

+ A
Voltage
TCM −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B
F83 12 Ground 0V
YES >> GO TO 3. C
TM
E
CVT unit Resistance
Condition
CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°F) 6.5 kΩ F

G
NO >> There is a malfunction of the CVT fluid temperature sensor. Replace the transaxle assembly.
Refer to TM-577, "Removal and Installation". H

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC detection condition
DTC (Trouble diagnosis con- Possible causes
tent)
When 1 is satisfied and any of 2, 3 or 4 is satisfied:
1. When the following conditions are satisfied:
- After range change completion, it spends 2 sec-
onds or more.
2. When all of the following conditions are satisfied
and this state is maintained for 5 seconds:
- Primary pulley speed: Less than 150 rpm
- Secondary pulley speed: 500 rpm or more
3. When all of the following conditions are satisfied
and this state is maintained for 0.5 seconds:
- 10-msec-ago primary pulley speed: 1,000 rpm or
more
INPUT SPEED SEN- - Now primary pulley speed: 0 rpm
(Primary speed sensor circuit is
SOR A 4. When all of the following conditions are satisfied
P0715 open or shorted)
(Input/Turbine Speed and this state is maintained for 5 seconds:
• Primary speed sensor
Sensor A Circuit) - Range: D
- Input peed: 300 rpm or more
- Primary pulley speed: 300 rpm or more
- Secondary pulley seed: 300 rpm or more
- Differences between engine speed and primary
pulley speed: More than 1,000 rpm
- Differences between primary pulley speed and in-
put speed: More than 1,000 rpm
- Differences between engine speed and input
speed: 1,000 rpm or less
- Lock-up command is being given (except for slip
lock-up)
- DTC other than the applicable DTC is not detected.

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.
Selector lever : “D” POSITION

Engine speed : 1,200 rpm or more

NO >> INSPECTION END A
1.CHECK PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT B

2. Disconnect primary speed sensor connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. C
4. Check voltage between primary speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
+
TM
Primary speed sensor − Voltage

Connector Terminal E
F55 3 Ground 10 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 2. F
NO >> GO TO 6.
2.CHECK PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
G
Check continuity between primary speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
Primary speed sensor H

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
F55 1 Ground Existed
I
YES >> GO TO 3.
J
3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR AND TCM (PART 1)
2. Disconnect TCM connector. K
3. Check continuity between primary speed sensor harness connector terminal and TCM harness connector
terminal.
L
Primary speed sensor TCM
Continuity
F55 2 F83 35 Existed M
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. N
4.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR AND TCM (PART 2)

Check continuity between primary speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground. O
Primary speed sensor

— Continuity
Connector Terminal P
YES >> GO TO 5.
2. Lift the vehicle.
4. Check frequency of primary speed sensor.
+
Frequency
TCM − Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
700 Hz
• Shift position: “M1” position

F83 35 Ground
JSDIA1905GB

NO >> Replace primary speed sensor. Refer to TM-562, "Removal and Installation".
6.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and primary speed sensor harness con-
nector terminal.
IPDM E/R Primary speed sensor

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 7.
• Short circuit in harness between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal 57 and primary speed sensor har-
ness connector terminal 3.
• 10A fuse (No.55, located in the IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-80, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• IPDM E/R

A

DTC DTC detection condition Possible cause
When 1 is satisfied and any of 2, 3 or 4 is satisfied:
1. When the following conditions are satisfied:
- After range change completion, it spends 2 TM
seconds or more.
2. When all of the following conditions are satis-
fied and this state is maintained for 5 sec-
E
onds:
- Input speed: Less than 150 rpm
- Range: Other than P, N F
- P0715 is not detected
3. When all of the following conditions are satis-
fied and this state is maintained for 0.5 sec-
onds: G
- 10-msec-ago input speed: 1,000 rpm or more
INPUT SPEED SENSOR A - Now input speed: 0 rpm
(Input speed sensor circuit is open
P0717 (Input/Turbine Speed Sensor 4. When all of the following conditions are satis-
or shorted.) H
“A” Circuit No Signal) fied and this state is maintained for 5 sec-
• Input speed sensor
onds:
- Range: D
- Input peed: 300 rpm or more I
- Secondary pulley seed: 300 rpm or more
- Differences between engine speed and pri- J
mary pulley speed: 1,000 rpm or less
- Differences between primary pulley speed
and input speed: More than 1,000 rpm
- Differences between engine speed and input K
speed: More than 1,000 rpm
- Lock-up command is being given (except for
slip lock-up)
- DTC other than the applicable DTC is not de- L
tected.

CAUTION: M
1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK N
O
>> GO TO 2.
P
With CONSULT

1.CHECK INPUT SPEED SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect input speed sensor connector.
4. Check voltage between input speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
+
Input speed sensor − Voltage
Connector Terminal
F77 3 Ground 10 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 6.
2.CHECK INPUT SPEED SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between input speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
Input speed sensor

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN INPUT SPEED SENSOR AND TCM (PART 1)
3. Check continuity between input speed sensor harness connector terminal and TCM harness connector
terminal.
Input speed sensor TCM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN INPUT SPEED SENSOR AND TCM (PART 2)
Check continuity between input speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.

Input speed sensor A

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
B
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. C
2. Lift the vehicle. TM
4. Check frequency of input speed sensor.
E
+
Frequency
TCM − Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F
880 Hz
G
F83 24 Ground
H
JSDIA3769GB
Is the inspection result normal? I

NO >> Replace input speed sensor. Refer to TM-560, "Removal and Installation".
6.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND INPUT SPEED SENSOR J
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and input speed sensor harness connec- K
tor terminals.
IPDM E/R Input speed sensor L

Continuity
M
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. N
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-43, "Wiring Dia- O
• Short circuit in harness between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal 57 and input speed sensor harness
connector terminal 3. P
• 10A fuse (No.55, located in the IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-81, "Fuse and Fusible Link Arrangement".
• IPDM E/R

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

fied and this state is maintained for 5 seconds:
TORQUE CONVERTER (Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
P0740 (Torque Converter Clutch Cir- circuit is open or shorted to power sup-
• P0743 is not detected.
cuit/Open) ply)
• TCM judges that solenoid valve circuit is
• Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
open.

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.
2.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION
With CONSULT
4. Confirm that the CVT fluid temperature is in the following range.
FLUID TEMP : 20°C (68°F) or more
With GST
2. Set the CVT fluid to 20°C (68°F) or more.
NOTE:
When the ambient temperature is 20°C (68°F), the CVT fluid usually increases to 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F) with driving in an urban area for approximately 10 minutes.
Is the CVT fluid 20°C (68°F) or more?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> 1. Warm the transaxle.
2. GO TO 3.


A
2. Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector. B
TCM CVT unit C

Continuity
TM
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN CVT UNIT AND GROUND
Check resistance between CVT unit harness connector terminal and ground.
F
CVT unit
— Condition Resistance
CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.5 – 7.0 Ω
F250 5 Ground CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°F) 6.0 – 8.0 Ω
CVT fluid temperature: 80°C (176°F) 6.5 – 8.5 Ω H

YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-45, "Intermittent Incident". I
NO >> There is malfunction of torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer
to TM-577, "Removal and Installation".

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

fied and this state is maintained for 0.48 sec- • Harness or connector
TORQUE CONVERTER
onds: (Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
P0743 (Torque Converter Clutch Cir-
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V circuit is shorted to ground)
cuit Electrical)
• TCM judges that solenoid valve circuit is • Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
shorted to ground.

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
With GST
NOTE:
YES >> GO TO 3.
2. GO TO 3.


A
2. Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector. B
TCM C
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
TM
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check resistance between CVT unit harness connector terminal and ground.
F
CVT unit
CVT fluid temperature: 80°C (176°F) 6.5 – 8.5 Ω H

YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-45, "Intermittent Incident". I
NO >> There is malfunction of torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer
to TM-577, "Removal and Installation".

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

fied and this state is maintained for 30 sec-
onds:
TORQUE CONVERTER • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V • Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
P0744 (Torque converter clutch cir- • P0717 is not detected. • Control valve assembly
cuit intermittent) • CAN communication is normal • Torque converter
• Torque converter slip speed: (40+vihicle
speed/2) rpm
• LU pressure: More than 0.2 MPa

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
With GST
NOTE:
YES >> GO TO 3.
2. GO TO 3.


A
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDNT B

YES >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-577, "Removal and Installation". C
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction items.
TM

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

The detecting condition A or detection condi-
tion B is detected twice or more (1 second or
more later after detection of the first) in the
same DC under the following diagnosis condi-
tions:
• Diagnosis conditions
- Engine speed: More than 600 rpm
- Primary pulley speed: More than 450 rpm
- Idle is not being detected.
- Acceleration/deceleration speed: −0.49 m/
s2 (−0.05 G) or more
PC SOLENOID A - The primary pulley speed experienced 300
rpm or more and the secondary pulley • Line pressure solenoid valve
P0746 (Pressure Control Solenoid A
speed experienced 250 rpm or more at least • Control valve assembly
Performance/Stuck Off)
once.
- Secondary pulley speed: More than 150
rpm
• Detection condition A
- Status with the shifting ratio of the primary
pulley speed/secondary pulley ratio exceed-
ing 2.981 is 0.2 sec. or more continuously.
• Detection condition B
- Status with the shifting ratio of the primary
pulley speed/secondary pulley ratio exceed-
ing 3.781 is 0.1 sec. or more continuously.
NOTE:
DC stands for "DRIVING CYCLE" and indicates a series of driving cycle of "Ignition switch OFF → ON → driv-
ing → OFF".
CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.

Is “P0746”detected?

A
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDNT B

YES >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-577, "Removal and Installation". C
TM

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When any of 1 or 2 is satisfied and this state
is maintained for 10 seconds:
1. When all of the following conditions are
satisfied:
- DTC other than the applicable DTC is
not detected.
- Selector lever: Other than P/N position
- CVT fluid temperature: More than -
20°C (-4°F)
- TCM power supply: More than 11 V
- The difference between instruction
pressure of secondary pressure and
10-msec-ago instruction secondary
pressure is 0 MPa or more
- Instruction pressure of secondary
pressure: 0 MPa or more
- Instruction pressure of secondary
pressure - secondary pressure: More
than 1.2 MPa
- When all of the following conditions are
satisfied and this state is maintained
for 1.52 seconds:
• DTC other than the applicable DTC is
not detected.
• CVT fluid temperature: More than -
20°C (-4°F)
PC SOLENOID B • Selector lever: Other than P/N position
P0776 (Pressure Control Solenoid • Instruction pressure of secondary Secondary pressure solenoid valve
“B” Performance/Stuck Off) pressure − secondary pressure: 0.25
MPa or more
satisfied:
- DTC other than the applicable DTC is
not detected.
- CVT fluid temperature: More than -
20°C (-4°F)
satisfied and this state is maintained
for 5.5 seconds:
not detected.
• CVT fluid temperature: More than -
20°C (-4°F)
• Selector lever: Other than P/N position
• Secondary pressure - instruction pres-
sure of secondary pressure: 1.2 MPa
or more
- The difference between instruction
pressure of secondary pressure and
10-msec-ago instruction secondary
pressure is 0 MPa or more
- Secondary pressure - instruction pres-
sure of secondary pressure: More than
1.2 MPa

CAUTION: A
B
C
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start the engine. TM
E
F
Is “P0776” detected? G
H

I
YES >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-577, "Removal and Installation". J

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When all of the following conditions are satisfied
PC SOLENOID B and this state is maintained for 0.48 seconds:
(Secondary pressure solenoid valve
P0778 (Pressure Control Solenoid • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
circuit is shorted to ground.)
“B” Electrical) • TCM judges that solenoid valve circuit is short-
ed to ground.

>> GO TO 2.

TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check continuity between CVT unit harness connector terminal and ground.
CVT unit
Connector Terminal
NO >> There is malfunction of secondary pressure solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to

A

When all of the following conditions are satis- C
onds:
Pressure control solenoid B (Secondary pressure solenoid valve
P0779 • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
Intermittent circuit open or shorted to power supply) TM
• P0778 is not detected
open or shorted to power supply.
E
CAUTION:
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test. G
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION H

3. Maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. I

Vehicle speed : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more J
Is “P0779” detected? K
L
1.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT M

3. Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and CVT unit harness connector terminal. N
TCM CVT unit

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal O
P
YES >> GO TO 2.

CVT unit
Connector Terminal
NO >> There is malfunction of secondary pressure solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to

A

• Manual mode switch C
• Combination meter
• TCM monitors manual mode, non-manual • Harness or connectors
mode, up or down switch signal, and detects - (Manual mode switch circuit are open
Up and Down Shift Switch Cir- as irregular when impossible input pattern or shorted.) TM
P0826
cuit occurs 1 second or more. - (Paddle shifter switch circuit are open
• When shift up/down signal of paddle shifter or shorted.)
continuously remains ON for 60 seconds. - (CAN communication line is open or
E
shorted.)
• Paddle shifter
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F

least 10 seconds, then perform the next test. G
>> GO TO 2.
H
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine. I
2. Shift the selector lever to “D” position and wait for 60 second or more.
Is “P0826” detected? J
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DTC DETECTION (PART 2) K
With CONSULT
1. Shift the selector lever to manual shift gate and wait for 1 second or more.
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. L
NO >> GO TO 4. M

With CONSULT N
1. Shift the selector lever to “UP side (+ side)” and wait for 1 second or more.
Is “P0826” detected? O
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK DTC DETECTION (PART 4) P
With CONSULT
1. Shift the selector lever to “DOWN side (− side)” and wait for 1 second or more.

1.CHECK DTC (COMBINATION METER)

With CONSULT
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “METER/M&A”.
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to MWI-33, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH SIGNALS
With CONSULT
3. Check the On/Off operations of each monitor item.
Item name Monitor item Condition Status

Manual shift gate position On
MMODE
Manual shift gate position Off
NONMMODE
Manual mode switch
Selector lever: UP (+ side) On
UPLVR
Selector lever: DOWN (− side) On
DOWNLVR
Pressed paddle shifter (shift-down) On
STRDWNSW
Paddle shifter*
Pressed paddle shifter (shift-up) On
STRUPSW
*: With paddle shifter
Without CONSULT
Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and confirm that the actual gear position and the meter's indication of the
position mutually coincide when the selector lever and paddle shifter* are shifted to the “+ (up)” or “− (down)”
side [1st ⇔ 7th gear].
NO-1 (Manual mode switch is abnormal)>>GO TO 3.
NO-2 (Paddle shifter is abnormal)>>GO TO 8.
3.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect CVT shift selector connector.
4. Check voltage between CVT shift selector harness connector terminal and ground.

+ A
Voltage
CVT shift selector − Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B
7
Ignition switch: ON 12 V C
8
M57 Ground
9 TM
11
Ignition switch: OFF 0V E
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 5. F
4.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH
2. Check manual mode switch. Refer to TM-495, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 7. H
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
3. Check continuity between CVT shift selector harness connector terminals and combination meter harness
connector terminals. J
CVT shift selector Combination meter

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal K
7 36
8 16
M57 M34 Existed L
9 14
11 37
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN CVT SHIFT SELECTOR AND COMBINATION METER (PART 2) N
Check continuity between CVT shift selector harness connector terminals and ground.
O
CVT shift selector
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
7 P
8
M57 Ground Not existed
9
11

7.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between CVT shift selector harness connector terminal and ground.
CVT shift selector

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
2. Disconnect paddle shifter connector.
4. Check voltage between paddle shifter side harness connector terminals.
Paddle shifter
Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M96 3 1
Battery voltage
M97 3 1
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 11.
Check paddle shifter. Refer to TM-496, "Component Inspection (Paddle Shifter)".
YES >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Paddle shifter
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
M96 1
Existed
M97 1
YES >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
Check voltage between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Paddle shifter
Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Ground
M96 3
0V
M97 3
YES >> GO TO 12.

12.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN PADDLE SHIFTER AND COMBINATION METER (PART 1) A

2. Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and combination meter
B
vehicle side harness connector terminals.
Paddle shifter Combination meter

Continuity C
M96 3 26
M34 Existed
M97 3 5 TM
YES >> GO TO 13.

Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. F
Paddle shifter
Continuity
Ground
M96 3
Not existed
M97 3
H
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I
Check TCM connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
J
YES >> Replace TCM. Refer to TM-554, "Exploded View".
K
Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch) INFOID:0000000012201192
1.MANUAL MODE SWITCH L

Check continuity between CVT shift selector connector terminals.
CVT shift selector M

Terminal
Manual shift gate position (neutral) Existed
7 – 10 N
Selector lever: DOWN (− side) Existed
8 – 10
Other than the above Not existed O
Selector lever: UP (+ side) Existed
9 – 10
P
Manual shift gate position Not existed
10 – 11
Other than the above Existed
NO >> Replace the CVT shift selector assembly due to malfunction in manual mode switch. Refer to TM-

Component Inspection (Paddle Shifter) INFOID:0000000012201193

Check continuity between paddle shifter connector terminals.
Paddle shifter
Terminal
Pressed paddle shifter (shift-up) Existed
1 3
Pressed paddle shifter (shift-down) Existed
1 3

A

When all of the following conditions are sat-
isfied and this state is maintained for 5 sec-
onds:
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 • Harness or connectors TM
V (Secondary pressure sensor circuit is
FLUID PRESS SEN/SW A
• DTC other than the applicable DTC is not open or shorted.)
(Transmission Fluid Pres-
P0841 detected. • Harness or connectors
sure Sensor/Switch “A” Cir- E
• Primary pulley speed: 300 rpm or more (Primary pressure sensor circuit is open
cuit Range/Performance)
• Secondary pulley speed: 250 rpm or more or shorted.)
• Target speed for shifting: Less than 0.1 • Secondary pressure sensor
seconds F
• Primary pulley pressure is outside the
specified value.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G

CAUTION:
1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK H
I
>> GO TO 2.
3. Maintain the following condition for 10 seconds or more. K
Vehicle speed : Constant speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH)
L
CAUTION:
Also keep the accelerator pedal position constant.
5. Check the first trip DTC. M
N
O
Is the inspection result normal? P

P0847 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SEN/SW B
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

FLUID PRESS SEN/SW B • CVT fluid temperature: More than −20°C (− (Secondary pressure sensor circuit is
P0847 (Transmission Fluid Pressure 4°F) open or shorted to ground)
Sensor/Switch B Circuit Low) • TCM power supply voltage: 11 V or more • Secondary pressure sensor
• Secondary pressure sensor voltage: 0.09 V • Control valve assembly
or less

>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
FLUID TEMP : −20°C (−4°F)

With GST
CAUTION:
When the ambient temperature is less than −20°C (−4°F) and the engine is cold, warm up the
engine for approximately 5 minutes.

3. Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminals.
+
Connector Terminal
F83 16 Ground • Selector lever: “N” position 1.2 – 1.3 V
• At idle

NO >> GO TO 2. A
B
TCM CVT unit

C
Continuity
11 13 TM
26 22
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (PART 2) F

G
TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
H
16
26
YES >> There is malfunction of secondary pressure sensor. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. J

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

fied and this state is maintained for 5 seconds:
• CVT fluid temperature: More than −20°C (− • Harness or connector
FLUID PRESS SEN/SW B 4°F) (Secondary pressure sensor circuit is
P0848 (Transmission Fluid Pressure • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V shorted to power supply)
Sensor/Switch B Circuit Low) • Instruction secondary pressure: 5.7 MPa or • Secondary pressure sensor
less • Control valve assembly
• Secondary pressure sensor voltage: 4.7 V
or more

If another "DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" occurs just before, the ignition switch OFF and wait for at
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
FLUID TEMP : More than −20°C (−4°F)

With GST
CAUTION:


+ A
Connector Terminal
B
• At idle
C
NO >> GO TO 2.
TM
2.CHECK SECONDARY PRESSURE SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT
2. Connect TCM connector. E
5. Check voltage between CVT unit harness connector terminal and ground.
F
+
Voltage
CVT unit − G
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F82 22 Ground 5.0 V
H
YES >> GO TO 3.
I
3.CHECK SECONDARY PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Check voltage between CVT unit harness connector terminal and ground.
J
+
Voltage
CVT unit −
(Approx.) K
Connector Terminal
F82 14 Ground 0V
Is the inspection result normal? L
YES >> There is malfunction of secondary pressure sensor. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. M

P084C TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SEN/SW H
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

FLUID PRESS SEN/SW H • CVT fluid temperature: More than −20°C (− (Primary pressure sensor circuit is
P084C (Transmission Fluid Pressure 4°F) open or shorted to ground)
Sensor/Switch H Circuit Low) • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V • Primary pressure sensor
• Primary pressure sensor voltage: 0.09 V or • Control valve assembly
less

>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT

With GST
CAUTION:
Is “P084C”detected?

+
Connector Terminal
• At idle

NO >> GO TO 2. A
B
TCM CVT unit

C
Continuity
11 18 TM
26 22
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (PART 2) F

G
TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
H
17
26
YES >> There is malfunction of primary pressure sensor. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-577,

P084D TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SEN/SW H
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

FLUID PRESS SEN/SW H
• CVT fluid temperature: More than −20°C (− (Primary pressure sensor circuit is
(Transmission Fluid Pressure
P084D 4°F) open or shorted to ground)
Sensor/Switch “H” Circuit
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V • Primary pressure sensor
High)
• Primary pressure sensor voltage: 4.7 V or • Control valve assembly
more

>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT

With GST
CAUTION:
Is “P084D”detected?

+
Connector Terminal
• At idle

NO >> GO TO 2. A
2.CHECK PRIMARY PRESSURE SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT
B
2. Connect TCM connector.
5. Check voltage between CVT unit harness connector terminal and ground. C
+
CVT unit −
Voltage TM
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F82 22 Ground 5.0 V
E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. F
3.CHECK PRIMARY PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Check voltage between CVT unit harness connector terminal and ground.
G
+
Voltage
CVT unit − H
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F82 13 Ground 0V
YES >> There is malfunction of primary pressure sensor. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-577,

P0863 TCM COMMUNICATION
P0863 TCM COMMUNICATION
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONTROL UNIT (CAN) An error is detected at the initial CAN diagnosis of
P0863 TCM
(TCM Communication Circuit) TCM.

>> GO TO 2.
2. Check the DTC.

YES >> Replace TCM. Refer to TM-554, "Removal and Installation".

P0890 TCM
P0890 TCM
A

TCM • Harness or connector
(Transmission Control Module (TCM power supply (back-up) circuit is
P0890 onds:
Power Relay Sense Circuit open or shorted.) TM
Low) • TCM
• Battery voltage: Less than 8.4 V

>> GO TO 2.
G
2. Check the DTC. H
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY (BACK-UP) CIRCUIT J

K
3. Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminals and ground.
+
L
TCM − Voltage
Connector Terminal
45 M
F83 Ground 10 – 16 V
46
N
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS O
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between battery positive terminal and TCM connector terminals 45,
and 46. P
• 10A fuse (No.23, located in the fuse holder). Refer to PG-81, "Fuse and Fusible Link Arrangement".
P0890 TCM
YES >> Replace TCM. Refer to TM-554, "Removal and Installation".

A

PC SOLENOID A
onds: (Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is
P0962 (Pressure Control Solenoid A TM
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V shorted to ground)
Control Circuit Low)
• TCM judges that solenoid valve circuit is • Line pressure solenoid valve
shorted to ground.
E
If another "DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at F
>> GO TO 2. G
J
2. Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector. K
TCM
L
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M
YES >> GO TO 2.
O
CVT unit

NO >> There is malfunction of line pressure solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-

A

PC SOLENOID A onds:
(Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is TM
P0963 (Pressure Control Solenoid A • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
open or shorted to power supply)
Control Circuit High) • P0962 is not detected
open.
E
G
>> GO TO 2.
H
I
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012201211 J

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. K
L
TCM CVT unit
Continuity
M
YES >> GO TO 2. N
Check continuity between CVT unit harness connector terminal and ground. O
CVT unit
— Condition Resistance P
Connector Terminal

NO >> There is malfunction of line pressure solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-

A

When any of 1 or 2 is satisfied and this state is
maintained for 10 seconds:
satisfied: TM
- DTC other than the applicable DTC is not
detected.
E
- CVT fluid temperature: More than -20°C
(-4°F)
- TCM power supply: More than 11 V F
- The difference between instruction pres-
sure of primary pressure and 10-msec-
ago instruction primary pressure is 0
MPa or more G
- Instruction pressure of primary pressure:
0.86 MPa or more
- Instruction pressure of primary pressure
- primary pressure: More than 1.2 MPa H
satisfied and this state is maintained for
1 second:
• DTC other than the applicable DTC is not I
detected.
• CVT fluid temperature: More than -20°C
(-4°F) J
PC SOLENOID B • Harness or connector
(Pressure Control Solenoid B (Primary pressure solenoid valve cir-
P0965 • Engine speed: More than 625 rpm
Control Circuit Range Perfor- cuit is open or shorted.)
• Instruction pressure of primary pressure:
mance) • Primary pressure solenoid valve
More than 2 MPa K
• Primary pressure: 0.4 MPa or less
satisfied:
- DTC other than the applicable DTC is not L
detected.
- CVT fluid temperature: More than -20°C
(-4°F)
- Selector lever: Other than P/N position M
5.5 seconds:
N
• DTC other than the applicable DTC is not
detected.
• CVT fluid temperature: More than -20°C O
(-4°F)
• Primary pressure - instruction pressure
of primary pressure: 1.2 MPa or more P
- The difference between instruction pres-
sure of primary pressure and 10-msec-
ago instruction primary pressure is 0
MPa or more
- Primary pressure - instruction pressure
of primary pressure: More than 1.2 MPa

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.



A

PC SOLENOID B
onds: (Primary pressure solenoid valve cir-
P0966 (Pressure Control Solenoid B TM
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V cuit shorted to ground)
Control Circuit Low)
• TCM judges that solenoid valve circuit is • Primary pressure solenoid valve
shorted to ground.
E
If another "DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at F
>> GO TO 2. G
J
2. Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector. K
TCM
L
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M
YES >> GO TO 2.
O
CVT unit

NO >> There is malfunction of primary pressure solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to

A

PC SOLENOID B onds:
(Primary pressure solenoid valve cir- TM
P0967 (Pressure Control Solenoid B • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
cuit open or shorted to power supply)
Control Circuit High) • P0966 is not detected
• Primary pressure solenoid valve
open.
E
G
>> GO TO 2.
H
I
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012201217 J

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. K
L
TCM CVT unit
Continuity
M
YES >> GO TO 2. N
Check continuity between CVT unit harness connector terminal and ground. O
CVT unit
— Condition Resistance P
Connector Terminal

NO >> There is malfunction of primary pressure solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to

P17F0 CVT JUDDER (T/M INSPECTION)
P17F0 CVT JUDDER (T/M INSPECTION)
A

Diagnosis condition —
CVT JUDDER (T/M INSPECTION) Signal —

P17F0
[CVT Judder (Transmission inspection)] Threshold Malfunction in chain belt and pulley TM
Diagnosis delay time —
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
Transmission assembly
FAIL-SAFE
Not changed from normal driving F

CAUTION: G
• TM-519, "Diagnosis Procedure" must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”.
H
>> GO TO 2.
1. With the throttle position 1/8, accelerate the vehicle from 0 km/h (0 MPH) to 50 km/h (31 MPH).
2. Drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 MPH) constant speed for 15 seconds.
3. Stop the vehicle with a brake force which allows the vehicle to stop in 10 to 20 seconds. K
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 above 5 times.
Is “P17F0” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-519, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
M
1.REPLACE TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY

Replace the transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-577, "Removal and Installation". N
>> END
O

P17F1 CVT JUDDER (C/V INSPECTION)
P17F1 CVT JUDDER (C/V INSPECTION)
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CAUTION:
If DTC P17F1 is displayed with DTC P17F0, perform only trouble diagnosis of DTC P17F0. Refer to TM-
519, "DTC Description".

CVT JUDDER (C/V INSPECTION) Signal —

P17F1
[CVT judder (Control Valve Inspection)] Threshold Malfunction in control valve
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Control valve
FAIL-SAFE
Not changed from normal driving
CAUTION:
DURE”.
>> GO TO 2.
3. Stop the vehicle with a brake force which allows the vehicle to stop in 10 to 20 seconds.
1.REPLACE TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY

There is malfunction of control valve. Replace the transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-577, "Removal and Instal-
lation".
>> END

P17F2 CVT JUDDER (T/C INSPECTION)
P17F2 CVT JUDDER (T/C INSPECTION)
A

CVT JUDDER (T/C INSPECTION) Signal —
P17F2 [CVT judder (Torque Converter Inspec-
Threshold Malufunction in torque converter TM
tion)]
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
Torque converter
FAIL-SAFE
Not changed from normal driving F

CAUTION: G
DURE”.
H
>> GO TO 2.
3. Stop the vehicle with a brake force which allows the vehicle to stop in 10 to 20 seconds. K
YES >> Go to TM-521, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
M
1.REPLACE TORQUE CONVERTER

Replace the torque converter. Refer to TM-581, "Disassembly". N
>> END
O

P2765 INPUT SPEED SENSOR B
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When 1 is satisfied and any of 2, 3 or 4 is sat-
isfied and this state is maintained for 5 sec-
onds:
satisfied:
- TCM power supply voltage: More than 11
V
- After range change completion, it spends
2 seconds or more.
5 seconds:
- Secondary pulley speed: Less than 149
rpm
- Primary pulley speed: 1,000 rpm or more
0.5 seconds:
- 10-msec-ago secondary pulley speed:
1000 rpm or more
- Now secondary pulley speed: 0 rpm
INPUT SPEED SENSOR B (Output speed sensor circuit is open or
5 seconds:
P2765 (Input/Turbine Speed Sensor shorted)
- Range: D
B Circuit) • Output speed sensor
- Secondary pulley speed: 300 rpm or
more
- Input speed: 300 rpm or more
- The difference between engine speed
and primary pulley speed is 1,000 rpm or
less
- The difference between engine speed
and input speed is 1,000 rpm or less
- The difference between primary pulley
speed and input speed is 1,000 rpm or
less
- Lock-up command is being given (except
for slip lock-up)
- DTC other than the applicable DTC is not
detected.
- When any of following items are satis-
fied:
• Primary pulley speed/secondary pulley
speed: More than 2.9
• Primary pulley speed/secondary pulley
speed: Less than 0.3

CAUTION:

>> GO TO 2. A
1. Start the engine. B
Selector lever : “D” position C

TM
E
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012201219 F
1.CHECK OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect output speed sensor connector.
4. Check voltage between output speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground. H
+
Output speed sensor − Voltage I
Connector Terminal
F22 3 Ground 10 – 16 V
J
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 6. K
2.CHECK OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between output speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
L
Output speed sensor
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M
YES >> GO TO 3. N
3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR AND TCM (PART 1)
O
3. Check continuity between output speed sensor harness connector terminal and TCM harness connector
terminal. P
Output speed sensor TCM

Continuity

YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR AND TCM (PART 2)
Check continuity between output speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
Output speed sensor

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 5.
2. Lift the vehicle.
4. Check frequency of output speed sensor.
+
Frequency
TCM − Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
200 Hz

F83 34 Ground
JSDIA1904GB

NO >> Replace output speed sensor. Refer to TM-564, "Removal and Installation".
6.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and output speed sensor harness con-
nector terminals.
IPDM E/R Output speed sensor

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 7.
• Short circuit in harness between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal 57 and output speed sensor harness
connector terminal 3.
• 10A fuse (No.55, located in the IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-80, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• IPDM E/R

YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-45, "Intermittent Incident". A
TM

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When any of 1, or 2 is satisfied:
1. When all the following conditions are es-
tablished three times in 1DC
- Precondition
• DTC other than the applicable DTC is not
detected.
• Throttle position: More than 6.27 deg.
• Vehicle speed: Less than 3 km/h (1
MPH)
• CVT fluid temperature: More than 20°C
(68°F)
• Selector lever: Other than P, N
• Turbine speed when performed N → D,
N (P) → R: More than 500 rpm
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11
V
- Detection time
• N → D: 0.4 seconds
• N → R: 0.3 seconds
• P → R: 0.3 seconds
SELECT SOLENOID 30 seconds:
P2813 Select solenoid valve
(Select solenoid) - The counting of time continues while all
of the following conditions are satisfied
and stops when the conditions become
unsatisfied (the count is maintained).
When accumulated time reaches 30 sec-
onds (Clutch is judged as engaged and
the count is reset.)
• Selector lever: Other than P, N
• Vehicle speed: Less than 3 km/h (1
MPH)
• Differences between primary pulley
speed and secondary speed: Less than
120 rpm
• Clutch instructions pressure: 0.95 MPa
or more
• Differences between turbine speed and
input speed: Less than 200 rpm
• Turbine speed – speed: More than 450
rpm
not detected.
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11
V
NOTE:
DC stands for “DRIVING CYCLE” and indicates a series of driving cycle of “Ignition switch OFF → ON → driv-
ing → OFF”.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION 1 A

2. Maintain the following conditions. (Keep 30 seconds or more after the selector lever shifted.)
B
Selector lever : N→ D, N → R, P→ R
C
TM
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT E

F

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

SELECT SOLENOID onds: (Select solenoid valve circuit shorted to
P2814
(Select solenoid) • TCM power supply voltage: 11 V or more ground)
• TCM judges that solenoid valve circuit is • Select solenoid valve
shorted to ground.

>> GO TO 2.
Selector lever : N → D, N → R, P → R

TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.
CVT unit
Connector Terminal

YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-45, "Intermittent Incident". A
NO >> There is malfunction of select solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-577,
B
TM

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

onds:
SELECT SOLENOID (Select solenoid valve circuit open or
P2815 • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
(Select solenoid) shorted to power supply)
• Select solenoid valve
open.
• P2814 is not detected.

>> GO TO 2.
Selector lever : N → D, N → R, P → R

TCM CVT unit

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 2.

CVT unit A
Connector Terminal
B
NO >> There is malfunction of select solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-577,
"Removal and Installation". TM

MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1.CHECK TCM POWER CIRCUIT (PART 1)

3. Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminals and ground.
+
TCM − Voltage
Connector Terminal
45
F83 Ground 10 – 16 V
46
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.
2.CHECK TCM POWER CIRCUIT (PART 2)
Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminals and ground.
+
Connector Terminal
Ignition switch ON 10 – 16 V
47
Ignition switch OFF Approx. 0 V
F83 Ground
Ignition switch ON 10 – 16 V
48
Ignition switch OFF Approx. 0 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 5.
3.CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
41
F83 Ground Existed
42
4.DETECT MALFUNCTION ITEMS (PART 1)
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between battery positive terminal and TCM connector terminal 45,
and 46.

5.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND TCM A

3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and TCM harness connector terminals.
B
IPDM E/R TCM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal C
47
E15 57 F83 Existed
48
TM
YES >> GO TO 6.
E
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS (PART 2)
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-43, "Wiring Dia- F
• Short circuit in harness between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal 57 and TCM harness connector ter-
minals 47, and 48.
• 10A fuse (No.55, located in the IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-80, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement". G
• IPDM E/R
H

Component Parts Function Inspection INFOID:0000000012201227
1.CHECK SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR

2. Shift selector lever.
3. Check that the selector lever position and the shift position indicator on the combination meter are identi-
cal.
1.CHECK TCM INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT
4. Shift selector lever.
5. Check that selector lever position, “RANGE” on CONSULT screen, and shift position indicator display on
combination meter are identical.
NO-1 (“RANGE” is changed but is not displayed on shift position indicator.>>Check “Self Diagnostic Result”
in “TRANSMISSION”.
NO-2 (“RANGE” and shift position indicator are different.)>>Check “Self Diagnostic Result” in “TRANSMIS-
SION”.
NO-3 (Specific “RANGE” is not displayed on shift position indicator.)>>Check “Self Diagnostic Result” in
“METER/M&A”.

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A
1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 1) B

1. Turn ignition ON.
3. Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other than position with the brake pedal released. C
NO >> GO TO 2. TM
2.CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 2)
Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other than position with the brake pedal depressed. E
NO >> Go to TM-535, "Diagnosis Procedure". F
1.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 1) G

2. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector
3. Turn ignition switch ON. H
4. Check the voltage between the stop lamp switch harness connector terminal and ground.
+ I
Connector Terminal
J
YES >> GO TO 2. K
NO >> GO TO 8.
L
YES >> GO TO 3. M
NO >> GO TO 9.
3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
1. Disconnect CVT shift selector connector N
2. Check the continuity between the stop lamp switch harness connector terminal and the CVT shift selector
O
Stop lamp switch CVT shift selector
Continuity
E102 4 M57 3 Existed P
3. Also check short circuit in harness.

YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHCK GROUND CIRCUIT
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Check the continuity between the CVT shift selector harness connector terminal and ground.
CVT shift selector

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK PART POSITION SWITCH
1. Disconnect park position switch connector.
2. Check park position switch. Refer to TM-537, "Component Inspection (Park Position Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 6.
1. Disconnect shift lock solenoid connector.
2. Check shift lock solenoid. Refer to TM-537, "Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid)".
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK CVT SHIFT SELECTOR HARNESS
Check CVT shift selector harness. Refer to TM-537, "Component Inspection (CVT Shift Selector Harness)".
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and stop lamp switch connector. Refer to PG-
43, "Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -".
• Ignition switch
• 10A fuse [No.3, fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-80, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
Adjust stop lamp switch position. Refer to BR-9, "Inspection and Adjustment".
>> GO TO 10.

Check continuity between the stop lamp switch connector terminals.

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Stop lamp switch A

Terminal
Depressed brake pedal Yes
3–4 B
Released brake pedal No
YES >> INSPECTION END C
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-20, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection (Park Position Switch) INFOID:0000000012201232
TM
1.CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH
Check continuity between park position switch connector terminals. E
CAUTION:
F
Park position switch
Terminal
G
Shift selector lever to “P” position. Existed
1–2
Other than above Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? H
NO >> Replace park position switch. Refer to TM-547, "Disassembly and Assembly".
I
Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid) INFOID:0000000012201233
1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID J

Apply voltage to terminals of shift lock solenoid connector and check that shift lock solenoid is activated.
CAUTION:
• Never cause shorting between terminals. K
Shift lock solenoid

L
+ (fuse) − Condition Status
Terminal
Apply battery voltage be- M
1 2 Shift lock solenoid operates
tween terminals 1 and 2.
YES >> INSPECTION END N
NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-547, "Disassembly and Assembly".
Component Inspection (CVT Shift Selector Harness) INFOID:0000000012201234
O
Check continuity between CVT shift selector harness connector terminal and shift lock solenoid harness con- P
nector terminal.
CVT shift selector Shift lock solenoid

Continuity

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace CVT shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-546, "Removal and Installation".
Check continuity between shift lock solenoid harness connector terminal and park position switch harness
connector terminal.
Shift lock solenoid Park position switch

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 3.
Check continuity between park switch harness connector terminal and CVT shift selector harness connector
terminal.
Park switch CVT shift selector

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace CVT shift selector harness. Refer to TM-546, "Removal and Installation".
Check harness cladding CVT shift selector harness for damage.

Shift
Shock
Symptom Table 1
Symptom Table
Symptom
Revision: November 2015

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Large shock (N→R position)

Large shock (N→D position)
Shock is too large for lock-up.

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
EC-743 Engine system
2
1
1
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
CAN communication line
3
4
4
Transmission range switch (P0705, P0706)
7
7
Input speed sensor (P0717)
Primary speed sensor (P0715)
TM-539
Output speed sensor (P2765)
• Perform diagnoses of symptom table 1 before symptom table 2.
CVT fluid temperature sensor (P0712, P0713)
3
3
TM-414
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
Primary pressure sensor (P084C, P084D)
Secondary pressure sensor (P0841, P0847, P0848)
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve (P0740, P0743, P0744)
6
6
6
Manual mode switch
TM-438 Stall test
TM-439 CVT position
2
2
1
• The diagnosis item number indicates the order of check. Start checking in the order from 1.
TM-532 Power supply
TM-557 Control valve
5
8
8
TM-441 CVT fluid level and state
5
5
4
PG-43, STR-18(With GR8-1200 NI), Ignition switch and starter
2016 JUKE
[CVT: RE0F10D]
STR-21 (Without GR8-1200 NI)

INFOID:0000000012201235
L
F
P
K
E
B
A
N
H
C
O
G
M
TM
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [CVT: RE0F10D]



Ignition switch and starter

CVT fluid level and state

Manual mode switch
Engine system
Power supply
Control valve
Symptom
CVT position
Stall test
PG-43, STR-18(With GR8-1200 NI),

TM-438
TM-439
TM-532
TM-557
TM-441
EC-743
TM-414
Vehicle cannot be started from D posi-

8 3 5 6 7 9 10 11 4 2 12 13 1
tion.
Vehicle cannot be started from R posi-
8 3 5 6 7 9 10 11 4 2 12 13 1
tion.
Does not lock-up. 2 6 8 3 4 10 9 11 12 5 7 13 1
Slips/ Does not hold lock-up condition. 2 6 8 3 4 10 9 11 12 5 7 13 1
Will Not
Engage Lock-up is not released. 2 6 3 4 5 7 8 1
With selector lever in D position, accel-
3 4 5 7 8 9 12 10 11 2 6 13 14 1
eration is extremely poor.
With selector lever in R position, accel-
3 4 5 7 8 9 12 10 11 2 6 13 14 1
eration is extremely poor.
Slips at lock-up. 2 6 8 3 4 10 9 11 12 5 7 13 1

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM

A

B


C

TM
Ignition switch and starter

CVT fluid level and state

Manual mode switch
E
Engine system
Power supply
Control valve
Symptom
CVT position
Stall test
F
PG-43, STR-18(With GR8-1200 NI),

G

H
TM-438
TM-439
TM-532
TM-557
TM-441
EC-743
TM-414
No creep at all. 2 4 3 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 13 14 1
Vehicle cannot run in any position. 8 2 5 6 7 9 10 11 3 4 12 13 1 K
With selector lever in D position, driv-
8 2 5 6 7 9 10 11 3 4 12 13 1
ing is not possible.
With selector lever in R position, driv- L
8 2 5 6 7 9 10 11 3 4 12 13 1
ing is not possible.
Judder occurs during lock-up. 2 6 3 4 5 7 8 1
Strange noise in D position. 2 3 4 1 M
Strange noise in R position. 2 3 4 1
Strange noise in N position. 2 3 4 1
N
Vehicle does not decelerate by engine
Other 7 3 4 5 6 2 8 1
brake.
Maximum speed low. 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 11 4 10 1
O
With selector lever in P position, vehi-
cle does not enter parking condition or,
1 2
with selector lever in another position,
parking condition is not cancelled. P
Vehicle runs with CVT in P position. 1 3 4 2
Vehicle runs with CVT in N position. 1 3 4 2
Engine stall. 2 6 3 4 8 9 5 7 10 1
Engine stalls when selector lever shift-
2 6 3 4 5 7 1
ed N → D or R.
Engine speed does not return to idle. 2 4 3 5 1

Other
tion.
or P.
Does not shift.
Symptom
Revision: November 2015

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Engine does not start in N or P posi-
Cannot be changed to manual mode.

Engine starts in positions other than N
EC-743 Engine system
3
4
4
3
3
5
TM-542
6
6
6
7
TM-414
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
Manual mode switch
1
TM-438 Stall test
TM-439 CVT position
3
2
2
2
TM-532 Power supply

5
TM-557 Control valve
8
TM-441 CVT fluid level and state

1
PG-43, STR-18(With GR8-1200 NI), Ignition switch and starter

1
1
2016 JUKE
[CVT: RE0F10D]

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
Symptom Table 2
A

B
Parking mechanism
Shift lock solenoid
CVT shift selector

Torque converter
Stop lamp switch

Forward clutch
Reverse brake
Planetary gear
Symptom C
Oil pump
Bearings
TM
TM-581
TM-536
TM-537
TM-546
TM-577
Large shock (N→D position) 2 1 E

Shift Shock Large shock (N→R position) 2 1
Shock is too large for lock-up. 1
F
Vehicle cannot be started from D
3 1 2
position.
Vehicle cannot be started from R
position.
4 1 2 3 G
Does not lock-up. 1 3 2
Slips/Will Does not hold lock-up condition. 1 3 2 H

Not Engage Lock-up is not released. 1 2
With selector lever in D position,
1 3 2
acceleration is extremely poor. I
With selector lever in R position,
1 4 2 3
acceleration is extremely poor.
Slips at lock-up. 1 2 J

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
Parking mechanism
Shift lock solenoid
CVT shift selector

Stop lamp switch
Torque converter
Forward clutch
Reverse brake
Planetary gear
Symptom
Oil pump
Bearings
TM-581
TM-536
TM-537
TM-546
TM-577
No creep at all. 1 6 2 4 5 3
Vehicle cannot run in all posi-
1 2 4 5 3 6
tions.
With selector lever in D position,
1 2 4 3 5
driving is not possible.
With selector lever in R position,
1 2 4 3 5
driving is not possible.
Judder occurs during lock-up. 1
Strange noise in D position. 1 2 4 3 5
Strange noise in R position. 1 2 4 3
Strange noise in N position. 1 2 3
Maximum speed low. 1 5 2 4 3
With selector lever in P position,
vehicle does not enter parking
condition or, with selector lever in 1
another position, parking condi-
tion is not cancelled.
Other
Vehicle runs with CVT in P posi-
2 1
tion.
Vehicle runs with CVT in N posi-
2 3 1
tion.
Engine stall. 1
Engine stalls when selector lever
1
shifted N → D or R.
Does not shift. 1
Cannot be changed to manual
1
mode.
When brake pedal is depressed
with ignition switch ON, selector
1 2 3
lever cannot be shifted from P po-
sition to other position.
When brake pedal is not de-
pressed with ignition switch ON,
1 2 3
selector lever can be shifted from
P position to other position.

CVT FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [CVT: RE0F10D]
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE A
CVT FLUID
B
FLUID LEAKAGE
• Check transaxle surrounding area (oil seal and plug etc.)for fluid C
leakage.
• If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts and adjust
CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-441, "Adjustment".
TM
SMA146B
F

CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [CVT: RE0F10D]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
JSDIA6663GB
1. Selector lever knob 2. Lock pin 3. Knob cover

4. Position indication panel 5. CVT shift selector assembly 6. Detent switch
7. Park position switch 8. Shift lock unit 9. Position indicator bulb
:N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
2. Shift the selector lever to “N” position.
4. Disconnect the CVT shift selector connector.

CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
6. Disconnect the tip (A) of control cable and remove socket (B)
from the CVT shift selector assembly. A
7. Remove the CVT shift selector assembly mounting bolts.
8. Remove the CVT shift selector assembly from the vehicle.
B
JSDIA4220ZZ
TM
INSTALLATION
• When connecting the control cable (1) to the CVT shift selector
assembly (2), face the grooved surface of the rib (A) up and insert E
the control cable until it stops.
JSDIA1624ZZ
H
I
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Confirm the installation condition of wiring before disassembly.
J
1. Slide the selector lever knob cover (1) down.
CAUTION:
Never damage the knob cover.
2. Pull out the lock pin (2). K
3. Pull the selector lever knob (3) and knob cover upwards to
remove them.
L
4. Remove the position lamp.
M
JSDIA2401ZZ
5. Disengage the hooks (A) (4 locations), and lift up the position

indication panel (1) to separate it from the CVT shift selector N
assembly (2).
CAUTION:
Never damage the CVT shift selector assembly. O
JSDIA1802ZZ

CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
6. Remove shift lock unit mounting screws ( ).
JSDIA6479ZZ
7. Remove the shift lock unit (1) from the CVT shift selector assem-
bly.
8. Disconnect shift lock solenoid harness connector, park position
switch harness connector, and detent switch harness connector.
JSDIA6480ZZ
9. Remove park position switch (1) and detent switch (2) from shift
lock unit.
CAUTION:
Never damage pawls.
JSDIA6481ZZ
ASSEMBLY
Note the following, and assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
• Follow the procedure below and place the selector knob onto the CVT shift selector.
1. Install the lock pin (2) onto the selector lever knob (3).
2. Install the knob cover (1) onto the selector lever knob.
3. Press the selector lever knob onto the selector lever until it
clicks.
CAUTION:
• When pressing the selector lever knob onto the selector
lever, never press the selector lever knob button.
• Never strike the selector lever knob to press it into place.
JSDIA2401ZZ

Check the CVT position. If a malfunction is found, adjust the CVT position. Refer to TM-439, "Adjustment".

CONTROL CABLE
CONTROL CABLE
A
TM
I
JSDIA6076GB
1. Lock plate 2. Bracket 3. Transaxle assembly J

4. Control cable 5. Bracket 6. CVT shift selector assembly
A: Manual lever B: Grommet
L
CAUTION:
Always apply the parking brake before performing removal and installation. M
REMOVAL
1. Apply the parking brake. N
CAUTION:
Make sure the vehicle cannot move with the parking brake applied.
O
3. Disconnect the tip (A) of control cable and remove socket (B)
from the CVT shift selector assembly.
JSDIA4220ZZ

CONTROL CABLE
4. Disengage the pawls (B) of the grommet (A), and pull down-
wards to remove.
5. Remove the battery and battery mounting bracket assembly.
Refer to PG-105, "Removal and Installation".
JSDIA1809ZZ
6. Remove the control cable nut ( ) and remove the control cable
(1) from the manual lever (2).
: Vehicle front
JSDIA6039ZZ
7. Remove the lock plate (1) and remove the control cable (2) from
bracket (3).
: Vehicle front
8. Remove center muffler from the mounting rubber and lower the
center muffler downward. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
9. Remove heat plate.
JSDIA5184ZZ
10. Remove the control cable (1) from the bracket (2).
:Vehicle front
11. Remove the control cable from the vehicle.
JPDIA0107ZZ
INSTALLATION
• After installing control cable, adjust it. Refer to TM-551, "Inspection and Adjustment".

CONTROL CABLE
• From below the vehicle, press the grommet (A) into place until the
pawls (B) make a click sound. A
CAUTION:
• Place the grommet on the floor, then fasten it in place from
below the vehicle.
B
• Check that pulling down on the grommet does not discon-
nect it.
JSDIA1809ZZ
TM
• Pay attention to the following when connecting the control cable to the CVT shift selector.
1. When connecting the control cable (1) to the CVT shift selector
assembly (2), face the grooved surface of the rib (A) up and E
insert the control cable until it stops.
JSDIA1624ZZ
H
2. Install the socket (A) onto the CVT shift selector.
CAUTION:
• Place the socket onto the CVT shift lever, then fasten it in I
place from above.
• Check that the pulling on the socket does not disconnect
it.
J
K
JSDIA1810ZZ

L
ADJUSTMENT OF CONTROL CABLE

1. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position. M
CAUTION:
Rotate the wheels at least a quarter turn and be certain the Park position mechanism is fully
engaged.
N
2. Loosen nut and set manual lever to the “P” position.
CAUTION:
Never apply force to the manual lever.
O
3. Tighten the nut to the specified torque. Refer to TM-549,
"Exploded View".
CAUTION:
In tightening, fix the manual lever. P
JSDIA5177ZZ

Check the CVT position. Refer to TM-439, "Inspection".

PADDLE SHIFTER
PADDLE SHIFTER
AWDIA0557GB
1. Steering column assembly 2. Paddle shifter (shift-down switch) 3. Paddle shifter (shift-up switch)
REMOVAL
2. Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to SR-12, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the steering wheel. Refer to ST-9, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove the column cover. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".

PADDLE SHIFTER
5. Remove the paddle shifter connector (C) and (D) from paddle
shifter. A
A : Side of paddle shifter (shift-down switch)

B : Side of paddle shifter (shift-up switch) B
6. Remove the paddle shifter mounting bolts (E) and nuts (F).
7. Remove the paddle shifter from the steering column assembly.
C
TM
G
AWDIA0563ZZ
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. H

TCM
TCM
JSDIA7186GB
1. Bracket 2. TCM
:Vehicle front
CAUTION:
• Never impact on TCM when removing or installing TCM.
• When replacing TCM, note the “CVTF DETERIORATION DATE” value displayed on CONSULT “CON-
FORM CVTF DETERIORTN” in MAINTENANCE BOOKLET, before start the operation.
then replace TCM.
• Before replacing TCM, perform “ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCM”. Refer to TM-429,
"Work Procedure".
REMOVAL
2. Remove air duct (inlet) and air cleaner case. Refer to EM-192, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove the TCM.
5. Remove the bracket.
INSTALLATION

When replaced TCM, perform "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCM". Refer to TM-429, "Work
Procedure".

AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
A
TM
G
JSDIA6058ZZ
1. Air breather hose 2. Clip 3. Transaxle assembly

4. Air breather tube 5. Harness bracket
H
: Vehicle front
I
J
REMOVAL
2. Remove clip of air breather hose from harness bracket. K
3. Remove air breather hose from transaxle assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the followings and installation is in the reverse order of removal. L
CAUTION:
• Never bend the air breather hose to prevent damage to the hose.
• Insert air breather hose (1) to air breather tube (A) all the way M
to the curve of the tube.
• Insert air breather hose to air breather tube so that the paint
mark (B) is facing upward.
N
JSDIA2399ZZ P

AIR BREATHER HOSE
• Never reuse clip (A).
• Securely install the clip to the harness bracket.
JSDIA2458ZZ

OIL PAN
OIL PAN
A
TM
I
JSDIA7928GB
Transaxle assembly Oil pan gasket Magnet J

Oil pan Drain plug Drain plug gasket
Overflow plug O-ring
K
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb) L
: Apply CVT fluid
M
REMOVAL N
1. Remove drain plug from oil pan and then drain the CVT fluid.
JSDIA5205ZZ

OIL PAN
2. Remove drain plug gasket .
JSDIA5206ZZ
3. Remove oil pan bolts ( ).
: Vehicle front
4. Remove oil pan from transaxle case.
JSDIA5207ZZ
5. Remove oil pan gasket from oil pan.
JSDIA7929ZZ
6. Remove magnets from oil pan.
JSDIA7930ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never reuse oil pan gasket.
• Never reuse drain plug gasket.
• Completely clean the iron powder from the magnet area of oil pan and the magnets.
• Install the oil pan to the transaxle case with the following procedure.
1. Install the oil pan gasket to the oil pan.
CAUTION:

OIL PAN
Completely wipe out any moisture, oil, and old gasket from the oil pan gasket surface and bolt
hole of oil pan and transaxle case. A
2. Install the oil pan assembly to the transaxle case, and then temporarily tighten the oil pan bolt.
3. Tighten the oil pan bolts in the order shown to the specified
torque.
B
: Vehicle front
4. Tighten the oil pan bolts again clockwise from (1) shown to the C
specified torque.
• Fill with CVT fluid after installation. Refer to TM-440, "Replace-
ment".
TM
JSDIA5211ZZ
E

Check oil pan for foreign material. F
• If a large amount of worn material is found, clutch plate may be worn.
• If iron powder is found, bearings, gears, or clutch plates may be worn.
• If aluminum powder is found, bushing may be worn, or chips or burrs of aluminum casting parts may enter. G
Check points where wear is found in all cases.
Start the engine and check visually that there is no leakage of CVT fluid. H

INPUT SPEED SENSOR
INPUT SPEED SENSOR
JSDIA6059GB
1. Transaxle assembly 2. O-ring 3. Input speed sensor

: Apply CVT fluid
REMOVAL
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spill-
ing.
2. Remove battery and battery support. Refer to PG-105, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove ECM and bracket as a set. Refer to EC-1256, "Removal and Installation".
4. Disconnect input speed sensor connector.
5. Remove mounting bolt ( ) and remove input speed sensor (1)
from transaxle assembly.
JSDIA6619ZZ

INPUT SPEED SENSOR
6. Remove O-ring (1) from input speed sensor.
A
JSDIA5196ZZ
TM
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never reuse O-ring. E
• Apply CVT fluid to the O-ring.
F
Start the engine and check visually that there is no leakage of CVT fluid.
G
If CVT fluid leaks during work, adjust the CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-441, "Adjustment".
H

JSDIA6060GB
1. Transaxle assembly 2. Primary speed sensor 3. O-ring

: Apply CVT fluid
REMOVAL
2. Remove fender protector (LH). Refer to EXT-31, "Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect primary speed sensor.
4. Remove mounting bolt ( ) and remove primary speed sensor
(1) from transaxle assembly.
JSDIA6618ZZ

5. Remove O-ring (1) from primary speed sensor.
A
JSDIA5199ZZ
TM
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never reuse O-ring. E
• Apply CVT fluid to the O-ring.
F
G
H

OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
JSDIA5033GB
1. Transaxle assembly 2. Output speed sensor 3. O-ring

: Apply CVT fluid
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect output speed sensor connector.
3. Remove mounting bolt ( ) and remove output speed sensor (1)
from transaxle assembly.
JSDIA5201ZZ
4. Remove O-ring (1) from output speed sensor.
JSDIA5199ZZ

OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
INSTALLATION
Note the followings and installation is in the reverse order of removal. A
CAUTION:
• Apply CVT fluid to the O-ring. B
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION C

TM

JSDIA6062ZZ
1. Transaxle assembly 2. Differential side oil seal (transaxle 3. Differential side oil seal (converter
case side) housing side)
: Apply CVT fluid
NOTE:
ing.
REMOVAL
Differential Side Oil Seal (Left Side)
1. Remove front drive shaft (left side). Refer to FAX-83, "2WD : Removal and Installation" (2WD), FAX-97,
"AWD : Removal and Installation" (AWD).
(commercial service tool) (A).
CAUTION:
housing.
JPDIA0118ZZ
Differential Side Oil Seal (Right Side)

1. Remove transfer assembly. Refer to FAX-83, "2WD : Removal and Installation" (2WD), FAX-97, "AWD :
Removal and Installation" (AWD).

(commercial service tool) (A). A
CAUTION:
housing.
B
JPDIA0118ZZ
TM
INSTALLATION
Differential Side Oil Seal (Transaxle Case Side) E
CAUTION:
1. Measure height (A) of seal lip. Calculate protrusion (C) of oil F
(1) : Differential side oil seal G

Lip protrusion (C) : C=A–B H

I
CAUTION:
using suitable tool. J
NOTICE:
packing conditions, it is necessary to measure the seal lip height beforehand to clarify the tolerance. K
value calculated from the tip of differential side oil seal lip] and L
M
CAUTION:
erence value, use a new differential side oil seal and per- N
the oil seal. O
NOTE:
pare a new one specifically for patting seal.
4. Remove masking tape. P
CAUTION:

CAUTION:
lated size.
JSDIA4815ZZ

CAUTION:
0.3 mm (0.012 in).
NOTE:
If differential side oil seal is uneven while installing, tilt suitable
tool.
JSDIA4814ZZ
Differential Side Oil Seal (Converter housing Side) (2WD Models)

CAUTION:
1. Measure height (A) of seal lip. Calculate protrusion (C) of oil
(1) : Differential side oil seal

Lip protrusion (C) : C=A–B

CAUTION:
using suitable tool.
NOTICE:
packing conditions, it is necessary to measure the seal lip height beforehand to clarify the tolerance.
value calculated from the tip of differential side oil seal lip] and
CAUTION:
erence value, use a new differential side oil seal and per-
the oil seal.
NOTE:

pare a new one specifically for patting seal. A
4. Remove masking tape.
CAUTION: B
C
CAUTION:
lated size.
TM
JSDIA4815ZZ
F

CAUTION: G
0.3 mm (0.012 in).
NOTE:
If differential side oil seal is uneven while installing, tilt suitable H
tool.
I
JSDIA4814ZZ
Differential Side Oil Seal (Converter housing Side) (AWD Models) J

CAUTION:
• Apply ATF to the differential side oil seal lip and around the oil seal. K
Install differential side oil seal evenly using a drift [outer diameter: 60
mm (2.36 in)] so that differential side oil seal protrudes by the dimen-
sion (A) respectfully.
L
Dimension (A) : Height difference from case end sur-
face is within 1.0 ± 0.5 mm (0.039 ±
0.020 in). M
NOTE:
The reference is the installation direction of the differential side oil
seal. N
JSDIA6885ZZ
O
Drive the vehicle and check visually that there is no leakage of CVT fluid.
P
Adjust the CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-441, "Adjustment".

WATER HOSE
WATER HOSE
JSDIA6063GB
1. Thermostat housing 2. Hose clamp 3. Water hose A

4. Clip 5. Water tube assembly 6. Water hose B
7. Water hose C 8. CVT oil warmer 9. Transaxle assembly
10. Water outlet
REMOVAL
WARNING:
coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn it a quarter turn to
allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by turning it all the way.
CAUTION:
Perform when the engine is cold.
NOTE:
ing.
3. Remove CVT fluid charging pipe. Refer to TM-577, "Exploded View".
4. Remove water hoses.
5. Remove water tube assembly
INSTALLATION

WATER HOSE
CAUTION: A
• Never reuse hose clamp and clip.
• Securely install the water hose clip to the converter housing.
B
• Refer to the following when installing water hoses.
Installation side Direction of paint Hose insertion C

Hose (1)
tube (2) mark depth (L)
Thermostat hous-
Water hose A ing
TM
CVT oil warmer
CVT oil warmer
Frontward Hose end reaches
Water hose B Water tube as- the 2-stage bulge.
E
sembly
Water tube as- JSDIA2459ZZ
Water hose C sembly F

Water outlet Leftward
• Refer to the followings when installing hose clamp. G

CAUTION:
Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge of tube.
H
Hose clamp (3)
Installation side tube
Hose (1) Clamping position
(2) Direction of tab
(A)
I
Thermostat housing
Water hose A
CVT oil warmer
CVT oil warmer J
Frontward 5 – 7 mm (0.20 –
Water hose B Water tube assem- 0.28 in) from hose
bly end
Water tube assem- JSDIA2424ZZ K
Water hose C bly
Water outlet Leftward
L
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION M

Start the engine and check visually that there is no leakage of engine coolant.

FLUID COOLER HOSE
FLUID COOLER HOSE
JSDIA6978GB
1. Transaxle assembly 2. Copper washer 3. Fluid cooler tube B

4. Hose clamp 5. Fluid cooler hose B 6. Fluid cooler tube A
7. Fluid cooler hose A
REMOVAL
NOTE:
ing.
1. Remove fluid cooler hose A and B.
2. Remove fluid cooler tube A and B.
INSTALLATION
Note the followings and Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Never reuse hose clamp, and copper washer.

FLUID COOLER HOSE
Refer to the followings when installing CVT fluid cooler tubes.
• When installing fluid cooler tube A (1) and fluid cooler tube B (2) to A
transaxle assembly, contact fluid cooler tubes stopper (A) and (B)
to transaxle case.
B
JSDIA6070ZZ
TM
• Refer to the followings when installing fluid cooler hose.
Hose (1) Installation side tube (2) Direction of paint mark Hose insertion depth (L)
E
CVT fluid cooler tube A (A): Hose end reaches the 2-stage bulge.
Fluid cooler hose A
CVT oil warmer (B): Hose end reaches the end of tube.
Frontward F
CVT fluid cooler tube B (A): Hose end reaches the 2-stage bulge.
Fluid cooler hose B
CVT oil warmer (B): Hose end reaches the end of tube.
G
JSDIA2355ZZ
J
• Refer to the followings when installing hose clamp.
CAUTION:
Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge of tube.
K
Installation side Hose clamp (3)

Hose (1)
tube (2) Direction of tab Clamping position
L
CVT oil warmer
Fluid cooler
hose A CVT fluid cooler
tube A 5 - 9 mm. (0.20 - 0.35 M
Frontward
CVT oil warmer in) (A) from hose end
Fluid cooler
hose B CVT fluid cooler
tube B N
JSDIA2424ZZ
O
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION P

CVT OIL WARMER
CVT OIL WARMER
JSDIA6066GB
1. Transaxle assembly 2. CVT oil warmer

REMOVAL
WARNING:
coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn it a quarter turn to
CAUTION:
Perform when the engine is cold.
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid/coolant
from spilling.
2. Pull out water hoses from CVT oil warmer. Refer to TM-570, "Removal and Installation".
3. Pull out fluid cooler hoses from CVT oil warmer. Refer to TM-572, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove mounting bolt ( ) and remove CVT oil warmer from
transaxle assembly.
JSDIA6620ZZ
INSTALLATION

CVT OIL WARMER
A
Start the engine and check visually that there is no leakage of CVT fluid and engine coolant.
B
C
TM

PLUG
PLUG
Replace the O-ring if oil leakage or exudes from the plug.

JSDIA3622GB
1. Transaxle assembly 2. O-ring 3. Plug

: Apply CVT fluid
REMOVAL
1. Remove front fender protector (LH). Refer to EXT-31, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the plug and O-ring.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:


TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [CVT: RE0F10D]
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
B
TM
JSDIA6067GB J
1. Transaxle assembly 2. O-ring 3. CVT fluid charging pipe

4. CVT fluid charging pipe cap
K
A. : For the tightening torque, refer to TM-577, "Removal and Installation".
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) L
: Apply petroleum jelly M
N
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure O
coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn a quarter turn to
CAUTION:
• Perform when the engine is cold. P
• When replacing TCM and transaxle assembly simultaneously, perform “ADDITIONAL SERVICE
WHEN REPLACING TCM AND TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY” before work. Refer to TM-433, "Work Proce-
dure".
NOTE:
ing.

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
2. Remove the air duct and air cleaner case. Refer to EM-192, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove the ECM and bracket as a set. Refer to EC-1256, "Removal and Installation".
5. Drain engine coolant. Refer to CO-40, "Draining and Filling".
6. Remove CVT fluid charging pipe from transaxle assembly.
7. Remove O-ring from CVT fluid charging pipe.
8. Disconnect fluid cooler hoses from transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-572, "Removal and Installation".
9. Disconnect following harness connector and wire harness. Refer to TM-361, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM :
Component Parts Location".
• CVT unit harness connector
• Input speed sensor harness connector
• Primary speed sensor harness connector
• Output speed sensor harness connector
• Transmission range switch connector
10. Remove harness and clip from the transaxle assembly.
11. Remove water hoses and water tube assembly. Refer to TM-570, "Removal and Installation".
12. Remove control cable from transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-549, "Removal and Installation".
14. Turn crankshaft and remove the four tightening nuts ( ) for
drive plate and torque converter.
CAUTION:
When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from
the front of the engine.
15. Remove exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
16. Separate the propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-124, "Removal and
Installation".
17. Remove front drive shafts. Refer to FAX-83, "2WD : Removal
and Installation" (2WD), FAX-97, "AWD : Removal and Installa-
tion" (4WD). JPDIA0114ZZ
18. Remove front suspension member from vehicle. Refer to FSU-17, "Removal and Installation".
19. Remove transfer assembly from transaxle assembly with power tool. Refer to DLN-94, "Removal and
Installation".
20. Support transaxle assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION:
21. Support engine assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION:
22. Remove engine mounting insulator (LH). Refer to EM-221, "AWD : Exploded View".
23. Remove bolts fixing transaxle assembly to engine assembly.
24. Remove transaxle assembly from vehicle.
CAUTION:
• Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
• Secure transaxle assembly to a transmission jack.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
• Write down the serial number of the new transaxle assembly.
A
TM
JSDIA6075GB F
• When replacing an engine or transaxle you must make sure any dowels are installed correctly during
re-assembly
• Improper alignment caused by missing dowels may cause vibration, oil leaks or breakage of drive
train components. G
• Never reuse O-rings or copper sealing washers.
• When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine.
• When tightening the nuts for the torque converter while securing the crankshaft pulley bolt, be sure H
to confirm the tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley bolt. Refer to EM-248, "Exploded View".
• After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft several turns to check that CVT rotates
freely without binding.
I
• When installing the CVT to the engine, align the matching mark on the drive plate with the matching
mark on the torque converter.
J
• When installing the drive plate to torque converter nuts, tighten them temporarily. Then tighten the nuts to
• Install the transaxle assembly and engine assembly mounting bolts according to the following standards.
K
Bolt symbol A B
Insertion direction Transaxle to engine Engine to transaxle
L
Number of bolts 1 6
Bolt length
55 (2.17) 50 (1.97)
mm (in)
M
Tightening torque
62 (6.3, 46)
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
JSDIA6068ZZ
N
• When installing charging pipe (1) to transaxle assembly, bracket

(A) of charging pipe surrounds the water hose (2). O
• When replaced transaxle assembly, perform "ADDITIONAL SER-
VICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY". Refer to
TM-431, "Description".
P
JSDIA6071ZZ

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
INSPECTION BEFORE INSTALLATION

After inserting a torque converter to the CVT, check dimension (A)
B : Scale
C : Straightedge
JPDIA0115ZZ

• Start the engine and check visually that there is no leakage of CVT fluid and engine coolant.
• For CVT position, refer to TM-439, "Inspection".

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [CVT: RE0F10D]
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY A

B
TM
JSDIA4173ZZ
G
1. Torque converter 2. O-ring 3. Converter housing oil seal

4. Transaxle assembly H
: Apply CVT fluid
I
J
1. Remove transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-577, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove torque converter from transaxle assembly.
CAUTION: K
Never damage the bushing on the inside of torque converter sleeve when removing torque con-
verter.
3. Remove O-ring from input shaft.
L
4. Remove converter housing oil seal using an oil seal remover (commercial service tool).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch converter housing.
M
Note the followings and assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

CAUTION: N
• Never reuse converter housing oil seal.
• Apply CVT fluid to O-ring. O
• Apply CVT fluid to converter housing oil seal.

• Drive converter housing oil seal (1) evenly using a drift (A) (com-
mercial service tool) so that converter housing oil seal protrudes by
the dimension (B) respectively.
Unit: mm (in)
Outer diameter: 65 (2.56)
Commercial service tool: (A)
Inner diameter: 60 (2.36)
: Transaxle assembly
SCIA7908J
Dimension (B) : 1.0 ± 0.5 mm (0.039 ± 0.020 in)

NOTE:
Converter housing oil seal pulling direction is used as the refer-
ence.
SCIA7909J
• Attach the pawl (A) of the torque converter to the drive sprocket
hole (B) on the transaxle assembly side.
CAUTION:
• Rotate the torque converter for installing torque converter.
• Never damage the bushing inside the torque converter
sleeve when installing the converter housing oil seal.
SCIA7907J

• After inserting a torque converter to the CVT, check dimension (A)
with in the reference value limit. A
B : Scale
C : Straightedge B

C
JPDIA0115ZZ
TM

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [CVT: RE0F10D]

Engine MR16DDT
Applied model
Axle 2WD/AWD
Transaxle model RE0F10D
D position 2.631 – 0.378
Transaxle gear ratio R position 1.960
Final drive 5.694
Recommended fluid and fluid capacity MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants"
Shift Characteristics INFOID:0000000012201287
Unit: rpm
CVT input speed

Throttle position Shift pattern
At 40 km/h (25 MPH) At 60 km/h (37 MPH)
“D” position 1,500 – 3,200 1,600 – 3,500
2/8
ECO mode 1,500 – 3,200 1,600 – 3,500
“D” position 4,000 – 4,800 4,600 – 5,400
8/8
ECO mode 4,000 – 4,800 4,600 – 5,400
NOTE:
Lock-up is engaged at the vehicle speed of approximately 18 km/h (11 MPH) to 130 km/h (81 MPH).
Stall Speed INFOID:0000000012201288
Unit: rpm
Stall speed 2,600 – 3,040
Torque Converter INFOID:0000000012201289
Unit: mm (in)
Dimension “A” between the converter housing and torque converter 14.4 (0.567)

Transaxle & Transmission: Section

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Transaxle & Transmission: Section

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Transaxle & Transmission: Section

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE

PREPARATION ........................................... 13 SIDE OIL SEAL ................................................. 23

COMPONENT PARTS .......................................17 CONTROL LINKAGE ........................................ 25 L

POSITION SWITCH ............................................20 UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...... 30

Revision: November 2015 TM-1 2016 JUKE

FINAL DRIVE ..................................................... 64 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 81

PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 68 UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .... 86

BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH ........................................ 78 FINAL DRIVE .................................................... 136

Revision: November 2015 TM-4 2016 JUKE

P1701 TCM ....................................................... 281 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ...................... 314

Revision: November 2015 TM-5 2016 JUKE

PADDLE SHIFTER .......................................... 322 TORQUE CONVERTER AND CONVERTER

Revision: November 2015 TM-6 2016 JUKE

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ....................................... 379 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING

Revision: November 2015 TM-7 2016 JUKE

Revision: November 2015 TM-8 2016 JUKE

Revision: November 2015 TM-9 2016 JUKE

PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR ........................... 562 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS

Revision: November 2015 TM-10 2016 JUKE

When disconnecting the battery terminal, pay attention to the following. P

Revision: November 2015 TM-11 2016 JUKE

D4D engine : 20 minutes YS23DDT : 4 minutes

Revision: November 2015 TM-12 2016 JUKE

KV38100200 • Installing mainshaft front bearing outer race F

ST33220000 Installing input shaft oil seal

ST33400001 Installing differential side bearing outer race

Revision: November 2015 TM-13 2016 JUKE

ST33052000 • Removing mainshaft rear bearing inner race

ST30901000 Installing mainshaft rear bearing inner race

ST33061000 Removing differential side bearing inner race

KV32300QAM Removing and installing input shaft rear bear-

Revision: November 2015 TM-14 2016 JUKE

Tool name Description

Drift Installing bushing

Drift Installing input shaft front bearing

Drift • Installing input shaft rear bearing N

Revision: November 2015 TM-15 2016 JUKE

Drift Installing differential side bearing inner race

Puller • Removing differential side bearing inner

Puller • Removing differential side bearing inner

Remover • Removing bushing

Revision: November 2015 TM-16 2016 JUKE

Revision: November 2015 TM-17 2016 JUKE

System Description INFOID:0000000012200756

Revision: November 2015 TM-18 2016 JUKE

1 : 1st main gear

REVERSE GEAR NOISE PREVENTION FUNCTION (SYNCHRONIZING METHOD)

1 : Reverse fork rod

Revision: November 2015 TM-19 2016 JUKE

1.CHECK BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH

Terminals Condition Continuity

PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH

1.CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH

Terminals Condition Continuity

Revision: November 2015 TM-20 2016 JUKE

SHIFT CONTROL LINKAGE (Worn)

BAULK RING (Worn or damaged)

BEARING (Worn or damaged)

INSERT SPRING (Damaged)